User Manual - AMS Neve

CAPRICORN 

USER MANUAL 

527-140 

Issue 5.1 

© 2003 AMS Neve plc own the copyright of all 

information and drawings contained in this manual which 

are not to be copied or reproduced by any means or 

disclosed in part or whole to any third party without 

written permission. 

As part of our policy of continual product improvement, 

we reserve the right to alter specifications without notice 

but with due regard to all current legislation. 

Disclaimer: The information in this manual has been 

carefully checked and is believed to be accurate at the 

time of publication. However, no responsibilty is taken by 

us for inaccuracies, errors or omissions nor any liability 

assumed for any loss or damage resulting either directly or 

indirectly from use of the information contained within it. 

HEAD 

OFFICE 

AMS NEVE PLC • BILLINGTON ROAD • BURNLEY 

LANCS BB11 5UB • ENGLAND 

TELEPHONE: +44 (0) 1282 457011 • FAX: +44 (0) 1282 417282 

LONDON OFFICE 

TELEPHONE: +44 (0) 20 7916 2828 • FAX: +44 (0) 20 7916 2827 

NORTH AMERICAN OFFICES 

AMS NEVE INC., NEW YORK 

TEL: +1 (212) 965 1400 • FAX: +1 (212) 965 9306 

AMS NEVE INC., HOLLYWOOD 

TEL: +1 (818) 753 8789 • FAX: +1 (818) 623 4839 

e-mail: enquiry@ams-neve.com 

http://www.ams-neve.com

Capricorn User Manual 

Contents 

1 Introduction 

Overview 1:1 

Concepts of Allocating Processing 1:4 

The Console Surface 1:6 

The Graphics Display 1:26 

2 Getting Started 

Using the Trackball with the Graphics Display 2:2 

Logging on to the system 2:4 

Using the Soft Panel Menus 2:7 

Bank Assignments 2:10 

Using Console Surface Controls 2:11 

Using the AFU 2:13 

Further Information 2:14 

3 Console Setup 

Introduction 3:1 

Configuration Management 3:3 

Backup and Restore 3:9 

Path Numbers 3:15 

Strip Assignment To Banks 3:17 

4 Path Configuration 

Naming a Path 4:2 

Assigning a Path to new Fader 4:4 

Processing Configuration 4:5 

Signal Matrix 4:11 

5 Input/Output Configuration 

Ports and Paths 5:1 

To Assign Ports to Paths 5:2 

Inserts 5:14 

Multitrack Tape Machine Interconnection 5:18 

Issue 5.1 

Page i

Contents 


6 Miscellaneous Setup 

Sample Frequency 6:2 

Desk Level 6:3 

Delay Times 6:5 

Intensity 6:7 

Touch 6:8 

Gearing 6:9 

External 6:11 

Options 6:14 

MIDI 6:20 

7 Routing 

Routing 7:2 

Interrogation 7:5 

Other Routing Panel Functions 7:6 

8 Monitoring 

Monitoring Controls 8:2 

Control Room Monitoring 8:4 

SLS and Headphone Monitoring 8:7 

Overdub Monitoring 8:9 

Solo 8:12 

Mute 8:22 

9 Metering 

Meter Scale 9:2 

Overload 9:2 

Meter Operation 9:3 

Channel strip Meter Mode Selection 9:8 

Monitor Meters 9:9 

Page ii Issue 5.1


Contents 

10 Signal Processing 

Using Channel Strip Banks 10:1 

Function Indicators 10:3 

Input Paths 10:4 

Monitor Signal Paths 10:8 

Track Sends 10:9 

4-Band Parametric Equalizer 10:13 

Filters 10:15 

Dynamics 10:16 

Signal Path Delay (Optional) 10:25 

Insert Switching 10:26 

Copying 10:27 

Fader to Aux Copy 10:29 

11 Auxiliaries and Cues 

Aux Control 11:1 

Contribution Control 11:3 

Aux Flip 11:6 

Cue Sends 11:8 

12 Links and VCA Ganging 

Control Links 12:1 

VCA Control 12:7 

13 Oscillator 

Tone oscillator 13:1 

Slate Oscillator 13:3 

14 Talkback 

Talkback Setup 14:1 

Talkback Group Levels 14:4 

15 Transport Control 

Machine Control 15:2 

Track Control 15:4 

Timecode 15:7 

Labels 15:15 

Cycle 15:22 

Auto Record 15:23 

Locating 15:24 

Issue 5.1 

Page iii

Contents 


16 Automation Overview 

Introduction 16:1 

Automation Controls 16:3 

Scope 16:5 

Automation Modes 16:6 

Mixes, Passes and the Mix Tree 16:8 

Automation Data Storage 16:11 

17 Automation Operations 

Automation Quick Start 17:1 

Automation Data 17:3 

Scope 17:8 

Managing Mixes and Passes 17:15 

Play Pass Selection 17:21 

Automation Modes 17:23 

Collect Touch 17:33 

Capture Start Of Pass Timecode 17:36 

Initial Snapshot (ISS) Amendment 17:38 

Mute/Switch Lists 17:40 

Relay Event List 17:45 

18 Offline Editing 

Offline Trim 18:2 

Offline Delete 18:4 

Mix Conform 18:5 

Slide 18:9 

Mix Compare 18:10 

19 Stores 

The Store List 19:2 

Recalling Stores 19:5 

Browse Stores 19:6 

Sequenced Stores List 19:9 

20 Capricorn Surround 

Standard Surround Features 20:2 

CXS 20:7 

Joystick Module 20:35 

Capricorn Surround Panel (CSP) 20:41 

Page iv Issue 5.1


Contents 

21 MIDI 

MIDI Program Changes 21:1 

MIDI Automation 21:2 

22 Diagnostics 

DSP 22:2 

Logs 22:6 

IO Reset 22:7 

Diags 22:8 

23 Index 

Issue 5.1 

Page v

Contents 


Page vi Issue 5.1


Introduction 

1 Introduction 

1.1 Overview 

The Capricorn recording system represents innovative audio technology at its 

very best. Award winning custom designed integrated circuits give unsurpassed 

digital sonic performance. The system electronics are remote from the actual 

console surface, being rack-mounted in a separate unit. The graphical interface 

and intuitive console surface enable real-time dynamic automation and fast and 

accurate system setup. 

The console surface sections and many of the individual controls are assignable 

so that they can be used for a variety of different signal paths and signal 

processing functions. The degree of assignability is designed to maximize 

simplicity and ease of use with any function being accessible with just one or two 

key-strokes, allowing changes to be made in signal path processing quickly and 

efficiently. 

The console surface is totally modular and each of the sections are 

self-contained with their own PSUs (power supply units), making it easier to 

insert or remove sections, or to make changes to the position of existing 

sections. 

1.1.1 The Assignable Console 

Capricorn is an assignable console which means that one strip of controls for 

each input and output is no longer needed. An assignable console allows a few 

faders and controls to control any system size. On analogue consoles all the 

facilities have to be squeezed into each channel strip which restricts the facilities 

available and can make the control surface difficult to use. On Capricorn there 

are still a number of controls on each channel strip for immediate use. These 

controls are laid out so that they can be easily reached. 

For control of a function that is not on the strip, a central panel called the 

Assignable Facilities Unit (AFU) is assigned to the path on the strip by pressing 

ACCESS 

the key. The AFU has every control for that strip, just like a traditional 

console. The AFU is large so that all controls are easily seen and reached. The 

AFU can be positioned in the centre of the stereo image so that all adjustments 

can be made while listening in the optimum monitoring position. 

The channel strips are used for a number of different purposes so motorized 

faders and continuous rotary encoders are used throughout. When a strip is 

reassigned the fader will move to the position for the new signal path and circular 

bargraph displays around the rotary encoders will show the new setting. 

Issue 5.1 

Page1:1

Introduction 


1.1.2 Multi-user Operation 

The console can have up to 5 sections of 24 strips giving a maximum of 120 

faders. Up to 3 AFUs can also be fitted, and each AFU can be linked to a different 

section of strips so that the console can be used by several people at a time. 

ACCESS 

When an key is pressed only the AFU associated with that strip is 

reassigned so that an operator working on another AFU is not affected. 

Note: During split working there are still only 12 global fader banks and each split 

unit does not have its own set of banks. However, when a new bank is selected 

only the strips associated with that AFU will be reassigned. 

The global functions which override SPLIT divisions are: 

Reverse routing and interrogation 

Link formation and interrogation 

1.1.3 Hard Disk Organisation 

The hard disk is partitioned into three notional areas - System, User and Project. 

These partitions are maintained by the System Manager who requires a 

password to enable access to the various housekeeping functions such as 

deleting and moving data. 

System Partition 

The System Partition contains all the files needed for running the system, and is 

not directly accessible to the user. These files include down-loadable code and 

data for all the node processors, tables of defaults and command and fault logs. 

The System Manager has access to some data in the System Partition (e.g. the 

command and fault logs) through special utilities but cannot normally edit or 

delete files in this area. 

User Partition 

The User Partition is subdivided into areas, or directories, for each user. This 

partition holds configuration data that defines desk setups. Each user can have 

a number of configurations which can be recalled in part or in full at any time. It is 

necessary to log on to the system as a named user in order to create and store 

personalised data. If the operator does not log on then data is stored in the 

Default user area which may be used by anyone. 

User directories can be created and removed only by the System Manager. 

Each user directory can contain console setups and default information to 

customise the operation of the system. Each user directory can be protected by 

a personal password. 

Page1:2 Issue 5.1


Introduction 

Project Partition 

The Project Partition is the area of the storage system which contains dynamic 

automation data including all the system configurations, mix data, cue lists and 

notes for particular jobs. The partition is divided into Client directories, beneath 

which are Project directories and beneath these are Title directories. For 

example, an album project will have several titles, each of which contains its 

individual mix tree. 

TITLE1 

MIX0.0 

MIX TREE 

PROJECT1 

TITLE2 

MIX0.0 

MIX TREE 

CLIENT 

TITLE1 

MIX0.0 

MIX TREE 

PROJECT2 

TITLE2 

MIX0.0 

MIX TREE 

A default scratch mix directory is provided for general use. This can be 

convenient for quick, unplanned operations which do not need the data 

preserving (e.g. testing a procedure). 

Client directories and sub-directories can be created by any user, but may only 

be removed by the System Manager. Client data can be password protected in 

the same way as user data. 

Copying data to and from removable disks 

The system allows the user to transfer data to and from removable Optical Disks 

and Floppy disks (if the drive is fitted). This enables both mix data and system 

configurations to be copied between Capricorn systems or archived. This 

procedure can also be used to back-up data, however the facility to back-up the 

whole of the Hard Disk onto Optical disk is a more thorough and rapid backup 

mechanism. It is recommended that the complete backup operation is 

performed weekly, this operation is described in the technical manual. 

Floppy disks can hold configuration data only. 

Issue 5.1 

Page1:3

Introduction 


1.2 Concepts of Allocating Processing 

The Capricorn is a digital console which uses software controlled processing 

power to provide signal paths and signal processing elements such as EQ, 

Compressor and Filter. Processing elements can be put in any order on a signal 

path. Processing is assigned to the paths as needed by the operator, using the 

Path Configuration screen on the Graphics Display monitor. 

Inputs, Monitors, Groups, Outputs, Aux Masters and Cues are the types of 

signal path. The number of each type of signal path is set up by the operator and 

will depend on the type of session. Configurations can be stored and recalled. 

The size of a Capricorn system will define the maximum number of all signal 

paths. The maximum number of each type of signal path is: 

Input Paths - Limited by number of PCBs fitted 

Monitor Paths - Limited by number of PCBs fitted 

Group Paths - 24 

Main Output Paths - 8 

Aux Master Paths - 16 

Cue Paths - 16 

Any type of signal path can be configured as stereo and will use two signal 

paths. All controls are ganged together so that identical processing is applied to 

the left and right channels. 

1.2.1 Path Structure 

GROUP 

Mic/Line 

or AES/EBU 

INPUT 

AUX 

(Pre or Post) 

AUX 

(Pre or Post) 

MAIN 

OUTPUT 

MON 

(Track Return) 

MULTI-TRACK 

AUX 

(Pre or Post) 

TRACK 

SEND 

INPUT/GROUP/MON 

AUX 

MASTER 

OUTPUT 

CUE 

EXTERNAL 

SOURCE 

Page1:4 Issue 5.1


Introduction 

Input, Monitor, Group, Aux, Cue and Main Output paths can be configured with 

EQ, Filter, Limiter, Compressor and Expander/Gate. 

Track Send paths do not exist in the same way as other signals and the level for 

them is controlled via the screen only. 

1.2.2 Signal Ports 

Since the routing within Capricorn is inherently flexible, the port (or connector) 

that feeds a signal path can be changed. This gives the operator a number of 

advantages. 

1. External equipment can be permanently connected to a patch 

bay and then patched to an input or output through software 

using the screen. 

2. If an error or fault occurs on an external I/O rack the operator 

can patch around the problem 

3. The ports can be changed during a ‘scene change’ so that the 

same channels can be used to control different sources. 

Usually the ports will remain assigned to the same path and the selector will be 

transparent to the operator since it is recalled from the configuration store. 

Issue 5.1 

Page1:5

Introduction 


1.3 The Console Surface 

There are three type of section in a Capricorn console surface: 

Strip Sections 

Monitor Section 

AFU Section 

Contain the Path (or Channel) Strips. 

Each Strip Section has eight Path Strips. 

A Capricorn will have at least 24 Path Strips (i.e. 3 Strip 

Sections). 

Contains master controls for tape machines, monitoring, 

etc., and the keyboard and trackball for controlling the 

graphics display. 

Contains controls for routing and all the processing and 

signal elements which can be assigned to a path. 

Page1:6 Issue 5.1


Introduction 

1.3.1 Strip Section 

Each strip section contains eight 

strips. There is no correlation 

between the number of strips and the 

electrical size of the system. Any 

console frame size can therefore 

control and operate any system size. 

The strip differs from a traditional 

channel strip in various ways. It is 

assignable to a number of audio 

paths and path types. Facilities such 

as EQ and dynamics are removed 

from the strip and placed in an 

Assignable Facilities Unit (AFU). All 

functions can still be accessed from 

the strip by using the Function 

Assignable Controls. 

The Function Assignable Controls 

(FACs) are rotary controls which use 

shaft-encoders rather than 

conventional potentiometers. Each 

FAC has a circular bargraph 

surrounding it which illuminates in 

different ways depending on the 

parameter being controlled. 

Meters 

FAC Indicators 

and 

Function Selection 

FAC Automation 

FACs 

(Function 

Assignable 

Controls) 

Monitoring 

Solo and Link Isolate 

Mute and 

Mute Automation 

Fader 

Automation 

Path Type Indicators 

Access 

Faders 

Issue 5.1 

Page1:7

Introduction 


Meters 

Each channel strip has a Vacuum 

Fluorescent Display (VFD) to show 

metering information. 

The lower part of the display is used 

to show the signal on the channel 

strip, the upper part is used for high 

resolution metering and its mode is 

selected on the AFU. 

OVERLOAD 

INDICATOR LEDs 

SIGNAL OVERLOAD 

INDICATORS 

SIGNAL PATH 

METER 

RECORD 

STATUS LEDs 

REFERENCE LEVEL 

INDICATORS 

If the signals are stereo then two 

bars will be shown on the input meter 

and high resolution meter. 

The VFDs are high resolution dot 

matrix displays and can also be used 

to show non-metering information 

such as path configuration. 

METER LABEL 

INPUT OVERLOAD 

INDICATORS 

TR20 

METERS SHOWING 

LEFT AND RIGHT INPUT LEVEL 

AND COMP/LIM, EXP/GATE 

STATUS 

FAC Indicators and Selector 

The FAC indicators show which 

signal processing elements have 

been assigned to the Path in the strip 

and which elements are switched in 

and out. 

SEL 

The key is used to cycle the 

function which will be switched in 

and out. 

FAC Automation 

Used for setting the Automation 

Mode of all controls except the Fader 

and the Mute key. 

Collect Touch will put all controls in 

the path into touch (including the 

Fader and the Mute key) except 

those which have been isolated from 

the automation system. 

E/G 

COM 

LIM 

FIL 

EQ 

INS 

DEL 

Φ 

IN 

PLAY 

COL 

TOUCH 

SEL IN 

STR 48V 

SEL 

REC 

GLIDE 

Page1:8 Issue 5.1


Introduction 

FACs (Function Assignable Controls) 


are the rotary controls on each path 

strip. They can be used for different 

functions according to the FAC 

Selection keys on the AFU. The 

function of the two centre rotary 

controls are indicated on the AFU. 

8888 

Nominally the top FAC is for input 

functions such as Mic/Line Gain, the 

middle two are for auxilliary 

contributions and the bottom FAC is 

for Pan. A 4-digit alphanumeric 

display above the top FAC shows 

either the status of the assignments 

or the precise numeric value of the 

last control touched. 

Monitoring 

The monitoring controls are only 

used on the monitor paths for 

monitor source selection and are 

inactive for other path types. 

O/D 

SEND 

LOCK 

RET 

Solo and Link Isolate 

Used to Solo the path assigned to 

the strip and exclude individual 

controls from a link structure. 

Solo has three modes (Cut Solo, 

APL or PFL) which are set globally. 

SOLO 

MUTE 

PLAY 

MUTE 

LINK 

ISO 

MUTE 

REC 

Issue 5.1 

Page1:9

Introduction 


Mute and Mute Automation 

Mute is used for pre-fader cut of the 

signal currently assigned to the strip. 

Mute keys also have their own keys 

for setting automation modes. 

SOLO 

MUTE 

PLAY 

LINK 

ISO 

MUTE 

REC 

MUTE 

Fader Automation 

Used to set the automation mode for 

the fader in the path currently 

assigned to the strip. 

FDR 

PLAY 

TRIM 

FDR 

REC 

GLIDE 

Path Type Indication 

The type of signal path the strip is assigned to is indicated by 6 LEDs which 

illuminate to show Group, VCA, Auxiliary, Input, Monitor or Output. 

The VCA LED together with the 

channel path LED to show that the 

channel is under control of a VCA. 

GRP 

I/P 

VCA 

MON 

AUX 

O/P 

Access 

Two 

ACCESS 

keys are provided in each strip to assign the processing controls of 

the Assignable Facilities Unit (AFU) to the selected path.The 

ACCESS 

keys are 

also used for routing, link and copy functions. 

ACCESS 

The two keys allow two banks 

to be assigned across the console, 

primary on the upper key and 

secondary on the lower key. The 

paths in each bank are shown on the 

4-digit alpha displays. Illumination of 

the display is bright for the active 

path and dim for the passive path. 

ACCESS 

Pressing the key for the 

passive path makes it active. 

ACCESS 

8888 

8888 

ACCESS 

Page1:10 Issue 5.1

8 


Introduction 

Faders 

The faders are touch sensitive, motorised and automated so that fader moves 

may be stored and replayed. The faders may also be linked together in groups, 

one fader controlling the movement of all faders linked to it. Audio does not pass 

through the fader so they can be assigned to other functions such as Aux Gain or 

trim controls. 

The right hand scale (-8 to +10dB) 

shows the gain or attenuation 

applied to the signal by the fader. 

The left hand scale (-20 to +20dB) 

indicates the offset which may be 

applied to the fader while in trim 

mode. This enables a static or 

dynamic offset to be applied to 

previously recorded fader moves. 

Arrow shaped LEDs are provided to 

show which way the fader knob must 

be moved to reach the null position. 

Once the fader is nulled both LEDs 

go out. Other methods of nulling are 

available through the automation 

system. 

20 

10 

0 

10 

20 

+ 

10 

5 

0 

5 

10 

20 

30 

40 

- 

Issue 5.1 Page 1:11

Introduction 


1.3.2 AFU Section 

The Assignable Facilities Unit (AFU) contains individual controls for auxiliaries, 

EQ, dynamics, routing, etc. This provides the currently accessed strip with all 

the controls necessary for the processing elements which can be assigned to a 

path. The AFU removes the need to have individual controls for every function 

on every strip. Up to three AFUs may be fitted for multi-man operation. The AFU 

ACCESS 

controls are accessed by pressing the key for the required path. 

Routing 

Control Reset 

Meter Select 

Track Contribution 

Duplicate FAC Indication 

Auxiliaries/Panning 

Strip FAC Selector 

Input Selection, Gain, 

Trim and Balance 

AFU Graphic Display 

Delay 

Filter 

Width and Pan/Balance 

Expander/Gate 

Compressor 

Limiter 

Sidechain 

Duplicate Strip Controls 

Insert 

4-Band Equaliser 

AFU Automation 

Bank Selection 

Access, Aux and Hold 

AFU Fader 

and Script Area 

Control Duplication 

The left hand side of the AFU duplicates the controls on a strip, except the FACs 

are replaced by the Strip FAC Selector controls which are used to globally 

assign functions to the strip FACs. The access section is also different, with Aux, 

Hold and strip stepping keys in place of the secondary 

ACCESS 

key and its alpha 

display. 

Page1:12 Issue 5.1


Introduction 

Control Reset 

Used to reset controls to the default 

null or 0dB position. 

CONTROL 

RESET 

AFU 

FLAT 

FDR 

FLAT 

Meter Select 

Used to select the signal shown on 

the VFD meters at the top of the path 

strips. A graphic mode is also 

available, which causes the VFDs to 

display alternative information such 

as path configuration. 

METER 

SELECT 

MTR 

RESET 

GRAPHIC 

TRK/RET B 

TRK/RET A 

TRK SEND 

FOL FADER 

Routing 

The Routing panel is used to control and interrogate routing to tracks, 

sub-groups and main outputs. The Routing panel is also used when setting up 

track sends for film stems. 

TRACK ROUTING 

GROUP ROUTING 

FILM 

MODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

MS 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

DUAL 

MONO 

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

STEM 

SEL 

25 27 29 31 

26 28 30 32 

OUTPUT ROUTING 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

33 35 37 39 

34 36 38 40 

41 

43 45 47 

42 44 46 48 

INTER 

LOCK 

CLEAR 

ROUTE 

ROUTING 

TOUCH 

Issue 5.1 Page 1:13

Introduction 


Strip FAC Selection 

Used for global assignment of 

functions to the FACs on the path 

strips. 

I/P 

SEL 

FAC 

SELECTION 

TRK 

CONT 

GAIN 

FILM 

DELAY 

TRIM 

EQ 

AUX 

SEL 

I/P 

BAL 

8888 

AUX 

SEL 

ON 

OFF 

ON 

PRE 

IN/OUT 

OFF 

POST 

PEAK 

PRE 

POST 

8888 

AUX 

SEL 

BAL 

P/B 

P/W 

Q 

WIDTH 


Used to adjust the level of the send 

from a channel path to a track. 

TRACK CONT 

Input Controls 

Used to select the input source for 

inputs from a Mic/Line rack. 

LINE 

A 

SWAP 

MIC 

A 

Used to set the input gain, trim and 

balance. 

LINE 

B 

MIC 

B 

GAIN 

TRIM 

I/P BAL 

Page1:14 Issue 5.1


Introduction 

Delay 

Used to adjust delay and switch it in 

and out. 

DELAY 

DELAY 

IN 

Auxiliaries/Panning 

Used to adjust the contribution level from the currently accessed path to the 

auxiliary busses. There can be up to 16 auxiliaries configured in the current 

setup. The top row of controls are also used for surround panning for film stems. 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

1 

3 

5 

7 

9 

11 

13 

15 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

2 

42 

6 

8 

10 

12 

14 

16 

AFU Graphic Display 

This is a vacuum fluorescent display 

(VFD) which shows the precise 

settings of an AFU rotary control 

when it is touched. Signal elements 

can be selected for viewing by the 

keys under the display. 

CON 

FIG 

I/P 

EXP 

GATE 

COMP LIM FLTR EQ 

Issue 5.1 Page 1:15

Introduction 


Width and Pan/Balance 

Used to adjust width and balance on 

stereo paths, or pan on mono paths. 

Each control can be switched in and 

out of the path individually. 

WIDTH 

PAN/BAL 

PAN 

IN 

WIDTH 

IN 

Insert 

Used to switch an insert in and out of 

the path. 

INS 

IN 

Filter 

Used to change the settings on the 

high and low band filters. The whole 

filter is switched in and then each 

band is switched on and off 

individually. 

HIGH PASS 

IN 

FILTER 

FLTR 

IN 

IN 

LOW PASS 

4-Band Equaliser 

The Equaliser is switched in as a 

single unit and then each band is 

switched in and out of circuit 

individually. The rotary controls are 

used to change frequency, cut/boost 

and Q. 

EQUALISER 

FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ 

-/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ 

EQ 

IN 

IN 

IN 

IN 

IN 

Page1:16 Issue 5.1


Introduction 

Dynamics - Expander/Gate, Compressor, Limiter and 

Sidechain 

The Expander/Gate, Compressor 

and Limiter are each switched in and 

out of circuit individually. They each 

have a small bargraph meter which 

shows the effect on the signal. 

AUTO 

REL 

GMU 

LEVEL 

AUTO 

GMU 

EXP 

EXP HOLD 

GATE RATIO 

The Sidechain can be selected to 

control any of the other dynamics 

elements. The Sidechain can be 

keyed from another signal source 

and the keying can be inverted to 

reversed the action of the Sidechain. 

KEY 

8888 

INV 

LEVEL 

HOLD/RATIO 

RELEASE TIME RELEASE TIME RELEASE TIME 

SCL 

DELAY 

OFF 

ATTACK TIME ATTACK TIME ATTACK TIME 

FREQ 

RATIO 

RANGE 

-/+ 

THRESHOLD 

THRESHOLD 

THRESHOLD 

SCF SCF SCF 

SCF SCF SCF 

SCF 

IN 

LIM 

IN 

COMP 

IN 

E/G 

IN 

SCF 

LIMITER 

COMPRESSOR 

EXP/GATE 

Access, Aux and Hold 

ACCESS 

The AFU key is used for 

routing, link and copy functions. The 

name of the current path assigned 

(or called) to the AFU is shown in the 

alpha display. The current path on 

the AFU can be locked in using the 

HOLD 

key. The arrow keys are used 

to step along the paths on the 

surface, and the Aux keys are for 

using faders for aux contribution. 

ACCESS 

8888 

HOLD 

AUX 

AUX 

Issue 5.1 Page 1:17

Introduction 


Bank Selection 

The bank selection keys are used to 

assign the required bank of paths to 

ACCESS 

the upper and lower keys. 

The vacuum fluorescent display 

(VFD) uses arrows to show the bank 

selection. The banks of paths are 

setup using the Graphics Display. 

1 

BANK 

1 

BANK 

7 

7 

2 

BANK 

2 

BANK 

8 

8 

3 

BANK 

3 

BANK 

9 

9 

4 

BANK 

4 

BANK 

10 

10 

5 

BANK 

5 

BANK 

11 

11 

6 

BANK 

6 

BANK 

12 

12 

SEC 

BANK 

AFU Automation 

These keys duplicate the FAC 

Automation keys on the path strip for 

setting the automation mode of all 

controls except the fader and mute. 

Collect Touch will put all controls in 

the path into touch (including the 

Fader and the Mute key) except 

those which have been isolated from 

the automation system. 

AFU 

AUTOMATION MODE 

PLAY 

COLLECT 

TOUCH 

RECORD 

GLIDE 

AFU Fader 

The AFU fader is identical to the path strip faders. It is a duplicate control for the 

fader on the path currently accessing the AFU. 

Script Area 

A blank area next to the fader. 

Page1:18 Issue 5.1


Introduction 

1.3.3 Monitor Section 

The Monitor Section contains all the monitoring controls as well as housing the 

keyboard and trackball for the interactive graphics of the computer system. 

Global automation and tape machines are also controlled from this section. 

Main Output, Aux/Cue and 

Assignable Meters 

Tape Machine Track Control 

Oscillator 

Level Control for Dim, APL, PFL and Talkback 

Keyboard 

Red and Green Lights 

Aux Control 

Cue Control 

SLS/Phones 

Solo 

Source Selection Matrix 

Transport Control 

Control Room Monitoring 

Monitor Mode 

SoftPanel VFD 

Miscellaneous Functions 

Global Automation Control 

Trackball 

Numeric Keypad and Cursor Control 

Talkback Selection 

Monitor Section Meters 

There are four meters for the Main Outputs, a pair of meters for Auxes or Cues 

and an assignable meter which can show Peak, VU or Phase characteristics. 

Issue 5.1 Page 1:19

Introduction 


Oscillator 

Used to provide tone. A pre-defined 

calibration frequency and level can 

be switched on at any time. 

8888 

OSCILLATOR 

OSC 

LEVEL 

OSC 

FREQ 

CAL 

OSC 

IN 

Level Control for Dim, APL, PFL and Talkback 

Used to set the Dim level and 

monitoring levels for pre-fade listen, 

after pan listen and six talkback 

groups. 

8888 

LEVEL 

APL 

DIM 

DIM 

LEVEL 

APL 

PFL 

TB 

GRP 1 

TB 

GRP 2 

TB 

GRP 3 

TB 

GRP 4 

TB 

GRP 5 

TB 

GRP 6 

Tape Machine Track Control 

Used for simultaneous control of track ready/record enable on up to three tape 

machines according to the setup on the Graphics Display. 

MACHINE TRACK CONTROL 

TRK 

A 

TRK 

B 

TRK 

C 

TRK 

D 

1 2 3 4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

MACHINE A 

MACHINE B 

MACHINE C 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

I/P SYNC I/P SYNC I/P SYNC 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

REHEARSE REHEARSE REHEARSE 

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 

RDY RDY RDY 

REC ENABLE REC ENABLE REC ENABLE 

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 

ALL SAFE 

READY 

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 

Page1:20 Issue 5.1


Introduction 

Keyboard 

The QWERTY keyboard is used in conjunction with the Trackball and its 

associated controls to interact with programs displayed on the main Graphics 

Display monitor. 

Red and Green Light 

Used to operate the relays for the 

red and green lights. The red light 

function also causes Talkback to be 

disengaged. 

Solo 

RED LIGHT 

GRN LIGHT 

Used to set the solo, APL and PFL 

modes separately for input, monitor 

and group paths. Also used to setup 

solo groups and clear all solos 

across the console. 

I/P 

PFL 

I/P 

SOLO 

SOLO 

MON 

PFL 

MON 

SOLO 

GRP 

PFL 

GRP 

SOLO 

INTER 

LOCK 

MOM 

LATCH 

SOLO 

MEM 

RESET 

Monitor Mode 

Used to globally set the monitoring 

on all paths. Also used to set the 

source on overdub ready paths to 

Line In for the overdubbing 

operation. 

LOCK 

RESET 

MONITOR MODE 

SEND 

O/D 

RESET 

MIXED 

CUE 

OVERDUB 

RET 

RTN 

CUES 

SLS/Phones 

Used to independently select and 

control the sources for the Studio 

LoudSpeaker and Headphone 

outputs. The Source Selection Matrix 

is used to select the Output, 

External, Aux or Cue according to 

the selected key on the SLS/Phones 

panel. 

O/P 

LEVEL 

EXT 

AUX 

SLS/PHONES 

SLS 

CUT 

SLS 

SEL 

CUE 

PHONE 

CUT 

PHONE 

SEL 

FOL 

MON 

The source can be set to Follow Monitor to use the same selection as the main 

Control Room Monitor. 

Issue 5.1 Page 1:21

Introduction 


Control Room Monitoring 

Used to control the main monitoring 

system in the control room. The 

alpha display above the level control 

shows the monitoring level. The 

source is selected with the row of 

keys above the alpha display and the 

Source Selection Matrix, unless 

Follow Access is selected when the 

ACCESS 

source will depend on the key 

pressed on the strip sections. 

Different sets of speakers can also 

be setup and selected. 

SPK1 

Ø 

O/P 

CONTROL ROOM MONITORING 

SPK2 

MONO 

EXT 

CUT 

SPK3 

CUT 

LEFT 

AUX 

8888 

LEVEL 

FIX 

LEVEL 

CUT 

RIGHT 

CUE 

DIM 

PFL 

SPK 

L/R 

FOL 

ACC 

Source Selection Matrix 

This is used to select Outputs, 

Externals, Auxiliaries or Cues as the 

source for Cues, SLS/Phones or 

Control Room Monitor. The LED 

panel at the top indicates the 

selection which will be changed by 

pressing keys on the panel. If 

Latching mode is selected then 

multiple sources of the same type 

can be selected (except Externals). 

FROM TO 

O/P 

CUE 

EXT 

SLS 

AUX 

C/R 

CUE 

LATCH 

1 2 

3 4 

5 6 

7 8 

9 10 

11 12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

Page1:22 Issue 5.1


Introduction 

Cue Control 

The Cue to work with (1 to 16) is 

SEL 

selected by pressing the key. This 

causes the Source Selection Matrix 

to behave as the Cue selector. The 

selected Cue is shown in the alpha 

ACCESS 

display. The key allows the 

Cue to be assigned to the AFU for 

adjusting and switching signal 

processing elements. 

SEL 

1-8 

9-16 

MTR 

O/P 

CUE CONTROL 

8888 

EXT 

ACCESS 

LEVEL 

AUX 

CUT 

FOL 

MON 

Aux Control 

The Aux to work with (1 to 16) is 

SEL 

selected by pressing the key. This 

causes the Source Selection Matrix 

to behave as the Aux selector. The 

selected Aux is shown in the alpha 

ACCESS 

display. The key allows the 

Aux to be assigned to the AFU for 

adjusting and switching signal 

processing elements. 

SEL 

1-8 

9-16 

MTR 

AUX CONTROL 

8888 

ACCESS 

LEVEL 

CUT 

BAL 


Up to six machines can be controlled 

from the two sets of transport keys. 

The machines assigned to the 1 to 6 

keys are setup using the Graphics 

Display screen. 

2nd 

FUNC 

LATCH 

LOCATE 

1 

> 

3 

> 

4 

|| 

5 

RECORD 

6 

SYNC 

GROUP 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

ROLL 

BACK 

SHUTTLE 

JOG 

CYCLE 

ALL 

STOP 

AUTO 

RECORD 

2nd 

FUNC 

LOCATE 

> 

> 

|| 

RECORD 

Note : 

If a CSP (Capricorn Surround Panel) is fitted then this will 

replace the normal Transport Controls. See the Capricorn 

Surround chapter. 

Issue 5.1 Page 1:23

Introduction 


Global Automation Control 

The Global Automation Controls are 

used to turn the Automation System 

on and off and to set the Automation 

Modes for the whole console. There 

are global controls for fader 

automation mode, mute automation 

mode and the automation mode of all 

other controls. 

Controls are also provided for 

selecting the current Mix/Pass and 

special automation modes. 

GLOBAL AUTOMATION CONTROL 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

PLAY 

COL 

TOUCH 

MUTE 

PLAY 

FDR 

PLAY 

TRIM 

REC 

GLIDE 

MUTE 

REC 

FDR 

REC 

GLIDE 

ALL MATCH 

SW 

MATCH 

MUTE 

MATCH 

PLAY SAFE 

RECORD 

TO END 

AUTOMATION 

SCOPE 

REHEARSE 

MASTER 

RECORD 

QUICK 

STORE 

MIX 

- 

MIX 

+ 

PASS 

- 

PASS 

+ 

Miscellaneous Functions 

Provides a selection of utilities and 

additional controls for the automation 

system. 

NEW 

STORE 

MARK 

AUTO 

XFADE 

MAN 

XFADE 

SET 

STORE 

NEW LABEL 

VCA GROUP 

LINK 

FADER 

AUX COPY 

COPY 

The Soft Panel 

The Soft Panel is a vacuum 

fluorescent display with twelve 

programmable keys for function 

HOLD 

EXIT 

control, a key and an key. 

HOLD 

EXIT 

This panel provides a menu interface to a number of diverse functions which do 

not require the trackball and screen. 

Page1:24 Issue 5.1


Introduction 

Talkback Selection 

The Graphics Display is used to 

setup Talkback destinations which 

are associated with the keys on this 

panel. See the Talkback chapter. 

1 

4 

7 

2 

5 

8 

3 

6 

9 

10 

11 

12 

TALKBACK 

Numeric Keypad and Cursor Control 

The numeric keys and cursor keys 

are used for data entry. The bar and 

beats-in-a-bar keys are provided for 

music recording. The Cancel and 

Execute keys are direct functional 

duplicates for the Cancel and 

Execute buttons on the Graphics 

Display screen. 

7 

4 

1 

0 

BAR 

8 

5 

2 

- 

BEAT 

9 

6 

3 

+ 

TIME 

CANCEL 

EXECUTE 

Trackball 

The trackball is used in conjunction 

with the QWERTY keyboard and 

numeric keypad for interfacing with 

the Graphic Display screen. 

CLOSE 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

HELP 

Issue 5.1 Page 1:25

Introduction 


1.4 The Graphics Display 

The high resolution colour graphics screen, the trackball and the keyboard are 

the primary tools for using the graphical interface to the utilities which are used 

to perform some of the more complex functions. 

The trackball operates in several ways. It controls a cursor for pointing and 

selecting, it can be used to modify data values on the screen during editing 

operations and can be used to configure or move audio processing components 

within the signal path. 

The Graphic Display system is used for off-line functions such as: 

Setting and displaying signal path information 

Naming paths and banks for console displays 

Strip assignment 

Port Routing 

Disk and memory management 

System configuration 

Setting of options 

Self Test and error reporting 

Tape Machine Configuration 

Diagnostics 

1.4.1 Screen Area Utilisation 

The APPLICATION WINDOW is where program 

screens are displayed for interaction with the user. 

The ICON MENU provides access to the various 

screens which are displayed in the main application 

window. The ICONS are highlighted when the 

trackball pointer (cursor) moves onto them. 

The SYSTEM STATUS area gives a permanent display of system 

level data such as timecode and automation status. 

Free RAM 

99% 

AUTO ON 

XFade 

Man Glide 

Auto Glide 

ONCE ONLY 

Play Pass: 

Rec Pass: 

48 00:00:00:00.0 I12 HOLD 

INT 

STOP 

00:24:30:12.0 

Page1:26 Issue 5.1


Introduction 

The Application Window is where the majority of the information is displayed, 

according to the current task selected on the screen. Clicking on an ICON 

displays the associated screen in the application window. When the system is 

not using the Application Window for any specific command, the operator has a 

choice of up to three background displays which are selected through the Soft 

Panel. 

The Application Window is also used to display dialogue boxes which overlay 

the window and can contain prompts, error messages, selection lists and option 

switches. 

SYSTEM STATUS AREA 

Automation 

Status 

Display 

Collect 

Touch 

Status 

System 

Wordclock 

Display 

Timecode 

Capture 

Box 

Current/ 

Held 

Path 

Hold 

Button 

Free RAM 

99% 

AUTO ON 

XFade 

Man Glide 

Auto Glide 

ONCE ONLY 48 00:00:00:00.0 

INT 

STOP 

Play Pass: 

Rec Pass: 

I12 

HOLD 

00:24:30:12.0 

Free 

RAM 

Display 

Glide 

Times 

Display 

Current 

Pass 

Display 

Timecode Display 

Issue 5.1 Page 1:27

Introduction 


Page1:28 Issue 5.1

1 2 

3 4 

SYSTEM 

RESET 

SOFT 

DB 

DA 

RP 

PRINTER 

INT EXT 

S 

STATUS 

44 48 

V 

T/LINK 

DROP WCLK 

F IN 

44 48 WCLK 

OUT 

SCSI 

SI HI 

ISOLATE 

NORMAL 

SB 

AP 

ARI 

RB 

AS 

WARM 

ARO 

{ 

{ 

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES AND 

CURRENTS INSIDE 

DISCONNECT SUPPL BEFORE 

REMOVING ANY PANELS 

AMS NEVE PLC BILLINGTON ROAD 

BURNLEY LANCS ENGLAND 


Getting Started 

2 Getting Started 

This chapter describes how to use the various types of control that the Capricorn 

has and how to log-on to the system as a valid user. This chapter assumes that 

the user is familiar with the information presented in the Introduction chapter. 

Starting Up Capricorn 

Capricorn is a multi-processor system and, when switched on from cold, it is 

possible that the system will boot without full synchronisation with all 

sub-systems. In order to ensure that the system boots correctly, it is 

recommended that the following procedure is used when switching on 

Capricorn: 

Switch on all the racks and the console surface. 

Press the reset switch upwards 

on the Storage Node in the DSP 

Rack. 

S/N 

12V 

5V 

1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 

RELAY OUTPUTS 

PSU 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

BLOWER SYSTEM 

ON 

OFF 

PSU 

STATUS 

Logging-On To The System 

The Capricorn can be used in an environment where several different people 

can use the console for different applications and projects. Under these 

circumstances, it is anticipated that different people will require the console to 

be setup to suit their individual needs, and that these setups (or configurations) 

should be protected against accidental alteration by other users. 

The Graphics Display screen is used to present the user with programs and 

information and this is how the user logs-on to the console. This is the first thing 

a user should do when starting a session on the console. 

Using the Graphics Display screen is described first, followed by instructions on 

logging-on. 

Issue 5.1 

Page2:1



2.1 Using the Trackball with the Graphics Display 

The trackball controls the pointer on the screen for pointing, selecting and 

modifying data values on the screen during editing operations. The speed of the 

pointer in response to trackball movements is adjustable and for long sustained 

movements a degree of automatic acceleration is introduced when the trackball 

is spun rapidly. The speed and acceleration characteristics are modified in 

Miscellaneous Setup. 

Normally, the pointer is shown as an arrow which is used to point to objects on 

the screen. When the system is busy, the pointer will change to an hourglass 

shape and will revert to an arrow once the operation is completed. 

Displays help screen for 

whatever the pointer is pointed 

at (context sensitive) 

CLOSE 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

Toggles the pointer 

to scroll mode for 

moving through lists 

HELP 

TRACKBALL 

TRACKBALL 

BUTTONS 

Associated with the trackball are two buttons, used to select screen items for 

further actions or to confirm commands. They are similar to the buttons on a 

mouse. The two select buttons perform identical functions. Operating these 

buttons is referred to as ‘clicking’. 

The term click refers to a single press and release of the a trackball button. The 

term double click means two clicks in rapid succession. The time period that 

qualifies a double click can be set up and stored to suit user preference. 

When the pointer is on top of an area that can be selected the box or Icon will be 

highlighted. In the text, reference will be made to clicking on objects on the 

screen. This means using the trackball to point to the object and then pressing 

either of the trackball buttons. The term select (a screen object) also means to 

move the pointer over an object and click one of the buttons. 

Page2:2 Issue 5.1



Buttons 

The term BUTTON for screen objects refers to square or rectangular objects on 

the screen which may be clicked on. There are two types of buttons, buttons 

which perform actions (e.g. the Close, Execute and Cancel buttons which 

appear on most screens), and the square buttons used to select one of a set of 

options. 

• Label Attributes • Close 

Editing markers for label number 23 

Segment 

From marker 

'Option' 

Buttons 

To marker 

Auto Record Start 

Auto Record End 

'Action' 

Buttons 

Safety Net on 

Safety Net off 

Cancel 

Execute 

Icons 

Icons are a special type of button with a pictorial representation of the function it 

performs. The Icon Menu is used to launch the main screens which are 

displayed in the Application Window. The icons at the top of the Icon Menu are 

used to select a different set of icons for display in the Icon Menu. The example 

shown under Screen Area Utilisation above is the Main Menu that Capricorn 

displays at start-up. 

Scrolling 

In some screens the trackball can be used to scroll lists up and down. In this 

mode there is no pointer and the selected item in the list is highlighted. 

To use scroll mode 

Move the trackball pointer over the list and press the 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key. 

Press the 

operation. 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key again to return the trackball to normal pointer 

Issue 5.1 

Page2:3



2.2 Logging on to the system 

Individual users are recommended to log-on to the desk and store their personal 

configurations separately, protected by a password. If a user does not log-on 

then the desk will operate as normal but there will only be access to the Guest 

configuration stores. 

To log-on to the system 

Click on the User Sel icon. 

The User Log-On screen will be displayed: 

User Log-On 

• Current User • 

Default 

• Known Users • 

Default 

System Manager 

Dudley Saville 

Peter East 

Sheila Rexell 

Close 

PASSWORD 

23 Oct 95 11:24:50 

17 Dec 95 15:45:44 

19 Sep 95 09:21:21 

27 Nov 95 13:03:31 

9Jan96 19:37:54 

Select Add Rename Delete 

The list shows the names of all users currently listed in the system together with 

the time and date that each entry was made. 

Click on the Select button at the bottom of the screen. 

Click on the required user ID in the list. 

Note : 

The System Manager is a special user ID which has additional 

rights for adding, deleting and renaming other users. To log-on 

as the System Manager simply click on the name from the list 

and then enter the password. 

If the user ID has no password then the Current User will display the selected 

user ID. 

Page2:4 Issue 5.1



If the user ID has a password then the Password Entry dialogue box will be 

displayed: 

• Password Entry • 

Close 

Enter password for : 

"System Manager" 

Cancel 

Execute 

Type in the password on the keyboard. 

Then press Return or click the Execute button in the window. 

The Current User box will display the newly logged-on user name. 

To log out from the current user 

Click the Select button at the bottom of the User Log-On screen. 

Click the Default user ID. 

The current user will return to Default. 

There is no password for the Default user ID. 

2.2.1 Creating a Password 

When a new user is entered into the system there is no password for the user 

and the user’s Configurations are accessible. 

To add a password for a new user 

Log-on with the new user ID. 

Click on the PASSWORD button. 

The new password dialogue box will be displayed. 

Type in the password on the keyboard. 

The password must be at least six characters and can use any of the standard 

characters from the keyboard. The password is not case sensitive. 

Press Enter or click the Execute button. 

The system will then ask for the password to be confirmed. 

Re-enter the new password. 

Issue 5.1 

Page2:5



Press Return or click Execute again. 

To cancel or change a password 

Log-on as the user with the existing password. 

Click the PASSWORD button. 

Enter the existing password. 

The system will now ask for the new password. 

Enter the new password on the keyboard. 

Press Return or click Execute. 

The system will then ask for the password to be confirmed. 

Re-enter the new password. 

Press Return or click Execute again. 

The new password will replace the old one. 

To remove a password 

Follow the same procedure as above for changing the password, but instead 

of entering a new password press the Space Bar once each for the new 

password and password confirmation. 

Page2:6 Issue 5.1



2.3 Using the Soft Panel Menus 

The Soft Panel is the vacuum 

fluorescent display above the 

Trackball in the Monitor Section of 

the console. It has twelve 

programmable keys for function 

HOLD 

EXIT 

control, a key and an key. It is 

used for miscellaneous tasks and 

setup routines. 

HOLD 

EXIT 

The panel works by showing labels next to some or all of the keys. The label 

shows the current function of the key. When a labelled key is pressed, the panel 

displays the key labels for the selected function. Some functions will transfer 

control to the screen and trackball. The numeric keypad and the keyboard can 

also be used to augment the Soft Panel keys for data entry. The panel can be 

used directly, starting from the Entry Level Menu, or it can be automatically 

assigned to a function by activity on another part of the console. The startup 

display is the Entry Level Menu. 

HOLD 

The key stops the Soft Panel from being automatically reassigned by an 

action elsewhere in the system and also prevents any automatic return to a 

EXIT 

higher level menu. always returns the Soft Panel to the Entry Level Menu and 

any uncompleted command sequence is abandoned safely. 

Issue 5.1 

Page2:7



2.3.1 Entry Level Menu 

The Entry Level Menu offers a 

choice of sub-menus and options. 

LOCATE BACKGR LIST SCOPE 

HOLD 

EXIT 

Select Softpanel function 

MANUAL 

AUTO XFADE EVENTS 

more... 

LOCATE 

BACKGR 

LIST 

SCOPE 

MANUAL 

AUTO 

XFADE 

EVENTS 

more... 

Used to set programmable LOCATE sequences. 

Used to specify the background on the Graphics Display 

screen. 

Provides fast access to the list screens. 

Provides fast access to the Scope screens. 

Manual Glide Time setting. 

Auto Glide Time setting. 

Crossfade time setting. 

Used to operate event relays and automate them. 

Displays an alternative menu with some of the same options, 

plus a MIDI option. 

The background display option for the Graphics Display screen is described 

opposite. Other options are described in the relevant part of the manual. 

Page2:8 Issue 5.1



2.3.2 Selecting the Background Display on the 

Graphics Screen 

The [BACKGR] option is used to select what is displayed in the Application Area 

of the Graphics Display screen when the screen is not showing anything else. 

The background can be split into up to three sections (or partitions) so that more 

than one type of display can be seen at a time. The default is to have no 

background display. 

Assuming the screen is currently 

configured to have one partition 

showing the currently accessed path, 

the Soft Panel is displayed with 

partition 1 showing the PATH MAP. 

The menu provides the option of 

redefining Partition 1 or defining a 

new Partition 2. 

1 

2 

Select background 

partion 

Current sel 

1: PATH MAP 

HOLD 

EXIT 

To split the screen and display the mix tree in Partition 2 

Press the key labelled [2]. 

The Soft Panel display changes to 

show the available selections. 

MIX TREE 

HOLD 

EXIT 

Select function for background 

partition number 2 

PARTSEL 

EDIT more... 

Press the key labelled [MIX TREE]. 

The Graphics Display screen is reconfigured accordingly and the Soft Panel 

returns to the Select background partition menu. 

Note that Partition 3 is now a valid selection. The system waits in this menu until 

EXIT 

the key is pressed or a further partition definition is performed. 

Current background options include: 

Path Map 

Edit 

Mix Tree 

List 

Displays information about the accessed path and provides 

controls for changing the configuration and routing of the signal. 

The Applications Area of the screen shows a number of icons 

used for off-line automation edit functions. 

Displays Mix/Pass tree. 

Displays the selected list. LIST is shown as an option when 

[more...] is pressed. 

Issue 5.1 

Page2:9



2.4 Bank Assignments 

Capricorn provides twelve sets of signal path to channel strip assignments and 

these are called banks. The sequence of signal paths which appears in each 

bank is selected by the user (it is not obligatory to use all twelve banks) and this 

is setup using the Graphics Display screen - see the following chapter on 

Console Setup. 

The banks assigned to the console 

surface are selected with the Bank 

Assignment VFD. The VFD shows 

the bank name next to each 

numbered key, and the banks 

assigned to the console surface are 

indicated with arrows. 

1 

BANK 

1 

BANK 

7 

7 

2 

BANK 

2 

BANK 

8 

8 

3 

BANK 

3 

BANK 

9 

9 

4 

BANK 

4 

BANK 

10 

10 

5 

BANK 

5 

BANK 

11 

11 

6 

BANK 

6 

BANK 

12 

12 

SEC 

BANK 

Primary and Secondary Banks 

Two rows of 

ACCESS 

keys are provided so that two sets of signal paths can be 

displayed and immediately accessed. Different banks may be assigned to the 

primary (upper) or secondary (lower) rows of keys. Banks are assigned to the 

primary 

ACCESS 

keys by pressing the required bank number key and to the 

secondary 

SEC 

ACCESS 

keys by pressing the key and then pressing the bank 

number key. 

ACCESS 

Each key has a 4 character alpha display associated with it which shows 

ACCESS 

the names of the signal paths assigned to the primary and secondary 

keys on each strip. The active bank on each strip is the one which is on the 

surface and will be affected by changes to controls on the strip. It is indicated by 

brighter illumination of the path name in the alpha display. The active bank is the 

last one assigned and may be changed on individual strips by pressing the 

ACCESS 

key of the inactive bank. 

Example : 

Bank 1 has Inputs 1-24 assigned to strips 1-24 and Bank 2 has 

Monitors (track send/return) 1-24 also on strips 1-24. 

ACCESS 

Bank 1 is assigned to the primary keys by pressing the 

1 

ACCESS 

key and Bank 2 is assigned to the secondary keys by 

SEC 

2 

pressing the followed by . 

BANK 

Page2:10 Issue 5.1



2.5 Using Console Surface Controls 

Double Action Keys 

All the automated keys are ‘double action’ and have two levels of depression 

when they are pressed. The first level puts the key into WRITE (if automation is 

running) and illuminates the associated red LED. This is similar to touch on a 

fader or rotary control. The second level toggles the key on or off and the green 

LED illuminates when the key is ON. 

If the key is tapped quickly then the system recognises this and will toggle the 

key on or off without going into WRITE - this is called Tap Toggle. Tap Toggle 

can be disabled in Miscellaneous Setup. 

Rotary Controls 

All the rotary controls on the desk use rotary shaft encoders which do not have 

an end stop. The setting on the control is displayed by the Circular Bargraph. 

This allows the function of the control to be changed and dynamically 

automated. 

The control is touch sensitive so that the operator can override previous 

automation settings. The red LED under the control illuminates when it is 

touched. 

2.5.1 Function Assignable Controls (FACs) 


are the rotary controls on each path 

strip. They can be used for different 

functions according to user 

requirements using keys on the 

Assignable Facilities Unit (AFU). The 

function of the two centre rotary 

controls are indicated on the AFU. 

8888 

The 4-digit alphanumeric display 

above the top FAC shows the path 

assigned to the strip or the precise 

setting of the FAC being touched. It 

also shows the Aux selected for 

contribution or the EQ band being 

adjusted when the FACs are used for 

these functions. 

Issue 5.1 Page 2:11



Function Assignable Control (FAC) Selection 

The function of the FACs is assigned globally from the FAC Selection panel on 

the AFU. 

The nine keys at the top of the panel 

are used to assign the top FAC to 

one of the following functions: 

I/P 

SEL 

FAC 

SELECTION 

TRK 

CONT 

GAIN 

I/P 

SEL 

TRK 

CONT 

GAIN 

FILM 

DELAY 

TRIM 

EQ 

AUX 

SEL 

I/P 

BAL 

Input select 

Track contribution level 

Input gain 

Film panning 

Delay 

Input gain trim 

EQ 

Aux select 

Input balance 

FILM 

EQ 

DELAY 

AUX 

SEL 

8888 

ON 

PRE 

IN/OUT 

OFF 

POST 

PEAK 

8888 

TRIM 

I/P 

BAL 

AUX 

SEL 

ON 

OFF 

PRE 

POST 

AUX 

SEL 

FILM 

When is selected then the middle 

FACs are also used for additional 

film (surround) panning axes. 

P/B 

P/W 

Q 

BAL 

WIDTH 

EQ 

When is selected then all the FACs are assigned to EQ functions. The top 

FAC is used to select one of the four EQ bands and the other FACs control 

frequency, cut/boost and Q. The alpha display above the FACs shows the EQ 

band selected for adjustment. 

When any other functions are selected then the two centre FACs are used to 

AUX 

SEL 

control aux contributions. One of the keys next to one of the FAC Selection 

alpha displays must be pressed followed by one of the number keys in the AFU 

ON 

PRE 

Auxiliary section to select the bus. The and keys selects the function of the 

OFF 

POST 

up and down arrow keys in between the FACs. See the Auxiliaries And Cues 

chapter for more information. 

The bottom FAC controls pan for mono paths. It can be switched between 

balance and width for stereo paths. 

See the Signal Processing chapter for more information on FAC functionality. 

Page2:12 Issue 5.1



2.6 Using the AFU 

The Assignable Facilities Unit (AFU) contains individual controls for auxiliaries, 

equalization, dynamics and routing etc. which may be ‘accessed’ from any 

signal path assigned to a strip on the console surface. The AFU is an assignable 

expanded channel strip, with all the controls necessary for adjusting any signal 

processing element in a path. 

To assign (or call) a signal path to the AFU 

Press the 

ACCESS 

for the required path. 

The AFU controls will jump to the settings of signal processing elements which 

are configured into the selected signal path. 

To step the AFU through paths on the console surface 

Press the and keys above the AFU fader. 

As each path is accessed, the AFU controls will display the settings of the 

appropriate signal processing elements. 

2.6.1 Resetting Controls 

AFU 

FLAT 

sets all the controls on the AFU to their default (null) position. 

FDR 

FLAT 

sets the fader to exactly 0dBu. 

2.6.2 AFU Graphic Display 

The AFU Graphic Display gives information on the following attributes of the 

signal path: 

Configuration 

Input 

Expander/gate 

Compressor 

Limiter 

Filter 

Equalizer 

CON 

FIG 

I/P 

EXP 

GATE 


When any control on the AFU is touched the graphic display will automatically 

show the precise settings. Information can also be selected by pressing the 

appropriate key under the display. Symbols next to each setting show when a 

control is being touched (circle) or is part of a link (square). 

Issue 5.1 Page 2:13



2.7 Further Information 

Setup and Configuration 

See the following chapters for details about setting up and configuring the 

console for use: 

Console Setup 

Path Configuration 

Input/Output Configuration 

Routing 

Monitoring 

Tape Machine Control 

Using Capricorn 

See the following chapters for information on basic operation of the console: 

Metering 

Signal Processing 

Auxiliaries and Cues 

Automation Overview 

Automation Operations 

Page2:14 Issue 5.1


Console Setup 

3 Console Setup 

3.1 Introduction 

The console is setup using the Graphics Display screen and can be configured 

for various modes of operation such as recording, mixdown, broadcast and 

overdub. Configurations can be copied and edited to tailor the console for 

specific applications, preferences and sessions. 

Basic console setup tasks include managing configurations, changing the 

numbers of different types of paths (Inputs, Monitors, Aux Busses, etc.), 

assigning paths to banks and selecting which banks appear on the console 

surface. These tasks are described in this chapter. 

Configurations 

Configurations are saved for each user so that the minimum amount of time has 

to be spent initialising the console at the start of a new session. Users can keep 

their configurations protected by a password. This is done by logging-on to the 

system, as described in the Getting Started chapter. 

A configuration holds data to completely reset the desk. Each includes: 

Path numbers 

Processing allocation 

Port assignment 

Bank assignments 

Links and VCA groups 

Talkback setup 

Solo modes 

Operating Levels 

Digital Word length and Dither 

Routing 

Control positions (snapshot stores) 

Path names 

Scope settings 

Timecode labels 

Glide times 

A configuration contains the desk setup only and does not include any dynamic 

automation data. Automation data is stored separately. 

A large number of configurations can be stored on the integral hard disk and new 

configurations can be stored or recalled at any time. Configurations can also be 

copied to floppy or magneto optical disk. 

Issue 5.1 

Page3:1

Console Setup 


The desk configuration can be modified at any time that the automation system 

is not running. 

Snapshot Stores 

In addition to Configurations which contain the data to completely reset the 

console, static Stores are available for storing snapshots of the position of all 

controls or controls selected according to the Store Scope. Each Configuration 

can contain up to 300 Stores. 

Automation Titles (see Automation Overview and Automation Operations) can 

also contain Stores. An Automation Title can contain up to 100 Stores. If any 

Stores exist in the current Configuration when a new Title is started then the first 

100 Stores (if there are that many) will be copied into the Title. 

Page3:2 Issue 5.1


Console Setup 

3.2 Configuration Management 

The Configuration Record/Recall screen is used to manage the configurations 

which are stored under the currently logged-on user ID. 

To access the Configuration Record/Recall screen 

Click on the Storage icon in the Main Menu. 

The screen will be displayed as follows: 

Configuration Record/Recall 

• Current Configuration Loaded • 

Client : Default 

Project : Default 

Title : scratch_mix_title 

• Available Configurations • 

•LIST• 

User 

Guest 

Close 

Default 

48 Track Mixdown 

Pablo test 

Large Overdub Setup 

23 Oct 95 

17 Dec 95 

19 Sep 95 

09 Jan 96 

11:24:50 

14:32:11 

16:12:54 

08:58:13 

Add Recall Rename 

Update 

Delete 

• Safety Store • • Current Config • • Studio Startup • 

Recall Update Recall Update Recall 

Current Configuration Loaded 

Displays the current user ID and the currently loaded Configuration. If 

automation is in operation, the current Client, Project, and Title will be shown. 

List 

The User button switches the list to display the Configurations stored by the 

current user. 

The Guest button switches the list to display the configurations stored by guest 

users. Guest Configurations may be stored and recalled by anyone using the 

console and are not password protected. 

Available Configurations 

The Configurations available to the current user. Each configuration is named 

and stamped with the date and time that it was created or most recently 

modified. 

Issue 5.1 

Page3:3

Console Setup 


Safety Store 

As a safety back up, the system automatically takes a snapshot of the control 

positions at an interval specified in Miscellaneous Setup. This is called the 

Safety Store. 

In the event of a system failure 

Recall the Configuration. 

Click the Safety Store Recall button. 

Current Config 

To bring the current Configuration up to date with any changes 

Click the Current Config Update button. 

To recall the current Configuration and undo any changes 

Click the Current Config Recall button. 

Studio Start-Up 

When the system is powered up or re-booted, it will always be set to the last 

Configuration or Title that was loaded. 

To recall the Studio Default Configuration 

Click on Studio Startup Recall. 

To update the Studio Default Configuration 

Click on Studio Startup Update. 

Note: 

This button only becomes available when the System Manager 

is logged in. 

Page3:4 Issue 5.1


Console Setup 

3.2.1 To Store a new configuration 

Click the Add button. 

The following dialogue box will be displayed on the screen 

•NameEntry• 

Close 

Enter name for new Configuration 

Cancel 

Execute 

Type in new name using the keyboard. 

The name can have a maximum of 36 characters. 

Press return or click Execute. 

The new configuration is now shown in the list. 

The configuration will be stored according to the current state of the console. 

Note : 

It is not possible to use a duplicate name. 

3.2.2 To Recall a Configuration 

Click on Recall in the Configuration Record/Recall screen. 

Click on the configuration required in the list. 

If the list is too long to fit on the screen 

Press the 

down. 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key associated with the trackball to scroll the list up and 

The configurations will be highlighted as the trackball is moved up and down. 

Find the required configuration. 

Click one of the trackball buttons to select the highlighted configuration. 

The trackball will be taken out of scroll mode. 

Issue 5.1 

Page3:5

Console Setup 


When a Configuration is selected, the Full or Partial Recall dialogue box will be 

displayed. 

• Full or Partial Recall • 

Full Recall 

Partial Recall 

Cancel 

Execute 

Full Recall is selected by default. 

Click on the Full Recall or Partial Recall button. 

The selected button will turn yellow. 

Click on Execute to confirm 

OR 

Click on Cancel to return to the Configuration Record/Recall screen. 

Full Recall 

If Full Recall was selected, the system will recall all of the settings in the chosen 

configuration. The Configuration Record/Recall screen will be cleared from the 

screen. 

Partial Recall 

When partial recall is executed the following screen is displayed which is used to 

select the parts of a configuration to recall. 

Configuration Recall Category Selection 

Recalling from : "System Configuration 10" 

Full Configuration Recall 

Surface Assignments 

Control Links 

VCA Groups 

Talkback System 

Solo System 

Operating Levels 

Control Positions 

Audio Routing 

Names 

Automation Stores 

Record Replay Scopes 

Session/List/Edit Scopes 

Label/Mute/Event Scopes 

Labels 

Glide Trims 

SET ALL 

RESET ALL 

Cancel 

Execute 

Page3:6 Issue 5.1


Console Setup 

Select the categories to be recalled by clicking the associated buttons. 

The buttons will turn yellow to show that they have been selected. 

Note: 

If this is the first Partial Recall after a system start-up, all 

categories will be selected by default. If a Partial Recall has 

already been executed, the selection will default to the 

categories selected last time. 

Any combination of categories can be recalled. 

Click the SET ALL button to select all categories. 

All the selection buttons will turn yellow. 

Click RESET ALL to de-select all categories. 

All the selection buttons will turn blue. 

Click Execute to confirm the selection and recall the configuration. 

OR 

Click Cancel to abandon the recall and return to the Configuration 

Record/Recall screen. 

3.2.3 To Update an existing configuration 

Click on Update in the main Configuration Record/Recall screen. 

Select the configuration you wish to update by highlighting and clicking the 

entry in the list with the trackball button. 

The selected store will be updated according to the current state of the desk. 

Confirm the operation by clicking Execute. 

Issue 5.1 

Page3:7

Console Setup 


3.2.4 To Rename an existing configuration 

Click on Rename. 

Select the configuration you wish to rename by highlighting and clicking the 


The following dialogue box will be displayed on the screen: 

•NameEntry• 

Close 

Enter new name for System Configuration 

"System Configuration 8" 

Cancel 

Execute 

Type in the new name and press return or click Execute. 

The renamed configuration is now shown in the list. 

Note : 

It is not possible to duplicate a name. 

3.2.5 To Delete a configuration 

Click on Delete in the Configuration Record/Recall screen. 

Select the configuration you wish to remove by highlighting and clicking the 


Confirm delete by clicking on Execute. 

3.2.6 The Fuel Gauge 

The fuel gauge shows an approximation of the amount of hard disk space 

currently used. To obtain an exact reading, click on the fuel gauge. This will 

display the hard disk Device Usage overlay screen. 

• Device Usage (in bytes) • Close 

Device 

: Fixed disc 

Total Space : 1012126,720 

Used Space : 69,456,896 

Free Space : 942,669,824 

Page3:8 Issue 5.1


Console Setup 

3.3 Backup and Restore 

The system allows the user to transfer data to and from removable Optical disks 

and Floppy disks (according to drives fitted). This enables both mix data and 

system configurations to be copied between Capricorn systems or archived. 

This procedure may be used to back-up data as a safety measure, however the 

system also provides the facility to back-up the whole of the Hard Disk onto 

Optical disk which is a more rapid and thorough method. It is recommended that 

the complete back-up operation is performed weekly as described in the Service 

Manual. 

Floppy disks are used to store configuration data only. The capacity of a floppy 

disk is 1.4Mb. 

The magneto-optical disk can hold configuration and/or client/project/title mix 

data. The capacity of a magneto-optical disk is 128Mb. 

The drives (if present) will be fitted in the DSP Rack. 

Note: 

The automation system is disable while a backup is in progress. 

To display the Backup Screen 

Click on the COPY icon. 

The following screen is displayed: 

Backup Screen 

•HARDDISK• 

Config Clients Projects 

• Available Configurations • 

Titles 

Close 

Current Project 

Default 

48 Track Mixdown 

Pablo test 

Large Overdub Setup 

23 Oct 95 

17 Dec 95 

19 Sep 95 

08 Jan 96 

11:24:50 

14:32:11 

16:12:54 

08:53:13 

•REMOVABLEDEVICE• 

Optical Floppy Options 

• Configs on selected drive • 

Copy 

Delete 

Select 

Cancel 

Execute 

To select the data to backup 

Click the Config, Clients, Projects, Titles or Current Project buttons at the top 

of the screen. 

Issue 5.1 

Page3:9

Console Setup 


The Available Configurations list will display the selection. 

When a Client is selected the list will show all Projects for the Client. Selecting a 

Project will show all Titles in the Project. 

Note : 

If the system is logged in to an automation Title, the Title will be 

selected automatically on entry to the Backup Screen. 

To allow automation Project and Title files to be copied from 

the hard disk to the Magneto Optical disk 

Log On to the required automation Title via the Clients screen. 

This is described in Automation Operations. 

Notes on copying 

When copying Configurations from a removable disk to the system hard disk the 

file will be copied to the currently selected User ID. 

When copying automation files from a removable disk to the system hard disk 

the files will be copied into the current Title. 

Copying can only be performed from the removable disk when the correct level 

of hierarchy has been selected via the Config, Clients, Projects or Titles buttons. 

This state is indicated when the entry in the list is blue. When the entry is 

selected it turns gold. 

List entries that are pale yellow may not be selected. 

Page3:10 Issue 5.1


Console Setup 

3.3.1 Selecting the removable disk drive 

To select the removable disk 

Click the Optical or Floppy button as required. 

The floppy disk drives cannot be used to store Client/Project/Title information. 

The Removable Device list will show the contents of the selected device and will 

list all of the Configurations, Clients, Projects and Titles together with the date 

and time the entry was copied or last modified. In addition each entry is initialled 

to indicate if it is a CFG, CLI, PRJ or TTL entry. 

To format a removable disk 

Click the Options button. 

The Removable device options dialogue box will be displayed. 

• Removable device option • Close 

Format 

Eject 

Delete All 

Refresh 

Click the Format button. 

Note : 

A disk must be formatted before any data is copied onto it. 

To eject a magneto-optical disk from its drive 



Click the Eject button. 

To remove all data from a disk 



Click the Delete All button. 

Issue 5.1 Page 3:11

Console Setup 


To update the list to show the contents of a new disk 



Click the Refresh button. 

3.3.2 To copy data from the hard disk to the removable 

device 

Ensure a disk of the required type is inserted in its drive. 

Click on the Optical or Floppy button as appropriate. 

The Removable Device list will show any data that is already stored on the disk. 

Click on the type of data to be copied by clicking on one of the Config, Clients, 

Projects or Titles buttons. 

Click on the entry or entries in the Available Configurations list to be copied. 

Click on Select, followed by clicking on the respective Client, or Project, to 

copy only selected Projects or Titles. 

Click on Execute. 

The system will ask for confirmation. 

Click Execute again to confirm or click Cancel to quit. 

3.3.3 Copying complete Client or Project data 

When a Client is selected then all of the associated Projects and Titles are 

implicitly selected and will be copied. Similarly a Project will include all of its 

Titles. If the Client has an exceptional amount of data, the data may exceed the 

128 Mb limit of the magneto optical disk. In this case the copy process is 

terminated and the user must copy the Projects separately onto different disks. 

Page3:12 Issue 5.1


Console Setup 

3.3.4 To copy data from a removable device onto the 

hard disk 

Click the Floppy or Optical button as required. 

The removable device list will show the files currently held on the selected disk. 

Normally Copy is selected as the default (Yellow). 

If Copy is not selected 

Click the Copy button. 

It will turn yellow. 

The file type that may be selected for copying is controlled by selecting Config, 

Clients, Projects or Titles at the top of the screen. This selection dictates where 

the file will be copied to on the hard disk. Files that may be copied are indicated 

in Blue. Files that may not be selected are indicated in pale Yellow. 

Move the pointer to the files to be copied in the lower list and click to select. 

The selected files will be indicated in Gold. 




3.3.5 To delete files from a removable disk 

Click the Floppy or Optical button as required. 

The removable device list will show the files currently held on the selected disk. 

Click the Delete button. 

Select the files to be deleted by clicking on them. 

Click on Execute, 



Issue 5.1 Page 3:13

Console Setup 


3.3.6 Fuel Gauges 

Two fuel gauges are provided in the Backup Screen. 

Hard Disk Gauge 

The fuel gauge at the top of the screen shows an approximation of the amount of 

hard disk space currently used. 

To obtain an exact reading of hard disk usage 

Click on the hard disk fuel gauge. 

The hard disk Device Usage dialogue box will be displayed. 

Removable Device Gauge 

The fuel gauge located at the bottom of the screen shows an approximation of 

the amount of disk space currently used on the selected removable disk. 

To obtain an exact reading of removable disk usage 

Click on the removable disk fuel gauge. 

The removable disk Device Usage dialogue box will be displayed. 

Page3:14 Issue 5.1


Console Setup 

3.4 Path Numbers 

There are six different types of path which can be used in the Capricorn: Inputs, 

Monitors, Groups, Mains, Auxiliaries and Cues. The number of each type of path 

determines the basis of the console setup in the current configuration. 

The maximum number of each type of signal path is: 

Input Paths - Limited by number of PCBs fitted 

Monitor Paths - Limited by number of PCBs fitted 

Group Paths - 24 

Main Output Paths - 8 

Aux Master Paths - 16 

Cue Paths - 16 

For instance, a system with 64 signal paths could be configured in the following 

ways: 

24Trk Recording 48Trk Mixdown 32 Trk Overdub 

Inputs 24 4 8 

Monitors 24 48 32 

Groups 8 8 8 

Auxes 2 2 10 

Cues 4 0 4 

Main Output 2 2 2 

Signal Paths within Capricorn can be reallocated for different applications as 

required. There will always be at least 8 Groups. 

Issue 5.1 Page 3:15

Console Setup 


3.4.1 To change the numbers of each path type 

Click the Path Numbers icon. 

The Path Numbers screen is displayed. 

System Path Allocations 

Close 

Input 

Monitor 

Group 

Main Output 

Aux Master 

Cue Send 

Total 

Free 

• Old: • 

0 

0 

8 

0 

0 

0 

8 

22 

Preset System Parameters 

24 

4 

16 

Track Sends 

Monitoring Ouputs 

External Inputs 

•New:• 

10 

2 

8 

2 

2 

2 

26 

4 

8 

8 

30 

• Limits: • 

30 

30 

24 

8 

16 

16 

Talkback Inputs 

Talkback Outputs 

Total available paths 

Cancel 

Execute 

The Old column shows the current configuration of the desk and gives the 

number of each type of signal path. 

The New column is used to change the number of each path type up to the 

amount shown in the Limits column. 

The Limits column shows the maximum number of paths according to the 

installed hardware. Group, Main Output, Aux Master and Cue Send paths 

always have the same limits. The limit for Input and Monitor paths depends on 

the number of contribution cards that are fitted. The maximum number of paths 

in the system is the Total Available Paths under Pre-set System parameters. 

To change the number of paths 

Click on a number in the New column. 

Roll the trackball to the left and right to decrement and increment the number 

respectively, or enter a number on the numeric keypad, or use the left and 

right cursor keys. 

Click a trackball button when the required number is displayed. 

Note : 

Numbers of paths must be entered as even numbers. 

When all changes have been made, click on Execute. 

If any path numbers have been reduced (de-configured) then a dialogue box is 

displayed to confirm the change. 

Page3:16 Issue 5.1


Console Setup 

3.5 Strip Assignment To Banks 

A system of Bank switching has been implemented to allow paths to be 

assigned to channel strips in the most convenient layout for the session in hand, 

and to allow easy access to the additional paths that are not currently on the 

surface. 

12 Banks are provided. 

Paths can be assigned to any channel strip on the surface. A signal path can be 

assigned to any number of Banks and any number of channel strips on the same 

Bank. 

3.5.1 Creating or Editing a Bank 

To access the Bank Assignment screen 

Click on to the Bank Assignment icon in the System Menu. 

The Bank Assignment screen will be displayed. 

Bank Assignment 

Close 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

Bank 1 Bank 3 Bank 5 

Bank 2 Bank 4 Bank 6 

Bank 8 

Bank 7 

Bank 10 Bank 12 

Bank 9 Bank 11 

7 8 9 10 11 12 

Assign 

Strips 

Deassign 

Strips 

Deassign 

All 

To rename a bank 

Click on the desired bank name in the middle of the screen. 

The following dialogue box will be displayed: 

•Rename• 

Bank 1 : OLD NAME to 

NEW NAME 

Cancel 

Execute 

Issue 5.1 Page 3:17

Console Setup 


Use the QWERTY keyboard to edit the bank name. 

A maximum of 8 characters may be used. 

Click on Execute to confirm. 

To select the bank to be edited 

Click on one of the bank buttons 1 to 12. 

The selected bank will be shown in yellow. 

or 

Press the respective bank selector key on the lower AFU. 

3.5.2 Assigning Channel Strips to a Bank 

To assign strips to a Bank 

Click the ASSIGN STRIPS button. 

The Strip Assignment screen is displayed for the selected bank. 

• Strip Assingnment • 

Close 

• Selected Bank • 

• Selected Paths • 

•Strip• 

to 

Inputs Monitor 

Groups Outputs 

Auxes VCAs 

Cues 

• List paths • 

All 

NotonBank 

Not Assigned 

• Assign Pref. • 

Once only 

Cancel 

Execute 

The list on the left of the screen contains a number of signal paths, the content of 

the list will depend on the List Paths buttons: 

Click on All to include every path in the system. 

Click on Not on Bank to list just those paths that have not already been 

assigned to the current Bank. 

Page3:18 Issue 5.1


Console Setup 

Click on Not Assigned to reduce the list to only those paths not assigned on 

any bank. 

To specify which channel strips to assign a signal to 

Click in the Strip box. 

Select strip number can be entered by: 

1. Rolling the trackball left-right to decrease-increase the number, then 

click the Trackball button. 

2. Entering the number through the keypad, then click the Trackball 

button. 

ACCESS 

3. Pressing the key on the channel strip. 

To select which paths are to be assigned to the channel strips 

Moving the pointer to the Path List and clicking on the required paths. 

Each time a path is selected the strip number will increment. Any number of 

paths can be selected. 

Particular path types can be shown in the list by clicking on one of the Inputs, 

Monitor, Groups, Outputs, Auxes, Cues or VCAs buttons. 

To assign a signal path to more than one channel strip simultaneously 

on the current Bank 

Click on the Once Only box. 

This will toggle the mode. 

To confirm the current selection 


Any selected paths will be assigned to the channel strips. 

To abandon the current selection 

Click on Cancel. 

The selection is cleared. 

To return to Bank Assignment screen 

CLOSE 

Click on Close or press the . 

Issue 5.1 Page 3:19

Console Setup 


3.5.3 De-assigning Channel Strips from a Bank 

This is done through the Bank Assignment screen. 

To de-assign strips from a bank 

Select the bank to be edited by clicking on one of the Bank buttons numbered 

1to12. 

Click on De-Assign Strips. 

The Strip Deassignment screen is displayed: 

• Strip Deassignment • 

Close 

• Selected Bank • 

BANK1 : BANK 1 

• Selected Strips • 

Cancel 

Execute 

To select which paths are to be de-assigned from the bank 

Move the pointer to the path list and click on the required paths. 

The selected paths will turn yellow. Any number of paths may be selected. 

Note: 

Clicking twice on an item will select and then de-select it. 

To reach paths that are not on the list 

Press the 

list). 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key associated with the Trackball (while the pointer is in the 

The Trackball will now scroll through the list. 

Click the Trackball button to select the item under the highlight. 

To leave the scroll mode 

Press the 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key again. 

Page3:20 Issue 5.1


Console Setup 

To confirm the de-assignment 


The selected paths will be removed from the list. 

To abandon the de-assignment 


The current selection will be cleared (all selected items will turn blue again). 

To return to the Bank Assignment screen 

CLOSE 

Click on Close or press the . 

3.5.4 De-assign All 

Removes all paths from all faders on the bank. This is done from the Bank 

Assignment screen. 

To de-assign all strips from a bank 

Select the bank to be edited by clicking on one of the Bank buttons numbered 

1to12. 

Click on De-Assign All. 

A confirmation dialogue box will be displayed. 


All assignments to the selected bank will be cleared. 

To abandon de-assignment 

Click on Cancel in the confirmation dialogue box. 

Issue 5.1 Page 3:21

Console Setup 


3.5.5 Renaming a Bank 

This is a second method of renaming a bank. 

To rename a bank 

Click on the box showing the selected bank name in the Strip Deassignment 

screen. 

The following overlay will be displayed. 

•Rename• 

Bank 1 : OLD NAME to 

NEW NAME 

Cancel 

Execute 

Type in the new name on the QWERTY keyboard. 


To reset a Bank to its default name 

Click on the Bank to be renamed. 

Press 

erased. 

(backspace) on the QWERTY keyboard until the name is 


Page3:22 Issue 5.1


Console Setup 

3.5.6 Path Swap 

When paths have been assigned to the console surface, the Path Swap function 

can be used to move them to different fader strips and/or different Banks. 

To swap paths 

12 

Press the key next to the key for the Bank Selection display. 

The Bank Selection display will change to show the Path Swap option. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

SEC 

BANK 

PATH 

SWAP 

EXIT 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

Press the 

1 

key (labelled PATH SWAP). 

The alpha displays associated with the 

Selection display will change as follows: 

ACCESS 

keys will flash and the Bank 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

SEC 

BANK 

PATH 

SWAP 

BANK 

EXIT 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

Press any two 

ACCESS 

keys in turn. 

The associated alpha displays will show the names of the paths that have been 

swapped. 

As many paths can be swapped as required. 

Issue 5.1 Page 3:23

Console Setup 


To change banks in Path Swap 

Press the 

6 

key (labelled BANK). 

The Bank Selection display will change to allow selection of different Banks for 

swapping paths. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

SEC 

BANK 

BANK 

1 

BANK 

7 

BANK 

2 

BANK 

8 

BANK 

3 

BANK 

4 

** PATH SWAP ACTIVE ** 

BANK 

9 

BANK 

10 

BANK 

5 

BANK 

11 

BANK 

6 

BANK 

12 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

Press the required number keys to select the required Banks. 

Press the 

SEC 

BANK 

to switch between selecting Primary and Secondary banks. 

Press the 

key to return to the Path Swap display. 

To end Path Swap 

Press the 

normal. 

12 

key (labelled EXIT) until the Bank Selection display returns to 

The alpha displays will also stop flashing. 

Page3:24 Issue 5.1



4 Path Configuration 

This chapter describes how to use the Path Configuration screen to setup Bank 

assignments, signal processing and the fader relay matrix. How to rename 

paths is also covered. 

To access the Path Configuration screen 

Click the Path Config icon. 

The Path Configuration screen will appear. 


• Selected Path • • Strip Assignment • 

INP 5 : I 5 BANK1 Strip 13 

Close 

Modify 

Processing Order and Allocation 

DIG 

1 

Com 

Lim 

EQ 

System Resources 

Filt EQ Ins 

Lim Comp E/G Del 

24 16 8 76 % 

•PathOptions• 

Stereo Clear Store Recall Dither 20 

Issue 5.1 

Page4:1



4.1 Naming a Path 

A Path that has been assigned to a Channel Strip may be provided with a four 

character user name which will be shown in the alpha display associated with 

ACCESS 

the for the path. 

Note : 

The System name and number will always be retained in the 

four character display at the top of the channel strip. 

4.1.1 To rename paths 

Click the Path Name icon in the Main Menu. 

The Path Naming screen will appear. 

Path Naming 

Close 

All paths • Bank : • 

Inp 1 : I 1 

Inp 2 : I 2 

Inp 3 : I 3 

Inp 4 : I 4 

Inp 5 : I 5 

Inp 6 : I 6 

Inp 7 : I 7 

Inp 8 : I 8 

Inp 9 : I 9 

Inp 10 : I 10 

Inp 11 : I 11 

Inp 12 : I 12 

Inp 13 : I 13 

Inp 14 : I 14 

Inp 15 : I 15 

Inp 16 : I 16 

Inp 17 : I 17 

Inp 18 : I 18 

Inp 19 : I 19 

Inp 20 : I 20 

Input 

Monitor 

Group 

Output 

Aux 

Cue 

VCA 

Tksend 

Input Output 

AuxCue Mon 

BANK 5 BANK 6 

BANK 7 BANK 8 

BANK 9 BANK 10 

BANK 11 BANK 12 

To list paths in a specific bank 

Click the required Bank button. 

The ‘All paths’ title above the path list will change to ‘Paths on Bank x’ according 

to the bank clicked. 

To show paths of a particular type 

Click on one of the Input, Monitor, Groups, Output, Aux or Cue buttons. 

The list will jump to the corresponding path type. 

Page4:2 Issue 5.1



To select the path to be named 

Click the required Path in the path list or press the relevant 

A box will appear below the list of paths for entry of the name. 

ACCESS 

key. 

Inp 15 : I 15 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

When this box is displayed, the key is automatically activated. The 

Trackball or the Up/Down keys will scroll through the list and the name entry box 

will show the path names as the list is scrolled. 

Enter the required name on the keyboard (maximum four characters). 

Press Return to save the name. 

The next entry in the list will be highlighted automatically in the name entry field. 

To reset the path name to its default 

Press the space bar once. 

Press Return to confirm resetting the name. 

To skip an entry 

Press Return without making any change. 

To finish entering names 

Press ESC on the keyboard or press the 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key. 

The trackball will return to normal pointer mode and the name entry box will be 

removed from the screen. 

Click the Close button to finish. 

Issue 5.1 

Page4:3



4.2 Assigning a Path to new Fader 

An alternative method of assigning a path to a fader on a different bank is 

through the Path Configuration Screen. 

Click on the Strip Assignment button. 

The Path Assignment screen will appear. 

Path Assignment 

• Selected Path • 

Inp 11 : I 11 

Close 

• Assigned to Strips • •Bank• •Strip• 

BANK 1 

BANK 2 

BANK 3 

BANK 4 

BANK 5 

BANK 6 

BANK 7 

BANK 8 

BANK 9 

BANK 10 

BANK 11 

BANK 12 

19 

Assign 

Path 

Remove 

Path 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click in the Strip number box and enter the number of the required channel 

ACCESS 

strip by either pressing an key, scrolling through to the number with 

the trackball or by using the left and right cursor keys. 

Click on the required Banks. 

Click on Execute to perform the assignment. 

To remove a path from a Bank 

Click on Remove Path. 

Click on the Bank or Banks to de-assign the path from. 


TIP : 

It is often useful to assign a signal to the same fader on every 

bank so that the operator can always control it. This can be 

done quickly in this screen by clicking on the bank, followed by 

the Execute key. 

Page4:4 Issue 5.1



4.3 Processing Configuration 

Processing elements can be placed in any order in the signal path, pre or post 

fader. Each path can be configured with one each of : 

Four Band Equaliser 

Two Band Filter 

Limiter 

Compressor 

Expander/Gate 

Insertion Point 

The Path Configuration screen gives information about the currently accessed 

path. 

To display the configuration of a path 

Press the 

ACCESS 

key for the required path. 




Close 

Modify 


DIG 

1 

Com 

Lim 

EQ 


Filt EQ Ins 


24 16 8 76 % 



The screen shows the signal path flowing from left to right. 

The System Resources show the various signal processing elements which 

may be configured into a path. Below each set of resources is a ‘fuel gauge’ 

showing how much of each type of resource is still available. The number in the 

gauge shows the number of resources available. If the path displayed is a stereo 

path then the fuel gauge number will be the number of stereo resources 

remaining. 

The system resources are greyed out when they are used up and are no longer 

accessible. 

Issue 5.1 

Page4:5



4.3.1 To add processing to a path 

Click on a system resource box. 

The red jackplug will jump to the standard point in the path for the resource to be 

placed. 

Roll the trackball left and right to move the jackplug along the path. 

Click the trackball button to apply. 

4.3.2 To change the Path configuration 

Click on the processing element to be moved. 

Move the jackplug to the new position. 

Click the trackball button. 

Note: The Meter point ( ) and the track send point ( ) can be 

moved individually in the same way to any point in the signal 

path. 

4.3.3 To remove a processing element from the signal 

path 

Click on the element to be removed. 

Move the jackplug to the system resource box. 

Click the trackball button. 

The available resources gauge will increment. 

4.3.4 To remove all processing elements from a path 

Click the Clear button. 

A confirmation box will be displayed. 

Click Execute. 

Page4:6 Issue 5.1



4.3.5 What to do when a Resource is used up 

In this case it is possible to remove a selected number of processing elements 

simultaneously to make them available for other paths. 

To free up a resource 

Click on the required System Resource gauge. 

The appropriate Processing Allocation screen will be displayed. 

• Filter/EQ Processing Allocation • Close 

Path : Name : Proc 

Inp 5 : I 5 : F 

Input 

Group 

Aux 

Monitor 

Output 

Cue 

xxxx 

xxxx 

xxxx 

Units Used 

Units Free 

Units Total 

Access 

Deconf 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click on the Deconf button. 

Click on the Paths to free up in the list. 


A window will be displayed to select either the element in the resource to be 

removed. The following window is for the Filter/EQ resource. 

• Remove • 

Close 

Filter 

EQ 

Path: 

Inp 1 : I 1 

Deconf All 

Cancel 

Execute 

Select which elements to remove. 

Issue 5.1 

Page4:7




The following confirmation screen will be displayed. 

• Confirmation • 

Filter/EQ only are to be removed from the 

1 selected paths 

Cancel 

Execute 


A resource of the appropriate type will now be free which can be used in the 

required signal path. 

4.3.6 Dynamics processing 

Some parameters within the Limiter, Compressor and Gate can only be 

changed by clicking on the modify box. 

This is described in detail in the Signal Processing chapter. 

Page4:8 Issue 5.1



4.3.7 To make a signal path stereo 

Click the Stereo button. 

Outputs, Groups and Auxes 

The stereo pair will always be made up of the sequential odd and even number 

paths. 

Inputs and Tracks 

A stereo pair can be made up from any pair of Inputs or any pair of Tracks. 

The following screen will be displayed from which to select the stereo partner: 

• Stereo Partner Selection • 

Inp 1 : I 1 

Inp 2 : I 2 

Inp 3 : I 3 

Inp 4 : I 4 

LEFT Leg 

RIGHT Leg 

For path: 

Mon 1 : I 1 

Cancel 

Execute 

By default an odd numbered signal path will be put on the left leg and an even 

numbered path on the right leg. 

To override left and right leg assignment 

Click the Right or Left button as required. 

To select the stereo partner 

Click the required path in the list. 


For all path types 

Any processing in the Accessed path will be copied into the stereo partner. The 

Accessed strip will become stereo. If the new partner is assigned to any strips 

then it will be removed from any Banks in which it appears. 

All routing will be cleared for both paths. 

Issue 5.1 

Page4:9



4.3.8 To make the signal path mono 

Click the Mono button. 

The pair of paths will be treated as completely independent signals. The right leg 

will no longer be assigned to a channel strip. The left leg will remain where the 

stereo path was and will retain the stereo path name. 

The paths will inherit the same processing configuration as the stereo path had. 

All routing will be cleared for both paths. 

4.3.9 To copy path Configurations 

A path configuration can be copied from one path to any number of other paths 

of the same type. 

Note: 

It is not possible to copy Inserts between paths. 

 

ACCESS 

the path to copy the Configuration from. 

Click the Store button on the Path Configuration screen. 

Click the Recall button. 

The following screen will be displayed. 

• Copy path configuration • 

Fdr 

Lim 

•Topath• 

No dither 

Inp 1 : CD 

Inp 2 : I 2 

Inp 3 : I 3 

Inp 4 : I 4 

To select paths press ACCESS 

OR, 

Use the cursor to select 

paths from the list. 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click on Paths in the list to copy the stored configuration to. 

ACCESS 

Alternatively press the keys on the paths to copy the Configuration to. 

This will automatically highlight the entries in the list. 


Page4:10 Issue 5.1



4.4 Signal Matrix 

The Signal Matrix facility is a system option that enables a Matrix of 16 relays to 

be triggered by the action of opening a Fader. 

The function may be used by the operator to start any device that may be 

triggered by a relay closure, e.g. Studio Red light systems, Cart machines, etc. 

To set up fader relays 

Click on the Signal Matrix icon. 

Signal Matrix Definitions 

• Multi Path Mode • 

Relay 1 

Relay 2 

Relay 3 

Relay 4 

Relay 5 

Relay 6 

Relay 7 

Relay 8 

Relay 9 

Relay 10 

Relay 11 

Relay 12 

Relay 13 

Relay 14 

Relay 15 

Relay 16 

AND all paths 

OR any path 

• Switch Mode • 

latch on/off 

pulse on 

pulse off 

CLEAR RELAY 

CLEAR ALL RELAYS 

EDIT PATHS 

Close 

• Relay Paths • 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click on one of the Relays numbered 1-16 to select the Relay to be actioned. 

Click on EDIT PATHS. 

The Edit Relay Paths screen will be displayed. 

• Edit Relay Paths • Close 

INP 1 

INP 2 

INP 3 

INP 4 

INP 5 

INP 6 

INP 7 

INP 8 

INP 9 

INP 10 

INP 11 

INP 12 

INP 13 

INP 14 

INP 15 

INP 16 

INP 17 

INP 18 

INP 19 

INP 20 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

I1 

I2 

I3 

I4 

I5 

I6 

I7 

I8 

I9 

I10 

I11 

I12 

I13 

I14 

I15 

I16 

I17 

I18 

I19 

I20 

Input 

Monitor 

Group 

Output 

Aux 

Cue 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click on the path type that is to be used to control the relay. 

Issue 5.1 Page 4:11



Click on the path or paths required. 

Click on Execute to return to the Signal Matrix Definitions screen. 

Click on AND All Paths or OR Any Path under Multi Path Mode to select 

whether one or any of the associated paths will trigger the relay. 

To select the Switch Mode 

Click on Latch On/Off, Pulse On or Pulse Off. 

This should match the command needed for the respective device. 

To de-select specific relays 

Click on CLEAR RELAY. 

To de-select all relays 

Click on CLEAR ALL RELAYS. 

Page4:12 Issue 5.1



5 Input/Output Configuration 

5.1 Ports and Paths 

All input and output paths within Capricorn need to be connected to either digital 

or analogue input or output Ports. 

These Ports relate directly to the following: 

• The output D/A converters that reside either in the monitor facilities 

rack, or in the analogue I/O racks. 

• The input A/D converters including the respective Mic/Line amps that 

reside in the Mic/Line racks. 

• The input A/D converters that reside in the analogue I/O rack. 

• The AES/EBU digital termination’s that reside in the AES/EBU rack. 

• The MADI digital input/output Ports associated with the respective 

Tape Machine. 

Any input or output path including Auxes and Cues can be connected (or Port 

Routed) to any respective input or output Port. Input paths may only be 

connected to one Port, either analogue or digital, at a time. However any 

number of Input or Track Return paths may be connected to the same Port 

simultaneously. Output paths may be connected to a maximum of 4 output Ports 

at a time. These four output Ports can be any combination of Analogue or Digital 

Ports. 

Multitrack Send/Return paths are normally terminated directly to a digital 

Multitrack via the recorders MADI interface. Alternatively connection to 

Analogue or digital Multitracks may be made via the Analogue I/O rack or 

AES/EBU racks respective MADI link. 

When Multitrack Send/Return paths are connected to the Multitrack via MADI 

the Track Send and matching Track Return Ports are terminated 

simultaneously. 

In addition to the automatic mapping afforded by direct connection of Track 

Send/Return paths via MADI, the system allows both Track Return and Track 

send Paths to be cross patched to alternative Ports within the system. Track 

Return paths may be Port routed directly to the Analogue I/O rack, Digital I/O 

rack, and the Mic/Line rack. An Input Port may be Port routed to any number of 

Track Return Paths simultaneously irrespective of whether the source is via 

MADI, or an Input rack. 

Issue 5.1 

Page5:1



5.2 To Assign Ports to Paths 

Click on the Path Config icon. 

The Path Configuration screen will be displayed. 




Close 

Modify 


DIG 

1 

Com 

Lim 

EQ 


Filt EQ Ins 


24 16 8 76 % 



Press the 

ACCESS 

key on the path you wish to Port route. 

To select an Aux or Cue bus for Port Routing 

Press the 

SEL 

key on the master Aux Control or Cue Control panel. 

Press the respective number of the Aux/Cue bus on the multi-purpose 16 

button select matrix in the monitor section. 

Press the 

ACCESS 

key on the Aux Control or Cue Control panel. 

To access Ports for input paths 

Click on the INPUT symbol at the beginning of the signal path shown on the 

Path Configuration screen. 

To access ports for output paths 

Click on the OUTPUT symbol at the end of the signal path. 

To access ports for Track Return Paths 

Click on the Tape Machine symbol at the beginning of the signal path. 

In all three cases, a Port Selection screen will be displayed. 

Page5:2 Issue 5.1



If a MADI Link has not been selected then the screen will show no ports, as in the 

following example. 

Input Port Selection 

• Selected Path • • Current Port • 

Close 

Inp 20 : I20 None 

NAME PORTS 

• Options • 

? 

The Options icons in the bottom left hand corner show the various options for 

setting up ports. 

Options icons 

? 

De Port 

Input Porting 

Re-select Rack 

Port Users 

Mults Set Up 

Tracksend/Output Porting 

Issue 5.1 

Page5:3



5.2.1 MADI Link Selection 

When there are no ports shown on the Port Selection screen, a Rack or Tape 

Machine must be selected before any further operations can be performed on 

the ports. Selecting a rack provides access to the ports in the rack. Selecting a 

Tape Machine provides access to the tracks available from the machine. 

To select a MADI Link 

Click on the RE-SELECT RACK icon . 

The following screen which allows selection of the specific external rack or tape 

machine will be displayed. 

• Madi Links • 

Close 

IO1 

IO2 

Click on the Icon of the rack or tape machine to connect to. 

The Icon will turn yellow to show it has been selected. 

Click on Close. 

The Port routing screen will be re-displayed showing the ports for the selected 

rack (or tape machine). When a rack has been selected, the screen will be 

similar to the following. 



Close 

Inp 20 : I20 DIG I/O 1 

NAME PORTS 

1 2 3 

AAAA 

4 

BBBB 

5 6 7 8 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 

• Options • • Selected Rack Type • 

? 

Dig I/O 

1+ 

49+ 

Page5:4 Issue 5.1



Note: 

If there are more than 48 ports for the selected rack, there will 

be additional buttons for accessing the ports that do not fit on 

the screen. In the example above, clicking on 1+ will show port 

numbers 1 to 48, and clicking on 49+ will show the remainder. 

5.2.2 Port Selection 

Click on the required Port in the Port Selection screen. 



Close 

Inp 20 : I20 DIG I/O 1 

NAME PORTS 

1 2 3 

AAAA 

4 

BBBB 

5 6 7 8 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

Port Usage 

N/A 

Free 

Used 

Paths 

• Options • • Selected Rack Type • 1+ 

? 

Mic/Line 

The Port that is connected to the currently accessed path is indicated 

in Yellow. 

Ports that are connected to other paths in the system are indicated in 

Grey. 

Ports that are currently free and unassigned are indicated in Blue. 

Ports that are unavailable or are not fitted are blanked out. 

Ports that are assigned elsewhere can be re-ported to the currently accessed 

path by clicking on it. A dialogue box will ask to confirm the reassignment of the 

port from its current path to the accessed path. 

If a stereo path is accessed the Port routing screen will automatically display the 

Ports in stereo pairs. 

The system allows mono paths to be Port routed to one half of an AES/EBU 

digital connection. 

Issue 5.1 

Page5:5



5.2.3 Port Naming 

In addition to the Port Number, a user name relating to the Port may be provided. 

Click on the NAME PORTS button. 

The button will turn yellow. 

Click on the Port to name. 

A dialogue box will be displayed for entering the port name. 

Enter the required user name. 

Two lines of up to 6 characters each can be entered for mono ports, or two 

lines of up to 12 characters each for stereo ports. 

Click on Execute or press the Return key to confirm the name. 

The text entered will be shown under the port number. 

Click on other Ports to give them names. 

To end Port Naming 

Click on the NAME PORTS button. 

The button will turn grey. 

5.2.4 Multiple Output Ports 

Main, Aux and Cue Outputs may be Port routed to 4 destinations 

simultaneously. These Ports may be analogue or digital. 

The four buttons numbered 1-2-3-4 adjacent to the Output symbol in the Path 

Configuration screen highlight when an output path is Ported to more than one 

Port simultaneously. Each time an additional Port is connected to the Accessed 

path the next number becomes available. Clicking on each highlighted number 

causes the output Port symbol to show the respective Port type and number the 

currently Accessed path is connected to. 

Page5:6 Issue 5.1



5.2.5 Multiple Output Ports - Track Sends 

Each Track Send can be connected simultaneously to a maximum of 4 output 

Ports, either Analogue or Digital. When a Multitrack is connected directly via 

MADI then by default the Track Sends are connected sequentially to their 

respective MADI ports. Subsequently any Track Send may be re-ported to any 

other MADI port. In addition, any Track Send may be ported simultaneously to 

any other output rack type. 

To access Tracksend Porting 

Click on the Tape Machine Icon at the beginning of the Track Return Path in 

the Path Configuration screen. 

The INPUT PORT SELECTION screen will be displayed. 

Click on the Out Port Icon . 

The Tracksend Porting screen will be displayed. 

• Tracksend Porting • Close 

Tracksend Paths Tracksend Ports 

TKS 1 : TS 1 

TKS 2 : TS 2 

TKS 3 : TS 3 

TKS 4 : TS 4 

Selected tracksend port 

Port type Port num Usage 

Mon/Fac Out 1 Used 

De port 

Tse 1 ------ ------ ------ 

Tse 2 ------ ------ ------ 

Tse 3 ------ ------ ------ 

Tse 4 ------ ------ ------ 

------ ------ ------ ------ 

------ ------ ------ ------ 

------ ------ ------ ------ 

------ ------ ------ ------ 

------ ------ ------ ------ 

------ ------ ------ ------ 

------ ------ ------ ------ 

------ ------ ------ ------ 

------ ------ ------ ------ 

------ ------ ------ ------ 

------ ------ ------ ------ 

------ ------ ------ ------ 

Cancel 

Execute 

To select each Track send output 

Click on the required blank port number (shown as dashes) in the Tracksend 

Ports list. 

Click on the Port Type box. 

Move the trackball up and down (or press the up/down cursor keys) to scroll 

through the following port types: 

Tape Machine out (tracksends) 

Monitor Facilities out 

AES/EBU digital out 

Analogue out 

Issue 5.1 

Page5:7



Click when the required Port Type is shown. 

Click in the Port num box. 

Use the Trackball, cursor or numeric keypad to select Port number. 

Ports that are already connected to other paths in the system are shown in 

yellow. Ports that are available are shown in white. Ports that are not available 

are shown in red. 

Click when the required Port number is shown. 

Click on Execute or press the 

EXECUTE 

key to confirm. 

The port will be shown in the Tracksend Ports list as selected initially. 

The highlight will jump to the first empty port for the next Track send and the Port 

number will increment automatically. 

Click on Execute or press the 

Port numbers to Track sends. 

EXECUTE 

key to repeatedly assign subsequent 

If a Port that is already connected to an output Path is selected, a dialogue box 

will advise that the Port will be removed from its current connection. 

A maximum of 4 Ports may be connected to any one Track Send. 

To De Port an output from a Track send 

Click the De port button. 


Click on the port in the Tracksend Ports list to be de ported. 


Click the De port button again. 

The button will turn blue and de porting will no longer be active. 

Page5:8 Issue 5.1



5.2.6 Mults Set Up 

The Mults facility allows selection between single or multiple Path connections 

to all Input Ports. 

To set Mults options 

Click on the INPUT symbol at the beginning of the channel strip indicated in 


Click on the Mults Setup Icon . 

The Mults Options dialogue box is displayed. 

• Mults Options • 

Paths using port 

Single 

Multiple 

Deporting options 

Via list always 

Close 

Paths using port 

Single 

Port routing a path to a Port that is already assigned will automatically De Port it 

from its current assignment and re-assign it to the current Path. 

Multiple 

Allows a selected port to be assigned to any number of Input Paths 


Note : 

When a number of paths are connected simultaneously to the 

same Input Port, input selection. I.e. Line A/B, Mic A/B, input 

gain, Phantom Power operate simultaneously across all paths. 

Input Phase Reverse may be selected independently for each 

path. 

Issue 5.1 

Page5:9



Deporting Options 

If Via list always is active (Yellow) 

When the current path is an Input or Monitor path then clicking the De Port icon 

will display the De port screen. The De port screen lists all paths of the current 

type which are ported (eg. if the path type is Input, all ported Input paths will be 

listed). Individual paths can be de-ported from this list (see De Port). 

If Via list always is not active (Blue) 

Clicking the De Port icon will cause the active Port for the current path to be 

de-ported immediately. 

If there is no active Port for the current Input or Monitor path. Selecting De Port 

will display the De port screen. This allows the user to free a specific port which 

is required for use with the current path. 

5.2.7 De Port 

This allows you to de-port any number of Input or Monitor paths. This list will 

display paths of the same type as the current path (eg. if the current path is a 

Monitor path, then the list will show all ported Monitor paths). 

Click on the De Port icon . 

•Deport• 

Ported paths 

MON 1 : MN 1 

MON 2 : MN 2 

Close 

Select the paths 

to be deported 

and then press 

execute. 

Cancel 

Execute 

Select the paths to be de-ported by clicking on them. 

Use the 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key to browse further down the list. 

Click on Execute to confirm the operation. 

The main Port Selection screen will be shown. 

Page5:10 Issue 5.1



5.2.8 In Port 

This facility allows rapid assignment of any number of Input or Track Return 

paths simultaneously to a single Port. 

Click on the In Port Icon . 

The Multi Port screen will be displayed. 

•MultiPort• 

Unported Paths 

MON 1 : MN 1 

MON 2 : MN 2 

List path type 

Mono 

Stereo 

Selected Port 

Port type 

Digital in 

Close 

Port num Usage 

1 

Free 

Port name 

Drum 

Set 

Available paths 125 

Cancel 

Execute 

The Unported Paths list will indicate all Input or Track Return paths currently not 

Ported. 

Click on Mono or Stereo, dependent on Path type. 

Click on the Port Type box. 

Use the Trackball (or cursor keys) to select the rack type from 

Mic/Line AES/EBU Tape Machine 

Click again to confirm the Port Type. 

Click on the Port Number box. 

Use the numeric key pad, cursor, or Trackball to select the Port Number. 

Click again to confirm. 

Click on the paths to be ported in the Unported Paths list. 

The selected paths will be highlighted. 

Click on Execute to route the Input Port to the selected Paths. 

Note : 

Multiple Path selection will only work if the Multiple Ports option 

is selected via the Mults Set Up Icon. 

Issue 5.1 Page 5:11



5.2.9 Port Users 

Port Users shows which paths are using the interrogated port. 

Click on the Port Users Icon . 

The Icon highlights. 

Click on the Port to interrogate. 

? 

This displays a screen indicating all paths currently connected to the selected 

Port. 

• Paths using port • 

Dig I/O port 2 

Inp 9 : I 9 

Close 

If the port is in use by an Insert then the following screen will be displayed. 

• Paths using port • 

Close 

Used by insert 1 

On path 

Aux 5 : AX 5 

Page5:12 Issue 5.1



5.2.10 Digital Word length and Dither 

The correct Digital Word length and Dither can be selected for individual output 

ports that are connected via an AES/EBU or MADI port. 

If an output Path is routed to more than one AES/EBU output Port then the Dither 

may be selected independently for each Port. 

To set Dither 

Click on the Dither button in the Path configuration screen. 

The Dither Bit dialogue box will be displayed. 

• Output Port Dither• 

None 

16 

18 

20 

22 

24 

Close 

Auto finish 

Click on the Dither required. 

Clicking on Close. 

If Auto Finish is selected then clicking on a Dither setting will automatically 

execute the command and close the dialogue box. 

The Dither selected will be displayed on the Dither button on the Path 

Configuration screen. 

Note: 

The default word length set for Inserts that are connected via 

AES/EBU is 16 bits. 

The default word length set for Multitrack sends that are 

connected via MADI is 16 bits. 

The 16 bit default word length for Digital Multitrack sends that 

are connected via MADI may be changed on a per output basis. 

To change the word length, Click on the Track Return path, and 

select the Dither as described above. 

Issue 5.1 Page 5:13



5.3 Inserts 

Capricorn provides 32 Inserts, each of which may be Port Routed to either an 

Analogue or Digital input/output Port. Each Insert may be placed anywhere on 

any signal path in the system. 

5.3.1 To place an insert into the signal path 

Click on the Insert icon in the Path Configuration Screen. 

or 

Click on the Insert fuel gauge. 

The Insert Selection screen will be displayed: 

• Insert Selection• 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

I16 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

Digi 11 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

No path 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

Close 

Remove insert 

Show: Port name 

Deport unused 

The columns in the screen are Insert Number, Path Using Insert and Routed I/O 

Port. 

Insert numbers in use by other paths will have a grey button. Available insert 

numbers have blue buttons. 

Click the Show Port Name/Show Port Num button to toggle between port 

names and port numbers. 

Click on the required Insert Number which has been routed to an I/O Port. 

Note : 

Clicking on an insert which has no I/O port selected will have no 

effect. See Allocation of Ports to Inserts below. 

Page5:14 Issue 5.1



The red jack plug will jump to the position in the path immediately before the 

fader. 

Move the trackball left or right and the jackplug will move along the signal 

path. 

Click a trackball button to apply. 

To remove an Insert element from the signal path 

Click on the Insert element. 

Move the jackplug on to the Insert resource box. 

Click again. 

The Insert is now returned to the storage tank. The available facilities gauge will 

increment. 

5.3.2 To de-port all unused Inserts 

Click on the Deport unused button in the Insert Selection screen. 

A dialogue box will appear asking for confirmation of the action. 


All Inserts which have ports assigned but which are not configured into a path 

will be de-ported. 

Issue 5.1 Page 5:15



5.3.3 Allocating Ports to Inserts 

To allocate ports to inserts 

Click on the Insert resource in the Path Configuration Screen. 

or 

Click on the Insert fuel gauge. 

The Insert Selection screen will be displayed. 

Inserts which are not Port Routed will have the word None in the port column. 

Click on the Routed I/O Port box for the required Insert. 

The Insert Porting screen is displayed: 

• Insert porting • 

Close 

Insert number Insert send Insert return 

1 

Dig op 11 Dig ip 11 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 

• Options • • Selected Rack Type • 

? 

Dig I/O 

1+ 

49+ 

Click on an unused port number (blue port). 

The port will be assigned to the next available Insert or the Insert selected in the 

Insert Selection screen. 

The port will turn yellow. 

When a Port is connected to an Insert then both the Input and Output Port are 

selected simultaneously. 

Click on additional ports to assign ports to sequential Inserts. 


Page5:16 Issue 5.1



If no ports are displayed 

Click on the Re-Select Rack icon. 

Select a rack in the MADI Ports screen. 

The ports from the selected rack will be displayed in the Insert Porting screen. 

To find out how ports are used 

Click on the Port Users icon. 

Click on an assigned port (yellow). 

The assignment of the port will be displayed. 

Issue 5.1 Page 5:17



5.4 Multitrack Tape Machine Interconnection 

5.4.1 Track Allocation 

Since Capricorn has software routing, it is possible to connect the multitrack 

tape machines in different ways across the Track send outputs and the Track 

return inputs. For instance two 24 track machines could be attached across the 

outputs like a 48 track machine, or they could be mapped across the same 24 

track sends in parallel. The Transport Control Configuration screen allows the 

operator to specify which tracks are used by each machine. 

In the display below, a Sony 3324S is patched on to track send 1-24 and track 

return 1-24. 

The system can be operated with up to 3 multitrack tape machines. The switch 

matrix at the top of the Monitor section allows individual track arming on up to 48 

tracks for each machine. 

To access Transport Control Configuration 

Click the Tape Machine icon. 

The Transport Control Configuration screen will be displayed. 

TRANSPORT CONTROL CONFIGURATION Close 

• Current Transport Assignment • • Tape Machines • 

SONY PCM3324 

TS 1-24 TR1-24 A 

B 

C 

CUE 

CUE 

CUE 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

MITSUBISHI X-850 

MITSUBISHI X-860 

SONY PCM3324 

SONY PCM3349 

STUDER A-80 (DC) 

STUDER A-80 (PM) 

STUDER A-820 

STUDER D-820 

UNDEFINED 

CYCLE MODE MADI LINKS ROLLBACK PRE-ROLL 

Page5:18 Issue 5.1



5.4.2 Tape Machine Controls 

A number of different tape machines can be connected to the system and can be 

controlled together by assigning them to 1 of 6 control groups. The 6 groups 

indicated on the screen relate directly to the 6 transport select keys in the Tape 

Transport Control panel on the console surface. 

The box on the right of the tape machine in the Transport Control Configuration 

screen shows which group the tape machine belongs to. All multitracks must be 

controlled through Group 1. This relates directly to key 1 on the Tape Transport 

Control panel. 

5.4.3 Setting up the Tape Machine 

The Current Transport Assignment area of the screen is used to specify what 

type of machine is attached to the console and which ports it is using. 

Click on one of the boxes on the left hand side of the screen. 

Note : 

Remember that multitrack recorders need to be assigned to 

boxes A, B or C as they need to be controlled by key No 1. 

Click on the required machine in the Tape Machines list. 

The box now displays the assigned tape machine and which tracks it is allocated 

to by default. 

If two 24 Trk machines are assigned then the second machine can be connected 

in parallel with the first or it can be connected sequentially. 

Other machines can be assigned to other groups by clicking on the box on the 

left hand side and specifying the machine in the same way as described above. 

If the required tape machine does not appear in the list then it can be added by 

editing a low level file. Please contact your AMS Neve distributor for details of 

this operation. 

Issue 5.1 Page 5:19



5.4.4 Madi Links 

Digital multitrack machines may be connected via MADI directly into the 

systems MADI I/O connectors located on the DSP I/O cards. 

Digital Multitrack recorders can also be connected into the system via the 

AES/EBU rack. This could include Digital work stations such as the AMS Neve 

AudioFile that can connected into the system as though they were a 

conventional mutitrack recorder, thereby enabling the systems track 

send/return monitoring and overdub facilities to operate as normal. 

Analogue multitrack recorders are normally connected into the system via the 

Analogue I/O rack. 

Click the MADI LINKS button in the Transport Control Configuration screen. 

The Current Transport Assignment screen will be displayed. 

• Current Transport Assignment • 

Close 

Assigned 

IO1 

IO2 

Available 

Not Available 

SONY PCM3324 

UN-ASSIGNED 

UN-ASSIGNED 

A 

B 

C 

When Capricorn is powered up the system automatically recognises the type of 

rack or MADI multitrack that has been connected to the DSP I/O cards. The 

Current Transport Assignment screen automatically provides an Icon to 

represent the rack type or multitrack connection for the respective I/O 

connector. 

Page5:20 Issue 5.1



For digital multitrack machines that are connected via MADI 

Click on the appropriate tape machine box (A, B or C). 

The box will highlight in Gold. 

Click on the matching Tape machine Icon. 

A dialogue box will be displayed to select the Track Send to start assigning from. 

The default will map Track Send 1 to Track 1 on the Tape Machine. 

Click in the number box and scroll the number with the trackball or cursor 

keys. 

The Icon will change from Blue to Yellow to confirm connection. 

For digital multitrack recorders that are connected to the 

system via the AES/EBU rack 

Click on the box with the name of the machine. 

Click on the matching AES/EBU rack Icon. 

A dialogue box will be displayed to select the Port to start assigning from. 

Click in the number box select a starting number. 

If the machine is a 24 Trk machine the system will automatically assign the next 

24 AES/EBU input and output Ports following the number you select. 

If it is for example an AMS Neve AudioFile, and it has been entered as an 8 Trk 

recorder in the systems machine set up file, the system will automatically assign 

the next 8 AES/EBU input and output Ports following the number you select. 

For analogue multitrack recorders that are connected to the 

system via an analogue I/O rack 

Click on the respective machine dialogue box 

Click the matching analogue I/O rack Icon. 

A dialogue box will be displayed to select the Port to start assigning from. 

Click in the number box select a starting number. 

If the machine is a 24 Trk machine the system will automatically assign the next 

24 analogue input and output Ports following the number you select. 

Issue 5.1 Page 5:21



5.4.5 Setting up the Rollback Time 

The Rollback Time is the offset that the Tape Machine will rewind when the 

key is pressed. 

ROLL 

BACK 

Click the ROLLBACK button in the Transport Control Configuration screen. 

ROLLBACK ASSIGNMENT 

00:00:10:00.0 = 00:00:10:00.0 

Cancel 

Execute 

The rollback time is always a positive value. The current rollback time is on the 

left-hand side. The default is 250 frames. 

Add or subtract an offset to the current rollback time with the trackball. 

or 

Enter a new time with the numeric keypad in timecode format. 

Click to set the new time. 

Click Execute to confirm and exit. 

5.4.6 Setting up the Pre-Roll Time 

The Pre-Roll Time is the offset that a Tape Machine will rewind when it is 

locating. 

Click the PRE-ROLL button in the Transport Control Configuration screen. 

PRE-ROLL ASSIGNMENT 

00:00:10:00.0 = 00:00:10:00.0 

Cancel 

Execute 

The pre-roll time is always a positive value. The current pre-roll time is on the 

left-hand side. The default is 83 frames. 

Add or subtract an offset to the current rollback time with the trackball. 

or 

Enter a new time with the numeric keypad in timecode format. 

Click to set the new time. 

Click Execute to confirm and exit. 

Page5:22 Issue 5.1


Miscellaneous Setup 

6 Miscellaneous Setup 

The Miscellaneous Setup screen is used for entering a selection of system 

settings. Default values are provided for each setting in the Default 

Configuration. 

Changed values will be stored with a new or updated Configuration. This would 

include the Studio Start-up Configuration. 

To access the Miscellaneous Setup screen 

Click on the Misc Setup Icon in the System Menu. 

OR 

Click on the Wordclock Display box in the System Status area of the screen. 

The Miscellaneous Setup screen will be displayed 

MISCELLANEOUS SETUP 

Close 

Issue 5.1 

Page6:1



6.1 Sample Frequency 

This allows the Wordclock Synchronisation rate and source to be set. 

The last Word Clock value set, is automatically stored into a separate dedicated 

file that is completely independent of the Configuration or Title that is loaded. 

When the system is re-powered or re-booted, the system will automatically reset 

to the last sampling frequency used, or external source if selected. 

To select the Wordclock Source 

Click on the Sample Freq icon in the Miscellaneous Setup screen. 

The Wordclock Synchronisation screen will be displayed: 

• WORDCLOCK SYNCHRONISATION • 

• WORDCLOCK SOURCE • 

Internal 44.1 kHz 

Internal 48 kHz 

External 

Close 

Click on one of the three buttons. 

The options to select from are 

Internal 44.1 KHz 

Internal 48 KHz 

External. This button will only be available for selection when an 

external Word Clock source has been plugged into the DSP 

rack. When connected, the word External will by followed by 

the external Word Clock rate, either 48 or 44.1 kHz. 

A dialogue box will be displayed asking for confirmation. 

Click on Execute to confirm the selection. 

Click on Cancel to abort the current operation. 

The display will return to the Miscellaneous Setup screen. 

The Wordclock Display will flash while the system re-synchronises to the new 

sample rate. 

Page6:2 Issue 5.1



6.2 Desk Level 

Allows the input and output operating levels of the console to be adjusted by a 

hybrid switched gain amplifier before signals pass through the ADCs or DACs. 

The clipping point for the ADCs (and DACs) is +24dBu (0dBFS). This is 

sufficiently high to allow for applying up to 24dB of gain to inputs to improve 

signal to noise ratio. 

Input gain can be increased by 0 to +24db in 6dB steps. This takes place before 

the input metering point so the meter will show the cumulative signal level (i.e. 

the level that the console ends up working with). 

Outputs can be attenuated by 0 to -24db in 6dB steps. This takes place after the 

metering point, so a 0dB output signal with -6dB of attenuation applied will show 

on the meter as 0dBu. 

To change the desk operating levels 

Click on the Desk Level icon in the Miscellaneous Setup screen. 

The Desk Level screen will appear. 

• Desk Level, 

External Gain 

Outputs 

Aux's 

Cues 

MainMon 

SLS 

Hph 

PFL 

Inputs 

EX-M 

EX-S 

EX-C 

Clip at +24dBu • 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Close 

RESET 

The outputs are: 

Outputs 

Aux’s 

Cues 

MainMon 

SLS 

Hph 

PFL 

All outputs except for those specifically listed separately 

here 

Auxiliary outputs 

Outputs from the Cues 

The outputs from the Control Room Monitoring system 

The Studio Loudspeaker outputs. 

The Headphone outputs. 

The Pre-Fader Listen solo outputs. 

Issue 5.1 

Page6:3



The inputs are: 

Inputs 

EX-M 

EX-S 

EX-C 

All inputs except those specifically listed separately here 

External inputs to the Control Room Monitor 

External inputs to the SLS bus 

External inputs to the Cues 

Click on a value you wish to change. 

The trackball will switch to scroll mode and the pointer will disappear from the 

screen. 

Roll the trackball left or right to change the value. 

Click a trackball button when the desired value is shown. 

The trackball will return to pointer mode. 

The new operating level will take effect at the appropriate point. 

To reset all values to zero 

Click on the RESET button. 

Note: 

The RESET button will not be available if all values are already 

zero. 

A dialogue box will appear for confirmation of the reset. 

Click on Execute to zero all values. 

The Desk Level screen will be re-displayed with all values at zero. 

OR 


The Desk Level screen will remain unchanged. 

To return to the Miscellaneous Setup screen 

Click on the Close button or press the 

CLOSE 

key. 

Page6:4 Issue 5.1



6.3 Delay Times 

Note: 

This should not be confused with signal path delay. 

Click in the entry box and use the Trackball, cursor or numeric keys to change 

the selected delay period for the following functions : 

To set Delay Times 

Click on the Delay Times icon in the Miscellaneous Setup screen. 

The Delay Times screen will be displayed: 

• DELAY TIMES • 

Context-sensitive Help 

Command completion Help 

Double-click period 

Initial keyboard dwell 

Keyboard repeat period 

Monitor Matrix Hold 

Key-hold launch 

5.00 

1.00 

0.20 

0.40 

0.04 

5.00 

1.00 

Close 

Defaults 

The times are displayed in seconds and can be set to hundredths of a second. 

The range is 0.01sec to 9.99sec. 

Context-sensitive help 

This is the amount of time that a requested help screen takes to be displayed. 

Command completion Help 

Not currently used. 

Double-click period 

This is the maximum amount of time allowed between subsequent clicks of the 

Trackball buttons for the clicks to be recognised as a Double Click (i.e. a double 

click must be done in this time or less). 

Initial keyboard dwell 

This is the amount of time that a key must be held down on the QWERTY 

keyboard before the system recognises that it is being held down. The key then 

starts to repeat, as per the Keyboard repeat period. 

Keyboard repeat period 

This is interval between repeats of a key that is held down on the QWERTY 

keyboard. 

Issue 5.1 

Page6:5



Monitor Matrix Hold 


Key-hold launch 


To change a delay time 

Click on the box containing the time you wish to change. 

The trackball pointer will disappear from the screen. 

Roll the trackball to the left or right to change the time. 

Click a trackball button when the desired time is displayed. 

The trackball pointer will return to pointer mode. 

To reset the times to their default values 

Click on the Defaults button. 

The times will be reset to the values shown in the screen illustration above. 

To return to the Miscellaneous Setup screen 

Click on the Close button or press the 

CLOSE 

key. 

Page6:6 Issue 5.1



6.4 Intensity 

Allows users to adjust the brightness of controls and displays on the console 

surface. This is set by a number in the range of 1 to 15 (brightest). 

To change the intensity of surface controls 

Click on the Intensity icon in the Miscellaneous Setup screen 

The Display Brightness Control screen will be displayed: 

• DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS CONTROL • 

Meters 

11 

Close 

Circular Bargraphs 

Hi-lighted Alphanumerics 

Lo-lighted Alphanumerics 

LEDs 

15 

15 

3 

15 

Dim all 

Defaults 


The trackball will switch to scroll mode. 

Roll the trackball left (dimmer) or right (brighter) to change the value. 

The brightness of the controls on the surface will change as the value changes. 

Click a trackball button when the value is at the desired level. 


To set the brightness of all controls to minimum 

Click on the Dim all button. 

All the values will change to 1. 

The surface controls will be dimmed. 

To set the values to default settings 


The values will be set to their defaults, as shown in the screen illustration above. 

Issue 5.1 

Page6:7



6.5 Touch 

The touch sensitivity for faders and controls is performed automatically when 

the system is powered up or re-booted. If there are problems with touch this 

screen allows the sensitivity to be re-calibrated whilst the system is still in 

operation. 

To re-calibrate all touch detectors 

Click on the Touch icon in the Miscellaneous Setup screen. 

A confirmation dialogue box will be displayed: 

•Confirmation• 

Click on EXECUTE to perform a re-calibration 

of all touch detectors in the system - HANDS 

OFF KNOBS, PLEASE!!. Then wait for the 

message confirming that the operation has 

completed. 

Click on CANCEL if you don't want to perform 

a re-calibration. 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click on Execute to perform the re-calibration. 

Note: 

Do not touch any faders or controls when re-calibration is in 

progress. 

A message will appear when the operation is complete. 

Click on Close or press the 

screen. 

OR 

CLOSE 

key to return to the Miscellaneous Setup 

Click on Cancel to abort the re-calibration and return to the Miscellaneous 

Setup screen. 

Page6:8 Issue 5.1



6.6 Gearing 

Used to adjust trackball and keyboard gearing (e.g. how fast the trackball 

pointer moves when the trackball is rolled). 

To change gearing 

Click on the Gearing icon in the Miscellaneous Setup screen. 

The Trackball and Keyboard Gearing screen will appear: 

• TRACKBALL AND KEYBOARD GEARING • 

Close 

Standard 

List Scrolling 

Path Configuration Placement 

Shuttle 

Jog 

Numeric Edit 

Cursor Key Increment 

3 

10 

15 

20 

20 

5 

5 

Defaults 

Standard 

This governs how fast the trackball pointer moves in normal pointer mode. 

List Scrolling 

This governs how fast lists are scrolled up and down with the trackball. 

Path Configuration Placement 

This is how quickly a selected processing element moves between its possible 

locations in the Path Configuration screen when the trackball is move left or 

right. 

Shuttle 


Jog 


Numeric Edit 

This governs the rate at which numeric values are changed with the trackball. 

Cursor Key Increment 

This governs the speed of the pointer when it is moved with the cursor keys. 

Issue 5.1 

Page6:9




The trackball will switch to scroll mode and the pointer will disappear from the 

screen. 

Roll the trackball left or right to change the value. 

The range is 1 to 50 (fastest). 

Click a trackball button when the desired value is shown. 


To set the values to default settings 


The values will be set to their defaults, as shown in the screen illustration above. 

Page6:10 Issue 5.1



6.7 External 

Allows the assignment of digital inputs to the external input selection keys 

(numbered 1 to 16) in place of the analogue input associated with the key. 

EXT 

When the key in the Control Room Monitoring, SLS/Phones or Cues sections 

is pressed, the user can then send a selected digital source to the output. 

The ports for external inputs must be on the same I/O card as the Monitor 

Facilities Rack. 

To select external inputs from digital sources 

Click on the External icon in the Miscellaneous setup screen. 

The External Inputs screen will be displayed: 

• External Inputs • Close 

External 

CR 

SLS 

CUE 

Input Analog 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

Digital Port 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

3:5 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

None 

Select righthand 

column for digital 

inputs. 

In the screen above, the analogue port 7 has been replaced with the signal on 

EXT 

ports 5 and 6 from the digital device connected to Madi 3. When the key is 

7 

pressed in the Control Room Monitoring section, selecting key from the 

external input selector will send the digital signal output from ports 5 and 6. 

Click on the External button you wish to select the input for (i.e. CR, SLS or 

CUE). 


Click on a Digital Port button. 

Issue 5.1 Page 6:11



The External Port Select screen will be displayed: 

• External Port Select • Close 

Digital ports on IO with Monitor Facilities Rack. 

For input 4. 

Digital 

1/2 

C 

Mon/Fac Digital Tape M/C 

3/4 5/6 

M 

7/8 9/10 11/12 

13/14 15/16 17/18 19/20 21/22 23/24 

25/26 27/28 29/30 31/32 33/34 35/36 

37/38 39/40 41/42 43/44 45/46 47/48 

Key 

M control room 

S SLS 

C Cue 

Used 

Selected 

Free 

Click on the device (e.g. Digital, Tape M/C, etc.) you wish to select a port 

from. 


Click on the pair of port numbers you wish to assign. 


Note: 

The key at the bottom of the screen indicates how the different 

colours and legends indicate port usage. Only ports which are 

free may be selected. 

If a port is already assigned, it will be highlighted in yellow. 

Clicking a different port will move the highlight to the newly 

selected port. 


The selection will be saved. 

The Input Analogue button next to the selected Digital Port will turn blue. The 

legend on the selected Digital Port button will indicate the Madi number and port 

assigned (the odd number from the port pair is shown). 

Page6:12 Issue 5.1



To de-select a digital port 

Click on the Input Analogue button next to the Digital Port button which 

requires de-selecting. 

The Analogue button will turn yellow. 

The legend on the Digital Port button will change to None. 

Issue 5.1 Page 6:13



6.8 Options 

Allows users to set miscellaneous options for the console. 

To set miscellaneous options 

Click on the Options icon in the Miscellaneous Setup screen. 

The System Control screen will be displayed: 

• System Control • Close 

Mono/Stereo levels 

Monotostereo 

-3.0 dB * 

0.0 dB 

Stereo to mono 

0.0 dB 

-3.0 dB * 

-4.5 dB 

-6.0 dB 

* is default 

Automation 

Auto join 

Auto glide out 

Safety stop 

Surface controls 

Tap toggle 

ACCESS on SOLO 

Freeze Monitor Mode 

Safety store times 

Enable 

Save after 

then every 

15 mins 

5 mins 

Dim monitors (FF/REW) 

Enabled 

Enable CXS relays 

Select options as described on the following pages. 

Note: 

Enable CXS relays is not currently implemented. 

Page6:14 Issue 5.1



6.8.1 Mono/Stereo Levels 

Mono to stereo 

-3.0 dB * Automatically drops the level of each channel by 3 dB to 

compensate for the increase in output gain when panning 

between a stereo output. The * denotes this as the default 

setting. 

0.0 dB Gives full output from both legs when panning between a stereo 

output. Therefore the output will increase by 3 dB when the 

signal is panned to centre. 

Stereo to mono 

0.0 dB A stereo signal routed to a mono output will create a 6.0dB rise 

at the output. 

-3.0 dB * Attenuates the output by 3.0dB. The * denotes this as the 

default setting. 

-4.5 dB Attenuates the output by 4.5dB 

-6.0 dB Attenuates the output by 6dB and therefore provides constant 

gain. 

Issue 5.1 Page 6:15



6.8.2 Automation 

There are three automation options: Auto join, Auto glide out and Safety stop. 

Auto join and Auto glide out can be enabled at the same time. If Safety stop is 

enabled then Auto join and/or Auto glide out will be disabled, and vice versa. 

The operation of Auto glide out takes precedence over Auto join. 

Auto join 

This is disabled (blue button) in the Default Configuration. The setting will be 

saved as part of the current Configuration. 

The following example explains how Auto join operates when it is enabled. 

Auto join example 

The following diagram shows a very simple first Mix/Pass (i.e. 1/1) where only 

one fader move has been recorded: 

Mix/Pass 1.1 

Fader moved up 

Fader moved down 

Fader 

position 

Start of 

pass 

Time 

End of 

pass 

A new Mix/Pass (1.2) is then created where an additional fader move is added. 

The tape is stopped before the end of the Mix/Pass. 

Page6:16 Issue 5.1



The following diagram shows what will happen with Auto join off (assuming no 

automation modes are used to alter the mix in any other way): 

Mix/Pass 1.2 

Original Mix/Pass 

Fader moved again 

Tape 

stopped 

Fader moves written 

to follow previous 

Mix/Pass, offset 

by the last fader 

position 

Fader 

position 

Start of 

pass 

Time 

End of 

pass 

As noted, the fader moves recorded by Mix/Pass 1.1 are added to the last fader 

position when the tape is stopped so that the position of the fader on replaying 

the new Mix/Pass is relative to its original position. 

The following diagram shows what would happen to the same Mix/Pass (1.2) 

with Auto join enabled: 

Mix/Pass1.2withAutojoin 

Fader 

position 


Fader moved again 

Tape 

stopped 

Fader moves written 

to snap back to 

original Mix/Pass 

on the first move 

after the tape 

is stopped 

Start of 

pass 

Time 

End of 

pass 

When the tape is stopped, the automation data is searched for the next fader 

move, and this is written back to Mix/Pass 1.2 to snap the fader back to its 

original position. This restores the remaining fader moves to the absolute 

settings recorded in Mix/Pass 1.1. 

In a more complex Mix/Pass, Auto join will cause the system to search forward 

through the automation data to the next change to each control after the tape 

has been stopped. The positions of each control will be restored to their absolute 

positions (snapped back as in the fader example above), and the remainder of 

the automation data will be the same as the previous Mix/Pass. 

Issue 5.1 Page 6:17



Auto glide out 



When Auto glide out is enabled then a glide that has not finished will continue to 

be written to a Mix/Pass when the tape is stopped, until the glide has matched to 

the control's original position. 

This is illustrated in the following diagram: 

Mix/Pass with Auto glide out 


Fader moved 

again 

Glide 

initiated 

Glide continues until 

the fader is matched to 

the previous Mix/Pass 

Fader 

position 

Tape 

stopped 

Start of 

pass 

Time 

End of 

pass 

The operation of Auto glide out takes precedence over Auto join. 

Safety stop 



Safety stop causes all controls to match back to the previous Mix/Pass with a 1 

frame glide when the tape is stopped. 

Safety stop can not be enabled at the same time as Auto join or Auto glide out. 

Page6:18 Issue 5.1



6.8.3 Surface controls 

Tap toggle 

The button is enabled (yellow) by default and allows the operator to tap the Mute 

keys to toggle them on and off as an alternative to pressing them all the way 

down. Click on the button to disable this feature (the button turns blue). 

ACCESS on SOLO 

Disabling this button (blue) stops the AFU from following the Soloed path. This 

button is enabled (yellow) by default. 

Freeze Monitor Mode 

Enabling this button (yellow) prevents the global Overdub and global Track 

Send/Return keys on the Monitor section from changing state. 

The individual Channel strip Overdub and Track Send/Return keys will continue 

to operate as normal. 

This button is disabled (blue) by default. 

6.8.4 Safety store times 

To enable user settings on the safety store timer 

Click on the Enable button so it turns yellow. 

Click on the Save after box and roll the trackball left or right to set the time. 

Click on the then every box and roll the trackball left or right to set the time. 

To disable user setting on the safety store time 

Click on the Enable button so it turns blue. 

The Safety Store will be updated every 15 minutes. 

6.8.5 Dim monitors 

Dim monitors is disabled (blue Enabled button) by default. When it is enabled, 

the main control room monitors will be dimmed automatically when a tape 

machine is in fast-forward or rewind. 

Issue 5.1 Page 6:19



6.9 MIDI 

The MIDI List allows MIDI program change commands to be associated with the 

keys in the soft panel when the MIDI Soft Menu is selected (see chapter 21). 

To display the MIDI List 

Click the MIDI icon in the Miscellaneous Setup screen. 

The MIDI LIST (Program Changes) screen will be displayed. 

• MIDI LIST (Program changes) • Close 

• Num Name Chn Prog • 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Edit 

Reset 

Num corresponds to the numbered key in the MIDI Soft Menu. Up to 24 can be 

defined. (These are displayed in three groups of 8 by the soft panel.) 

Name is a description that can be applied. This is not displayed by the MIDI Soft 

Menu. 

Chn is the MIDI Channel that will be given the program change. 

Prog is the Program Number that will be issued to the MIDI Channel. 

To change a MIDI program 

Click the Edit button. 

It will turn yellow. 

Click on the required Num (use Scroll to access 17-24). 

Page6:20 Issue 5.1



The Edit MIDI list item dialogue box will be displayed, indicating which Num has 

been selected. 

• Edit MIDI list item 1 • Close 

•Name• 

• Channel • 

• Program • 

(0 = inactive) 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click in the Name box and enter a description if required. 

Click in the Channel box and roll the trackball left/right to change the Channel 

number. 

The MIDI Channel number can be in the range 0-16. A value 0 will make the 

corresponding Soft Menu key inactive. 

Click to set the number and return to normal pointer mode. 

Click in the Program box and roll the trackball left/right to change the 

Program number. 

The Program number can be in the range 0-127. 

Click to set the number and return to normal pointer mode. 


The new settings will be shown in the MIDI List screen. 

To reset all Names to blank and all Channels and Programs to 

zero 

Click the Reset button. 

Note: 

There is no warning or confirmation for this action. 

Issue 5.1 Page 6:21



Page6:22 Issue 5.1


Routing 

7 Routing 

Internal signal routing between paths is displayed and controlled with the 

ACCESS 

dedicated matrix of keys on the Assignable Facilities Unit and the keys. 

The AFU Routing Panel has a matrix of keys each for Tracks, Groups and Main 

outputs. Each matrix always shows which tracks, groups and outputs the 

currently accessed path is routed to. 

The matrix does not show which paths are routed to the accessed path so the 

panel will be blank for output paths (Main Outputs, Cues and Aux Masters). 

The matrix keys are double-action switches. A light press to the first level is used 

for routing interrogation. A full press to the second level is used to perform 

routing. 

TRACK ROUTING 

GROUP ROUTING 

FILM 

MODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

MS 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

DUAL 

MONO 

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

STEM 

SEL 

25 27 29 31 

26 28 30 32 

OUTPUT ROUTING 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

33 35 37 39 

34 36 38 40 

41 

43 45 47 

42 44 46 48 

INTER 

LOCK 

CLEAR 

ROUTE 

ROUTING 

TOUCH 

Issue 5.1 

Page7:1

Routing 


7.1 Routing 

7.1.1 Forward Routing 

AFU Forward Routing 

To route the currently accessed path 

Fully press number keys in the Track Routing, Group Routing and/or Output 

Routing matrices. 

The LEDs for each routing key pressed will illuminate. The operation is executed 

immediately. 

If the destination path is stereo then either left or right leg can be pressed for 

selection and both LEDs will illuminate. 

It is not possible to route to paths if they are not present in the current 

configuration (i.e. if the system configuration only has main outputs 1 to 4 then 

outputs 5 to 8 are not available for routing). 

To allow routing to a single Track only 

Press the 

INTER 

LOCK 

key. 

The LED above the key will illuminate. The key only controls track routing. 

To cancel all forward routing for the currently accessed path 

Press the 

CLEAR 

key. 

The accessed path will no longer be routed to any Tracks, Groups or Main 

Outputs. 

The 

CLEAR 

key also clears reverse routing. 

For example, to route input 1 to track 1 and track 3 

Press the 

ACCESS 

key on the Input 1 strip. 

1 3 

Press and in the AFU Track Routing matrix. 

Page7:2 Issue 5.1


Routing 

7.1.2 Reverse Routing 

This allows several channels at the same time to be routed to one track, group or 

ACCESS 

output. The operation can be performed on the AFU and/or with the keys. 

AFU Reverse Routing 

During reverse routing the other AFU and strip controls will operate as normal on 

the accessed path. 

To use the AFU for reverse routing 

Pressing the 

The key will flash. 

ROUTE 

key. 

Press the number key for the required Group, Track or Output. 

The LED above the key will illuminate. 

The 

ACCESS 

keys for paths routed to the selected destination will illuminate. The 

alpha displays will flash to indicate that the 

ACCESS 

keys are used for a special 

mode. 

The Bank selector panel will show a symbol on banks with any hidden routed 

paths. 

Press the 

ACCESS 

keys to toggle routing of paths to the selected destination. 

Use the Bank selector panel to reach hidden paths for routing. 

To end the operation 

Press the 

ROUTE 

key. 

The key will cease flashing. 

Issue 5.1 

Page7:3

Routing 


Momentary Reverse Routing 

Momentary reverse routing is only activated after one of the routing keys is held 

down for about two seconds. 

Touch and hold down a routing destination key on the AFU. 

The 

ROUTE 

key will flash. 

Press 

ACCESS 

keys to toggle routing to the selected destination. 

Release the routing destination key to end. 

Access Key Reverse Routing 

ACCESS 

If an key for a Group or Main Output path is held down for longer than 

about a second then reverse routing is initiated. The operation is similar to 

Momentary Reverse Routing. 

Hold down the 

ACCESS 

key for a Group or Main Output. 

ROUTE 

The 

activated. 

key and the strip alpha displays will flash when the routing mode is 

ACCESS 

Press the keys for the source paths (Inputs or Monitors) to toggle 

routing to the destination. 

Release the destination 

ACCESS 

key to end the operation. 

Page7:4 Issue 5.1


Routing 

7.2 Interrogation 

Two forms of interrogation are available: forward interrogation and reverse 

interrogation. 

Forward Interrogation allows the operator to see which destinations the 

accessed channel strip is routed to. 

Reverse interrogation allows the operator to select a destination and see which 

paths are routed to it. 

7.2.1 Forward Interrogation 

The Routing keys on the AFU provide forward interrogation at all times for the 

accessed path. 

7.2.2 Reverse AFU Interrogation 

To find out which paths are routed to a Track, Group or Main 

Output 

Press one of the routing keys in the routing matrix to the first level of 

depression. 

ACCESS 

The keys will illuminate on routed paths and the bank selector display will 

show a symbol on banks with any hidden routed paths. The channel strip 

alphanumeric displays will flash to indicate that the control surface is in a special 

mode. 

7.2.3 Reverse Access Interrogation 

To find out which paths are routed to a Group or Main Output 

Press and hold the 

ACCESS 

key for the required Group or Main Output. 

ACCESS 

After about two seconds, the key LEDs for paths that are routed to that 

path will illuminate and the bank selector display will show a symbol on banks 

ACCESS 

with any hidden routed paths. The key LEDs showing AFU assignment 

will turn off unless they are part of the routing. Interrogation will be desk wide. 

Issue 5.1 

Page7:5

Routing 


7.3 Other Routing Panel Functions 

Film Mode and Stem Sel 

FILM 

Pressing 

MODE 

changes the operation of three of the AFU FACs to select pan law, 

front/back pan and rear surround split. 

STEM 

SEL 

is used to simultaneously route one or more paths to all track sends 

associated with a film stem. 

See Track Send Signals in the Signal Processing chapter. 

MS and Dual Mono 

These keys are used to define stereo input sources as being MS or Dual Mono 

sources. They are only used with stereo paths. 

See the Signal Processing chapter. 

Page7:6 Issue 5.1


Monitoring 

8 Monitoring 

Capricorn provides comprehensive monitoring outputs and facilities. 

The Control Room Monitor is a stereo output that can feed one of 3 speaker sets, 

plus a PFL speaker. It has dedicated level control and switching. 

Separate outputs are provided for the Studio Loudspeaker and Headphone. 

All the monitoring outputs can monitor Main Outputs, Auxes, Cues or External 

sources. 

Monitor modes for the Monitor paths can be set globally and locally, including 

the operation of Overdub mode. 

Comprehensive solo facilities are provided with normal Solo, PFL and APL 

modes provided. 

Solo operation is set with global controls in the Monitor section and the Solo 

setup screen on the Graphics Display. 

Mutes are controlled from the path strips. 

Issue 5.1 

Page8:1

Monitoring 


8.1 Monitoring Controls 

8.1.1 Strip Monitor Mode Controls 

These keys are only used to set 

monitoring modes on the Monitor 

paths and are inactive on all other 

path types. 

O/D 

SEND 

LOCK 

RET 

SEND 

RET 

The and keys select the source for the monitor path and selecting both 

keys sets Super Mon mode. Super Mon mode is when the track send and track 

return are monitored together. If the Track is dropped into record then the track 

return is cut to the monitor (this prevents an offset between the signals being 

heard, as caused by delay introduced by the length of the signal path to, from 

and within a tape machine). 

O/D 

The local key causes any Cues fed from this path to monitor the signal that is 

sent to the tape. 

LOCK 

The key is used to prevent the global keys from changing the local monitoring 

modes. 

8.1.2 Global Monitor Mode Controls 

Used to globally set the monitoring 

mode on Monitor paths. 

OVERDUB 

sets controls which are in 

Overdub to the Line In source ready 

for overdubbing. 

LOCK 

RESET 

MONITOR MODE 

SEND 

O/D 

RESET 

MIXED 

CUE 

OVERDUB 

RET 

RTN 

CUES 

8.1.3 SLS/Phones 

The level for studio loudspeakers 

and headphones may be set 

independently using the LEVEL 

control. The studio loudspeakers and 

headphones are cut separately. 

LEVEL 

SLS 

CUT 

SLS 

SEL 

PHONE 

CUT 

PHONE 

SEL 

The SEL keys are used to switch the 

Source Selection Matrix to selecting 

sources for studio loudspeakers or 

headphones. 

O/P 

EXT AUX CUE 

SLS/PHONES 

FOL 

MON 

Page8:2 Issue 5.1


Monitoring 

8.1.4 Control Room Monitoring 

The top row of keys is used to select 

the set of loudspeakers for 

monitoring. 

SPK1 


SPK2 

SPK3 

FIX 

LEVEL 

PFL 

SPK 

The middle row of keys is used to 

modify the signal sent to the 

speakers. 

Ø 

O/P 

MONO 

EXT 

CUT 

LEFT 

AUX 

CUT 

RIGHT 

CUE 

L/R 

FOL 

ACC 

The bottom row of keys is used to 

select the monitoring source. 

8888 

The 4-digit alpha display shows the 

monitoring level set by the level 

control below it. 

CUT 

LEVEL 

DIM 

8.1.5 Master Solo Controls 

Sets the Solo or APL mode and PFL 

mode separately for Input, Monitor 

and Group paths. Sets solo on the 

strips to operate in interlocking, 

momentary or latching mode. 

I/P 

PFL 

I/P 

SOLO 

SOLO 

MON 

PFL 

MON 

SOLO 

GRP 

PFL 

GRP 

SOLO 

Banks or groups of solos can be 

setup. 

RESET 

clears previously set solo, 

APL and PFL banks. 

8.1.6 Strip Solo and Mute Controls 

INTER 

LOCK 

SOLO 

MEM 

MOM 

RESET 

LATCH 

Used to solo and mute the path 

which is currently assigned to the 

strip. 

Mutes are automated and have keys 

for setting the automation mode. See 

Automation Operations. 

SOLO 

MUTE 

PLAY 

MUTE 

LINK 

ISO 

MUTE 

REC 

Issue 5.1 

Page8:3

Monitoring 


8.2 Control Room Monitoring 

8.2.1 Source Selection 

To select the source to be monitored 

O/P EXT AUX CUE 

Press one of the , , or keys. 

The associated LED will light. 

Note : 

See the Miscellaneous Setup chapter for information on setting 

External sources. 

Press the source matrix key for the required source. 


FROM 

TO 

SPK1 

SPK2 

SPK3 

FIX 

LEVEL 

PFL 

SPK 

O/P 

EXT 

AUX 

CUE 

CUE 

SLS 

C/R 

Ø 

MONO 

CUT 

LEFT 

CUT 

RIGHT 

L/R 

LATCH 

O/P 

EXT 

AUX 

CUE 

FOL 

ACC 

1 2 

8888 

3 4 

5 6 

LEVEL 

7 8 

CUT 

DIM 

9 10 

11 12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

The LED above the key will illuminate and if a stereo source is selected then 

both legs will be monitored and both LEDs will illuminate. 

If the 

LATCH 

key is pressed then several signals can be monitored at the same time. 

To monitor the accessed path 

FOL 

Press ACC . 

Press 

ACCESS 

keys as required to monitor different paths. 

Page8:4 Issue 5.1


Monitoring 

8.2.2 Monitoring Options 

To set the overall monitoring level 

Rotate the LEVEL pot to the required setting. 

The 4-digit alpha-numeric display shows the monitoring level. 

To offset the monitoring level for a set of speakers 

SPK1 SPK2 SPK3 

Press and hold the or key. 

The alpha display above the level pot will display the current offset. 


The offset can be in the range -60dB to +20dB in 1dB steps. The default is 0dB. 


Release the or key. 

The offset will be applied to the setting on the LEVEL pot when the set of 

speakers is selected. 

To fix the monitoring level for speakers 


Press the 

FIX 

LEVEL 

key. 

The LED above the key will illuminate and the level will now be fixed for each set 

of speakers. 

To select the set of loudspeakers for monitoring 


Press the or key. 

To Cut the Control Room Monitor output 

Press the 

CUT 

key. 

To cut the signal to the left or right speaker 

CUT 

CUT 

Press the LEFT or RIGHT keys as required. 

The LED above the selected key(s) will illuminate. The signal to the 

corresponding speaker will be cut. 

CUT 

Note : Pressing both keys is the same as using the main key. 

Issue 5.1 

Page8:5

Monitoring 


To swap the signals appearing on the left and right speakers 

Press the 

L/R 

key. 

Left-right swap stops when the key is released (momentary action). 

To set the Control Room Monitor Dim level 

Press the 

DIM 

LEVEL 

key to change the mode of the Level control. 

The Circular Bargraph and the alpha 

display will show the current Dim 

level setting. 

8888 

LEVEL 

APL 

DIM 

DIM 

LEVEL 

APL 

PFL 

TB 

GRP 1 

TB 

GRP 2 

TB 

GRP 3 

TB 

GRP 4 

TB 

GRP 5 

TB 

GRP 6 

Turn the rotary control to the required level. 

To Dim the Control Room Monitor output 

Press the 

DIM 

key. 

To monitor the PFL/Solo output on a separate loudspeaker 

Press the 

PFL 

SPK 

key. 

To invert the phase on one side of the output 

Press the 

key. 

Phase inversion stops when the 

key is released (momentary action). 

To monitor a mono sum 

Press the 

MONO 

key. 


Page8:6 Issue 5.1


Monitoring 

8.3 SLS and Headphone Monitoring 

8.3.1 Source Selection 

To select studio loudspeaker sources 

Press the 

SLS 

SEL 

key. 

To select headphone sources 

Press the 

PHONE 

SEL 

key. 

To select the source 

O/P EXT AUX CUE 

Press one of the or keys. 

The associated LED will light. 

Note : 

See the Miscellaneous Setup chapter for information on setting 

External sources. 

Press the source matrix key for the required source. 

FROM 

TO 

SLS 

CUT 

PHONE 

CUT 

O/P 

EXT 

AUX 

CUE 

CUE 

SLS 

C/R 

LEVEL 

SLS 

SEL 

PHONE 

SEL 

LATCH 

O/P 

EXT 

AUX 

CUE 

FOL 

MON 

1 2 

SLS/PHONES 

3 4 

5 6 

7 8 

9 10 

11 12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

The LED above the selected source key will illuminate and if a stereo source is 

selected then both legs will be monitored and both LEDs will illuminate. 

Issue 5.1 

Page8:7

Monitoring 


If the 

LATCH 

key is pressed then several signals can be monitored at the same time. 

To set the studio loudspeaker or headphones source to follow 

the source selection on the Control Room Monitor 

SLS 

PHONE 

Press the or key as required. 

SEL 

SEL 

Press the 

FOL 

MON 

key. 

FOL 

Note : If ACC is selected as the Control Room Monitor source, then the 

studio loudspeaker or headphones will monitor the signal on the 

currently accessed path. 

To cut the signal to the studio loudspeaker or headphones 

SLS 

PHONE 

Press CUT or CUT as required. 

Page8:8 Issue 5.1


Monitoring 

8.4 Overdub Monitoring 

Comprehensive controls are provided to give maximum flexibility for monitoring 

during overdub or mixdown sessions. These include separate cue monitoring so 

the artist can listen to tape up to the overdub point. 

The overdub facility enables the engineer and the artist to independently listen 

to any combination of Track Send, Track Return or both. 

Cue sends are normally used for the foldback to the artist to monitor Auxes, 

Main Outputs or follow the control room monitor selection. Auxes feeding the 

artist are usually fed from the Monitor paths, pre fade. 

8.4.1 Monitor Path Signal Sources 

To select the source for a Monitor path 

SEND 

RET 


To select the source for all Monitor paths 

SEND 

RET 


All Monitor paths will be switched to the Track Send or Track Return, including 

any which may be in hidden Banks. 

MONITOR MODE 

O/D 

LOCK 

LOCK 

RESET 

O/D 

RESET 

MIXED 

CUE 

RTN 

CUES 

SEND 

RET 

OVERDUB 

SEND 

RET 

To set Super Mon mode 

SEND 

RET 

Press both the and keys on individual Monitor paths. 

or 

SEND 

RET 

Press both the and keys to set the mode globally. 

To isolate an individual Monitor path from global mode 

changes 

Press the 

LOCK 

key. 

Issue 5.1 

Page8:9

Monitoring 


To un-set any active 

LOCK 

keys 

Press the master 

LOCK 

RESET 

key. 

8.4.2 Overdubbing 

O/D 

The key on the channel strip allows individual Monitor paths to be selected for 

overdub. This facility allows the operator to monitor the recorded signals off tape 

together with the live signal from the studio during overdub operation. 

To select a Monitor path to be included in the overdub 

Press the 

O/D 

key for the required paths. 

To activate overdub mode 

Press the global 

OVERDUB 

key. 

The paths with the 

Send. 

O/D 

key on will be forced to take the signal from the Track 

All other Monitor paths will continue to use normal Track Send and Return 

switching. 

8.4.3 Foldback Mix 

O/D 

A foldback mix can only be active when the key for a Monitor path is switched 

on and the Monitor path is contributing to an Aux bus with pre-fader pick-off. 

Under these circumstances, the signal fed to the Aux bus from the Monitor path 

can be switched between the Track Send and Track Return. This does not affect 

the Monitor path which will still take the source from the Track Send. 

The Aux can then be used as a source for the control room, studio loudspeaker 

or headphones as required. 

To setup a foldback mix 

Press the 

ACCESS 

key for the required Monitor path. 

This will allow the Auxes to be selected on the AFU. 

Press the 

PRE 

key for the Aux required for the foldback mix. 

Set the required contribution level, make sure the 

contribution is on. 

CUT 

key is off and the 

Page8:10 Issue 5.1


Monitoring 

Select the Aux as the source for the Studio Loudspeaker or Headphones. 

Repeat the procedure for each of the required Monitor paths. 

To use the foldback mix 

Press the local 

O/D 

keys for the paths contributing to the foldback mix. 

The source for the Monitors will be forced to the Track Send. 

MIXED 

CUE 

The source of the Aux contribution on these paths is now controlled with the 

RTN 

CUES 

and keys. While both keys are off, the foldback mix will monitor the Track 

Send. 

To monitor the Track Returns on the foldback mix 

Press the 

RTN 

CUES 

key. 


To monitor the Track Return and Track Send together on the 

foldback mix 

Press the 

MIXED 

CUE 

key. 


When the tape machine goes into record the Mixed Cue mode will drop out to 

prevent phasing. 

8.4.4 Resetting the overdub system 

To reset all 

O/D 

keys on the Monitor paths 

Press the 

O/D 

RESET 

key. 

O/D 

All keys will be turned off, including Monitor paths which are not on the 

surface. 

To reset all 

LOCK 

RESET 

keys on the Monitor paths 

Press the 

LOCK 

key. 

LOCK 

All keys will be turned off, including Monitor paths which are not on the 

surface. 

Issue 5.1 Page 8:11

Monitoring 


8.5 Solo 

8.5.1 Solo Modes 

There are three modes of operation for Inputs, Track Return Monitor and Group 

paths. Each mode is set separately for these three path types. 

Main Outputs, Track Send Monitors, Auxes and Cues can only be soloed in 

APL. 

The solo modes are desk wide and cannot be independently set for split 

sections. 

Cut Solo 

This mode physically cuts the signal from all other channels. The soloed 

channel is post fader and includes any processing applied. 

A.P.L. 

After Pan Listen. This mode only cuts the signal to the monitor. The output of the 

console is uninterrupted. Any processing applied is monitored. 

P.F.L. 

Pre Fade Listen. This mode only cuts the signal to the monitor. Any processing 

applied is not monitored. 

Page8:12 Issue 5.1


Monitoring 

8.5.2 Solo Setup 

The Solo screen is used to set global solo options and specify which paths are to 

be solo immune. 

To access the Solo screen 

Click on the Solo icon in the System Menu. 

The Solo screen is displayed: 

Solo 

PFL Mode 

Normal 

Broadcast 

Foreign 

CUT SOLO pre aux cut 

Input 

Monitor 

Group 

Close 

Cut Level 

Out 

-100 

dB 

Misc 

Mute inhibit 

Overpress Enabled 

Solo combine 

Edit immune 

Solo states 

PFL Mode 

The PFL mode is either Normal or Broadcast (Foreign is not implemented). 

Broadcast Mode 

This allows the operator to listen to a path with the fader fully down and when the 

fader is moved up the solo disengages automatically. 

To select PFL Mode 

Click on the Normal or Broadcast button. 

The selected button will turn yellow. The other button will be blue. 

Issue 5.1 Page 8:13

Monitoring 


Cut Level 

The paths cut when a solo is engaged may either be cut completely or dimmed 

to a preset level. 

To cut all paths completely when a solo is engaged 

Click on the Out button. 

The button will turn yellow and the cut level button will turn blue. 

To set the dim level for other paths when a solo is engaged 

This only applies to Cut Solo modes. 

Click on the cut level button next to the level entry box. 

The button will turn yellow and the Out button will turn blue. 

Click on the box containing the current dim level. 

Roll the trackball to the left or right to change the value. 

The level may be set from -100dB to 0dB. 

Click a trackball button when the desired value is displayed. 

Miscellaneous 

Each of these options may be enabled (yellow button) or disabled (blue button) 

individually by clicking on the appropriate button. 

Mute inhibit 

Mute inhibit prevents the 

Overpress Enabled 

MUTE 

keys from operating on soloed paths. 

This enables paths to be PFL soloed when the fader is overpressed. 

Page8:14 Issue 5.1


Monitoring 

Solo combine 

This is only applicable when Input and Monitor paths are both in Cut Solo Mode. 

When Solo combine is enabled, engaging solo on an Input or Monitor path will 

cut all the remaining Input and Monitor paths. 

When Solo combine is disabled, engaging solo on an Input path will cut the other 

Input paths only and engaging solo on a Monitor path will cut the other Monitor 

paths only. 

Cut Solo Pre Aux Cut 

This allows the point at which the signal is cut to be selected between before or 

I/P MON 

GRP 

after the pre-fader auxiliary pick off point when the , or keys are used 

SOLO SOLO 

SOLO 

and a solo is engaged (see Cut Solo Mode above). This is selected separately 

for Input, Monitor or Group paths. 

Note: 

The aux must be taken pre-fader for this feature to operate. 

To cut the signal before the pre-fader auxiliary pick off point 

Click on the button for the required path type so that the button is yellow. 

Issue 5.1 Page 8:15

Monitoring 


8.5.3 Solo Immune 

Paths which are Solo Immune will not be cut when another path is soloed. This 

means that if a path is used for an effects return it does not have to be cut when a 

path is soloed and the signal plus the effect can be monitored. 

To select paths to be solo immune 

Click on the Edit immune button. 

The Solo Immune Paths screen will appear: 

• Solo immune paths • Close 

Available paths 

Inp 1 : I 1 

Inp 2 : I 2 

Inp 3 : I 3 

Inp 4 : I 4 

Inp 5 : I 5 

Inp 6 : I 6 

Inp 7 : I 7 

Inp 8 : I 8 

Inp 9 : I 9 

Inp 10 : I 10 

Inp 11 : I 11 

Inp 12 : I 12 

Inp 13 : I 13 

Inp 14 : I 14 

Inp 15 : I 15 

Inp 16 : I 16 

Input 

Montor 

Group 

Cancel 

Execute 

The path name alphanumeric displays on the console will flash. 

Click on the desired path names in the list or press their 

ACCESS 

keys. 

Press the 

scroll mode). 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

to scroll the list up and down (press again to drop out of 

Click on the Input, Montor or Group buttons to jump through the list (e.g. 

clicking on the Montor button jumps the list to the first Monitor path). 

Click on the Close to end. 

Page8:16 Issue 5.1


Monitoring 

8.5.4 Cut Solo Mode 

To select Cut Solo mode 

I/P MON 

GRP 

Press the , or keys. 

SOLO SOLO 

SOLO 

The LED above the selected key(s) 

will illuminate. 

I/P 

PFL 

SOLO 

MON 

PFL 

GRP 

PFL 

I/P 

SOLO 

MON 

SOLO 

GRP 

SOLO 

INTER 

LOCK 

MOM 

LATCH 

SOLO 

MEM 

RESET 

The 

SOLO 

key on corresponding path strips will work as Cut Solo. 

In this mode all paths of the same path type are cut and the 

illuminate. The mix output will be changed. 

MUTE 

keys will 

The point at which the signal is cut can be either before or after the pre-fader 

auxiliary pick off point. See Cut Solo Pre Aux Cut in the Solo Setup description 

on the preceding pages. 

Capricorn provides the facility to dim the other channels rather than Cut them. 

The dim level is also enabled and set in the Solo screen. 

8.5.5 After Pan Listen (APL) Mode 

To select APL mode 

I/P 

I/P MON 

MON 

GRP 

GRP 

Make sure the pairs of and , and , or and keys are off. 

SOLO 

PFL SOLO 

PFL 

SOLO 

PFL 

The corresponding 

Listen mode. 

SOLO 

key for the different path types will operate in After Pan 

The signal is monitored on the stereo APL/PFL bus. 

Issue 5.1 Page 8:17

Monitoring 


8.5.6 Pre-Fade Listen (PFL) Mode 

To select PFL mode 

I/P MON 

GRP 

Press the , or keys. 

PFL PFL 

PFL 

The LED above the selected key(s) 

will illuminate. 

I/P 

PFL 

SOLO 

MON 

PFL 

GRP 

PFL 

I/P 

SOLO 

MON 

SOLO 

GRP 

SOLO 

INTER 

LOCK 

MOM 

LATCH 

SOLO 

MEM 

RESET 

The 

SOLO 

key on corresponding path strips will work as PFL solo. 

The signal will be picked-off immediately before the fader but after any pre-fader 

processing. The signal is monitored on the stereo APL/PFL bus. 

PFL Overpress 

The Overpress switch on the fader can activate PFL completely separately from 

the SOLO key selection. This operates as a momentary non-interlocking switch, 

so that all the paths that are held down will be monitored. 

SOLO 

If the key is pressed while overpress is enabled the path will be PFL’d and not 

follow the assignment of the key. The Overpress switch will be inoperative for 

paths that can only be APL’ed. 

The Overpress function is enabled and disabled from the Solo screen. 

Page8:18 Issue 5.1


Monitoring 

8.5.7 APL/PFL Bus Monitoring 

The APL/PFL bus can either be monitored through a separate speaker or in 

combination with the main monitoring system. 

There is only a single APL/PFL bus so independent monitoring is not possible 

during split operation. 

To monitor the APL/PFL bus on a separate speaker 

Press the 

PFL 

SPK 

key on the Control Room Monitor panel. 


If the key is off then the APL/PFL signal is combined with the main monitor 

signal. When this is the case, the main monitor signal can be dimmed (or cut) to 

DIM 

a preset level with the key. 

To set the monitor dim level for when APL/PFL is active 

APL 

DIM 

Press and hold the and PFL keys simultaneously. 

Adjust the LEVEL control to the required setting. 

The level is shown in the alpha 

display. 

8888 

LEVEL 

APL 

DIM 

DIM 

LEVEL 

APL 

PFL 

TB 

GRP 1 

TB 

GRP 2 

TB 

GRP 3 

TB 

GRP 4 

TB 

GRP 5 

TB 

GRP 6 

To set the output level for the APL/PFL bus 

Pressing the 

APL 

PFL 

key. 

Rotate the LEVEL control to the required setting. 

The level is shown in the alpha display. 

Issue 5.1 Page 8:19

Monitoring 


8.5.8 Solo Reset 

RESET 

When any path is being soloed, in any mode, the key on the Monitor 

section will flash and the Bank Selector panel will show an S next to banks with 

soloed paths. 

To cancel all soloed paths on all banks 

Press the 

RESET 

key. 

8.5.9 Solo Switch Operation 

The system allows the channel strip 

Momentary Operation 

SOLO 

keys to work in a variety of ways. 

SOLO 

Paths are monitored while the key is held down and more than one path can 

SOLO 

be monitored simultaneously. If the key is being held during a bank change 

then the channel strip will not change bank and the path will continue to be 

SOLO 

monitored. If further keys are pressed while one is held down then they will 

SOLO 

latch on and remain on until all the last key is released. 

Latched Operation 

SOLO 

Paths will remain SOLOed after the key is released and are only reset if the 

key is pressed a second time or the global 

RESET 

key on the monitor section is 

pressed. 

Note: 

Solo is activated as the switch is pressed and deactivated as 

the switch is released. 

Interlock Operation 

SOLO 

SOLO 

When a key is pressed then all other keys will be disabled and the 

selected path will be latched on. 

The keys will latch on and remain on until the 

path is selected. 

RESET 

key is pressed or another 

Page8:20 Issue 5.1


Monitoring 

8.5.10 Solo Memory 

Solo memory will operate in all solo modes. 

To create a Solo Memory 

Select the paths to be included in the store by pressing the 

paths. 

If necessary, change banks to get to other paths. 

SOLO 

keys for those 

Press the 

SOLO 

MEM 

key. 

A store of all the currently soloed channels is made. 

When any member of the store is selected the whole store will be recalled. 

Paths can be added and subtracted from a store after it is recalled by pressing 

SOLO 

MEM 

the key after the change has been made. 

To cancel the Solo Memory 

Press the 

SOLO 

MEM 

key when no paths are soloed. 

Issue 5.1 Page 8:21

Monitoring 


8.6 Mute 

MUTE 

The key is used to cut the 

signal pre-fader. It will affect any mix 

that a cut path is part of. 

SOLO 

MUTE 

PLAY 

LINK 

ISO 

MUTE 

REC 

MUTE 

The key is double action to 

provide automation ‘touch’ at the first 

level of depression. 

MUTE 

To cut a path 

Press the 

MUTE 

key to the second level. 

The integral LED will illuminate. 

The key will toggle on and off each time it is pressed. 

or 

Tap the key rapidly. 

Tap toggle must be enabled for this to operate. See the Miscellaneous Setup 

chapter. 

Tip - Cancelling all mutes 

There is no direct method of un-muting all paths simultaneously. 

If it is necessary to do this then 

Set the Set Store Scope to include all paths for Mute controls only. 

Make sure all the Mutes are off. 

Make a New Store. 

The Store will un-mute all the paths without affecting any other controls when it 

is recalled. 

See the Stores chapter. 

Page8:22 Issue 5.1


Metering 

9 Metering 

The channel strip meters are Vacuum Fluorescent Displays (VFDs) which 

produce a fine dot matrix illumination. These meters are divided into two 

sections: 

The upper part of the display is used 

for high resolution metering of track 

send/return level or the signal 

currently assigned to the channel 

strip. A four character label shows its 

current assignment. This area can 

also be used to display graphical 

information relating to the channel 

strip such as EQ setting and routing. 

In the lower portion of the VFD a 

further 4 mini bargraph displays may 

be selected to meter the input level 

(mono or stereo), compressor/ 

limiter, expander/gate gain reduction 

status. These meters are always 

related to the strip. The Input meters 

show the modulation of the input 

port, in other words the top of the 

meter is the clipping point of the ADC 

or full coding on a digital line. The 

bottom segment will illuminate when 

the signal exceeds a programmable 

threshold, this will allow the operator 

to see when a signal is present. 

OVERLOAD 

INDICATOR LEDs 

SIGNAL OVERLOAD 

INDICATORS 

SIGNAL PATH 

METER 

METER LABEL 

INPUT OVERLOAD 

INDICATORS 

TR20 

Stereo Metering 

RECORD 

STATUS LEDs 

REFERENCE LEVEL 

INDICATORS 

METERS SHOWING 

LEFT AND RIGHT INPUT LEVEL 

AND COMP/LIM, EXP/GATE 

STATUS 

Issue 5.1 

Page9:1

Metering 


9.1 Meter Scale 

The main system metering has PPI characteristics, this has a true 

instantaneous rise time and a hold and fall time equivalent to PPM. The 

assignable meter on the Monitor section can be selected to show VU 

characteristics or phase and may be assigned as required through the Meter 

Control screen. Peak hold and riding peak indication may be selected. 

The scale of the meters is in dBFS (Full Scale) with 0dB at the top of the scale, or 

dBu with +24dB at the top of the scale. For recording to digital destinations, 

peaking to 0dBFS represents full modulation of all bits. 

The meter scale can be set to 10dB or 1dB intervals (see Other options). 

9.2 Overload 

Signal Path Meter 

The orange LEDs at the top of the meter section show when the main meter 

overloads (ie. exceeds 0dBfsd). They can be set to flash for approximately 5 

seconds or 2.5 seconds, or to light solid until they are reset by 

options). 

(see Other 

If the strip is set up for a stereo pair, then the orange LEDs will show overloads of 

the left and right channels separately (ie. one LED for each channel). 

There is also a symbol at the top of each meter bar which will light for the 

duration of the overload. 

Input Meter 

On the input meters a symbol is shown when the signal overloads. The symbol 

stays lit for approximately 3 seconds. This is detected at the ADC directly for 

analogue inputs. 

MTR 

RESET 

Page9:2 Issue 5.1


Metering 

9.3 Meter Operation 

The meter modes and operations are set up though the Meter Control screen. 

METER CONTROL 

• HI-RES MODE • 

Peak 

Peak Hold 

Riding Peak Hold 

Auto Reset Peak Hold 

• ASSIGNABLE METER MODE • 

VU 

Peak Hold 

Phase 

• Assignable Meter Source • 

Follow Access 

Follow Monitor 

Mon External Selector 

No Path 

• Scale Modes • 

Meter dBFS 

Meter dBu 

• Scale Offset • 

0 

• TRACK METERING • 

One Track per Strip 

Two Tracks per Strip 

• GRAPHICS OPTIONS • 

Blank 

Equaliser 

Routing (All) 

Routing (Track sends) 

Routing (Groups/outputs) 

Configuration 

Close 

• SIGNAL PRESENT THRESHOLD • 

-70 dB 

• BLACKTAPE THRESHOLD • 

-90 dB 

• REFERENCE POINT • 

0 dB 

More... 

The meter displays will change as changes are made within this screen. 

Hi-Res Mode 

The High resolution meters can operate in one of the following modes: 

Peak: The meter will follow the audio with an instantaneous rise time and fall 

time equated to the PPM law. 

Peak Hold: The maximum level is held and maintained until the 

pressed. 

MTR 

RESET 

key is 

Riding Peak Hold: The maximum level is held for about 1 second before falling 

back to the current value. 

Automatic Reset Peak Hold: The maximum level is held through-out a pass 

until the tape machine goes into PLAY, at which time the peak indicator falls to 

the current meter level. 

Assignable Meter Mode 

The assignable meter can work as a VU, Peak or Phase meter. The meter point 

is always at the input of Input and Monitor paths and at the output of Output, Aux 

and Cue paths. 

Issue 5.1 

Page9:3

Metering 


VU and Phase metering is only available when the source is set to Follow 

Monitor. 

Assignable Meter Source 

The assignable meter can be set to show the signal from one of four sources. 

Follow Access 

The meter will show the signal on the currently accessed path. 

Follow Monitor 

The main monitor output will be metered. The VU and Phase metering buttons 

become available. 

Mon External Selector 

The currently selected External source for the Monitor will be metered. 

User Definable 

The last source can be specified by the user. If a selection has not been made, 

then No Path will be displayed next to the button. The user can select a source 

by clicking on No Path (or the currently selected path name). 

Scale Modes 

The meters will display either a dBFS or dBu scale. 

Click on the Meter dBFS or Meter dBu button to select the scale. 

This selection does not affect the assignable meter. 

Scale Offset 

This is only applicable to dBu metering. 

A meter offset may be added to account for the preferred operating level, ie. a 

meter offset of -6dB will change a +6dBu reading to show 0dB. 

To change the Scale Offset 

Click on the current value. 


The range is -24dB to +24dB. 

Page9:4 Issue 5.1


Metering 



Note: 

Changing the meter scale has no effect at all on the 

input/output levels, it is only a display change. 

Track Metering 

This allows the selection of one or two tracks per strip for metering. See Channel 

Strip Meter Mode Selection below. 

Graphics Options 

The channel strip meters can be used to give alternative information about the 

channels. The selected graphic display is shown when the 

GRAPHIC 

key on the 

Meter Select section is pressed. 

Signal Present Threshold 

The bottom segment of the low resolution input meters indicates that a signal is 

present at the input. 

To change the Signal Present Threshold 



The range is -90dB to -40dB. 



Example: 

If the signal present threshold is set to -50dB then the segment 

will light when the signal exceeds -50dB below the clipping 

point of the input port. 

Issue 5.1 

Page9:5

Metering 


Blacktape Threshold 

The Blacktape Threshold allows the user to set a level below which the strip 

meters will not display. The default setting is -90dB, which is the bottom of the 

meter in the default display (dBFS mode). 

To change the Blacktape Threshold 



The range is -90dB to -40dB. 



Example: 

If the threshold was set to -40dB, the scale below -40dB would 

no longer be displayed and signals would not register on the 

meter display until they reached -40dB. 

Reference Point 

The setting for the reference point moves the reference level indicators to the 

value set. The reference level indicators are a triangle and a thick line for mono 

metering, and back-to-back triangles for stereo and two track metering. 

To change the Reference Point 



The range is -40dB to +24dB. 



Note: 

If the scale mode is switched between dBFS and dBu, the 

reference level indicators will move to the point on the scale 

which matches this setting. 

Page9:6 Issue 5.1


Metering 

Other Options 

The Other options dialogue box is displayed by clicking the More... button in the 

Meter Control screen. 

• Other options • 

Close 

Meter scale 

Old 

New 

Overload 

Current 

Short 

Hold 

To set the meter scale 

Click Old to set the meter scale to intervals of 10dB. 

Click New to set the meter scale to intervals of 1dB. 

The selected button will be yellow and the other button will be blue. 

To set the overload LED display 

Click Current to cause the overload LED to flash for approximately 5 

seconds. 

Click Short to cause the overload LED to flash for approximately 2.5 

seconds. 

Click Hold to cause the overload LED to illuminate solid until a different 

MTR 

overload option is selected or the meters are reset by RESET . 

The selected button will be yellow and the other two buttons will be blue. 

Issue 5.1 

Page9:7

Metering 


9.4 Channel strip Meter Mode Selection 

The meter modes are selected using the Meter Select panel. 

GRAPHIC 

The key selects a 

pre-assigned alternative display to 

the VFDs, e.g. graphical 

representation of equalization. 

FOL FADER 

The key causes the meters to 

follow the channel strip path 

assignment. The meter point is set in 


TRK SEND 

The key assigns the meters 

to the track send signal. The meters 

are assigned sequentially from left to 

right. A desk with 24 channel strips 

will show two tracks on each meter 

(like a stereo signal). 

METER 

SELECT 

MTR 

RESET 

GRAPHIC 

TRK/RET B 

TRK/RET A 

TRK SEND 

FOL FADER 

TRK/RET A 

TRK/RET B 

The and keys assign the meters to the track return signal. Two 

keys are provided so that a small control surface can meter a large number of 

tracks. 

If the user has selected only one track per display then for a 24 fader desk: 

TRK/RET A 

TRK/RET B 

assigns tracks 1 to 24 to the meters 


If the user has selected two tracks per display then for a 24 fader desk: 

TRK/RET A 

TRK/RET B 



If the user has selected only one track per display then for a 48 fader desk: 

TRK/RET A 

TRK/RET B 



If the user has selected two tracks per display then for a 48 fader desk: 

TRK/RET A 

TRK/RET B 



Page9:8 Issue 5.1


Metering 

9.5 Monitor Meters 

There are four Main Output Meters, the Assignable Meter and a pair of Aux/Cue 

meters. 

The Main Output Meters always show the levels on the stereo Main Outputs. 

MAIN OUTPUTS 1-8 

ASSIGNABLE 

φ 

VU AUX CUE 

PEAK 

O/L O/L O/L O/L 

The function of the Assignable Meter is set in the Meter Control screen 

described earlier in this chapter. 

See the Auxiliaries and Cues chapter for information on selecting the signal 

shown on the Aux/Cue Meters. 

Issue 5.1 

Page9:9

Metering 


Page9:10 Issue 5.1



10 Signal Processing 

10.1 Using Channel Strip Banks 

The 12 Banks are used to pre-define different sets of path to strip assignments 

which can be called to the console surface as required. Each bank can have a 

completely different set of paths assigned to all the channel strips. For instance, 

Inputs 1 to 48 on Bank 1 and Monitors 1 to 48 on Bank 2. 

All defined banks are active at all times. The concept is like a stack of console 

surfaces which are all operational, but each one must be brought to the top in 

order to allow direct changes to the controls. 

The Banks are selected by dedicated 

keys on the AFU. Each bank can be 

labelled with an eight character 

name provided by the operator. 

During routing and certain other 

processes the Bank display indicates 

when paths on hidden banks have 

been selected. 

1 

BANK 

1 

BANK 

7 

7 

2 

BANK 

2 

BANK 

8 

8 

3 

BANK 

3 

BANK 

9 

9 

4 

BANK 

4 

BANK 

10 

10 

5 

BANK 

5 

BANK 

11 

11 

6 

BANK 

6 

BANK 

12 

12 

SEC 

BANK 

Selecting a new Bank changes the strip assignments but the AFU will remain 

assigned to the most recently accessed path until a different path is accessed. 

ACCESS 

If a fader or control is being touched or the key is held down on a given 

strip when a new bank is selected then the strip will not change bank. 

Issue 5.1 Page 10 : 1



10.1.1 Primary and Secondary Access 

ACCESS 

Each key has an associated alpha display which shows the path 

assigned to each key. Normally the primary (upper) alpha will be illuminated 

brightly and the secondary (lower) alpha will be dim indicating that the primary 

signal path is assigned to the strip. (See page 6:7 in Miscellaneous Setup for 

details of setting alpha display brightness.) 

ACCESS 

When the lower key is pressed then the strip is reassigned to the 

secondary signal path and this is indicated by the lower alpha illuminating 

brightly and the upper alpha dimming. The AFU will also be assigned to the 

selected path. 

Any Bank can be assigned to the secondary 

To assign a bank to the secondary 

Press the 

SEC 

BANK 

key. 

The led above the key will illuminate. 

Press the required Bank selector key. 

The led above the 

SEC 

BANK 

key will go out. 

ACCESS 

ACCESS 

keys. 

keys 

The secondary alpha displays will be illuminated brightly. 

The strips will remain assigned to the paths on the secondary bank until either 

ACCESS 

primary keys are pressed to select individual primary paths or until a new 

ACCESS 

bank is selected for the primary keys. 

Page 10 : 2 Issue 5.1



10.2 Function Indicators 

The Function Indicators at the top of 

each strip show which signal 

processing elements have been 

assigned to the path by Path 

Configuration and which of those 

elements are switched on. The IN 

column shows processing which is 

switched on. 

E/G 

COM 

LIM 

FIL 

EQ 

INS 

DEL 

Φ 

IN 

SEL IN 

STR 48V 

SEL 

In addition, there are three LEDs which indicate phase inversion, stereo 

operation and phantom power, and nulling indicators which show the direction 

to turn the FAC being touch to reach its null position (see Automation 

Operations). 

To switch an element in and out of the signal path 

Press the 

ACCESS 


The AFU will be assigned to the path. 

Press the appropriate IN key on the AFU (e.g. the 

OR 

EQ 

IN 

key for EQ). 

Press the 

SEL 

key below the function indicators. 

With each press, the red arrow LEDs in the SEL column will illuminate in turn to 

IN 

indicate the function which will be affected by the key. 

Press the 

IN 

key. 

In both cases 

The appropriate LED in the IN column will illuminate. 

Note: 

Only processing that is assigned to a signal path with Path 

Configuration can be switched in. 




10.3 Input Paths 

Input paths are used for inputs from microphones and line sources. Input paths 

must be fed from ports on the Mic/Line Input racks (analogue sources) or the 

Digital I/O racks (digital sources). Any Input port can be used to drive an Input 

path (port assignment is described in Input/Output Configuration). Input paths 

can be routed to Tracks, Groups or Outputs. Any pair of Input paths can be 

associated as a stereo path. 

10.3.1 Input Source Selection 

As described above, an Input path can be fed from either analogue or digital 

Input ports. Each analogue port can be fed from one of the following sources: 

Microphone 

Microphone 

Line Input 

Line Input 

A 

B 

A 

B 

On stereo analogue ports the keys will select between 2 stereo line sources and 

2 stereo microphone sources. The selection is made with keys on the AFU. 

If a digital port is selected then Mic A and Mic B are ignored. If the path is stereo 

then Line B will not be available, i.e. there is no source selection. 

To select an input source 

LINE 


A 

LINE MIC 

B A 

MIC 

B 

To swap the left and right legs on a stereo digital input 

Press the 

SWAP 

key. 

To use the top FAC for Input Source selection 

Press the 

I/P 

SEL 

key on the FAC Selector panel. 

The alpha display above the FAC will show the current source. 

Rotate the FAC to the required source. 




10.3.2 Mic/Line Gain and Trim 

Mic or line gain is controlled through 

the rotary control on the AFU. The 

same control is used for both mic 

and line gain but the range of values 

is independent for each source 

selected. 

LINE 

A 

LINE 

B 

SWAP 

MIC 

A 

MIC 

B 

The Gain control has 2dB steps. For 

fine control the Trim rotary control is 

used with 1/2 dB steps. 

GAIN 

The AFU vacuum Fluorescent 

display will show the amount of total 

input gain. 

TRIM 

I/P BAL 

To use the FACs for Mic/Line Gain and Trim 

Press the 

GAIN 

key on the FAC Selector panel. 

The top FAC will now control Mic/Line Gain and the alpha numeric display will 

show the level in dB. 

Press the 

TRIM 

key. 

The top FAC will now control further fine adjustment of the input gain. 

The alphanumeric display shows the total amount of coarse Gain plus or minus 

Trim control. 

10.3.3 Input Balance (Offset Gain) 

I/P 

BAL 

The function only applies to Mic/Line Inputs to stereo paths and is inoperative 

on mono paths. It provides balance control at the input (pre-fader). 

The display will show a value between 2L - 0 -2R. 




10.3.4 MS Sources 

MS 

The key is used to convert an MS source to a normal stereo signal so that the 

console can apply processing correctly. 

To select an MS source 

Setup the MS stereo input on a stereo path. 

Press the appropriate 

ACCESS 

key to call the stereo path into the AFU. 

Press the 

MS 

key on the Routing panel. 

All stereo functions will now operate as expected. 

MS 

Note: The key can only be used on stereo paths. 

10.3.5 Dual Mono Sources 

The 

DUAL 

MONO 

key is used to define a Dual Mono source from a stereo input. 

To select a Dual Mono source 

Setup the Dual Mono source (on a stereo input) on a stereo path. 

Press the appropriate 

ACCESS 

key to call the stereo path into the AFU. 

Press the 

DUAL 

MONO 


DUAL 

Note: The MONO key can only be used on stereo paths. 

A Dual Mono source is not a true stereo source. Panning the pair will not move 

the sound from left to right, but will proportionally adjust the level on each side. 

A Dual Mono signal is not suitable for routing to a film stem and should only be 

routed to stereo track sends. 

The Mults option in Port Selection screens allows a stereo input to also be used 

as a pair of mono inputs. This would allow the two separate signals in a Dual 

Mono input to be split onto two separate mono paths. 




10.3.6 Phantom Power 

Any Input path fed from the mic source can have phantom power. 

Phantom power can be switched on at any time whether or not a microphone 

source is selected. Phantom power is applied to both A and B microphones. 

This function is not dynamically automated but can be stored as part of the 

system set up. 

To apply phantom power to mic inputs 

48V 

Press the key below the 

duplicate Function Indicators on 

the AFU. 

E/G 

COM 

LIM 

FIL 

EQ 

INS 

DEL 

Ø 

SEL IN 

STR 48V 

Ø 

48V 

The 48V LED at the top of the strip for the currently accessed Input path will 

illuminate. 

10.3.7 Phase Reverse 

Any Input signal can be phase reversed. Individual input sources (i.e. Mic A, Mic 

B) have independent phase control. 

This function is not dynamically automated but can be stored as part of the 

system setup. 

To apply phase reversal to an Input 

Press the 

key below the duplicate Function Indicators on the AFU. 

The phase reversal LED at the top of the strip for the currently accessed Input 

path will illuminate. 




10.4 Monitor Signal Paths 

Monitor (or Track Return) paths have different functions from Input paths. These 

signals are the returns from the Multitrack tape machines. 

Monitor paths always have an associated Track Send signal, the system knows 

how many sends are required when the Tape machines are allocated as part of 

the system set-up (see section 3.4). During this set up procedure the Track 

Sends can either be mapped in series (i.e. 1-24 and 25-48) or in parallel (i.e. 

1-24 and 1-24). 

The source of the Monitor path can be switched between the Track Send signal 

SEND 

RET 

and the Track Return signal. There are global and switches on the 

Monitor Section to select the source and local switches on the channel strips. 

SEND 

RET 

The and keys select the 

source for the monitor path. When 

both keys are pressed together, this 

sets the Super Mon mode. Super 

Mon mode is when the track send 

and track return are monitored 

together. If the Track is dropped into 

record then the track return is cut to 

the monitor (this prevents an offset 

between the signals being heard, as 

caused by delay introduced by the 

length of the signal path to, from and 

within a tape machine). 

O/D 

SEND 

LOCK 

RET 

Note: 

If the tape machine is not in Play, the Track RETURN signal will 

be the same as the SEND signal. 

SEND 

The monitor path source can be selected globally using the global and 

RET 

switches on the monitor section. When the global send and return 

buttons are pressed, all monitor paths will be reset to the global state, unless the 

LOCK 

LOCK 

key is selected on the channel strip. When the key is selected, the source 

SEND 

RET 

for the channel strip will remain as selected on the local and buttons. The 

LOCK 

RESET 

button on the monitor section will clear any Locked channels. 




10.5 Track Sends 

10.5.1 Track Contribution 

The TRACK CONT control is located on the AFU. Alternatively the function can 

TRK 

CONT 

be assigned to the top row of channel strip FACs by pressing the button on 

the upper FAC function select panel. 

The Track Contribution control may be used as an independent gain control to 

control the individual level of signals routed to multitrack mix busses. This 

control will effect the signal either pre or post fader depending on whether the 

multitrack pick off point is assigned pre or post fader using the Path 


Alternatively the Track Contribution control may be used as an individual Aux 

contribution control if the operator wishes to use the systems multitrack buses 

as additional AUX buses. 

Tracks Setup 

Allows the operator to decide which track sends are mono, stereo (in any 

combination) or used for surround sound. 

Note: 

It is important that if paths are routed to any stereo destination, 

panning will not work unless the destination is made stereo. 

To define Multitrack send busses 

Click on the Tracks Setup icon. 

The Track Setup screen is displayed. 

Track Setup 

Close 

ALL 

MONO 

MONO 

STEREO 

LCR 

LCRS 

SPLT 

IMAX 

8-WAY 

M 

1 

L 

9 

M 

17 

M 

25 

M 

33 

M 

41 

M 

2 

C 

10 

M 

18 

M 

26 

M 

34 

M 

42 

M 

3 

R 

11 

M 

19 

M 

27 

M 

35 

M 

43 

M 

4 

M 

12 

M 

20 

M 

28 

M 

36 

M 

44 

M 

5 

M 

13 

M 

21 

M 

29 

M 

37 

M 

45 

M 

6 

M 

14 

M 

22 

M 

30 

M 

38 

M 

46 

M 

7 

M 

15 

M 

23 

M 

31 

M 

39 

M 

47 

M 

8 

M 

16 

M 

24 

M 

32 

M 

40 

M 

48 

• TS/TR Stereo Matching • 

Machine A: TR: 1-48 

TS TRIMS 




10.5.2 Stereo Tracks 

Capricorn is not limited to stereo track sends being adjacent pairs, nor do they 

have to be odd and even. Any of the multitrack busses may be selected. 

When a path is routed to a stereo Track Send destination, pressing the routing 

button of either leg of a stereo pair will automatically select the other, and 

panning will operate across the selected pair. 

To define stereo track sends 

Click on the STEREO button. 

Click on the Track Send that you wish to be the left leg of the stereo pair. 

Click on the Track Send you wish to be the right leg. 

The track number boxes will indicate the stereo pairing. 

Any number of stereo Track Sends may be configured in this way. 

To de-select a stereo pair 

Click on the MONO button. 

Click on the stereo pair that you wish to make mono. 

To de-select all stereo pairings simultaneously 

Click on the ALL MONO button. 

A dialogue box will appear asking for confirmation. 


Note: 

This will set all track sends to mono, including those set for film 

types (surround sound). 

TS/TR Stereo Matching 

If a number of Track Sends have been configured as stereo pairs, the reciprocal 

Track Returns can be collectively configured as stereo paths from the Stereo 

Tracks menu. 

To select TS/TR Stereo Matching 

Click on the “TS/TR Stereo Matching” button for the respective tape 

machine. 




A screen will be displayed to confirm that Track Returns will assume the stereo 

pairing of the Track Sends. 

Click on EXECUTE. 

ALL MONO will also automatically de-select the stereo pairings of Track 

Returns. 

Note: 

Track Sends can be paired with more than one Track Return if 

two or three machines are connected in parallel. When a Track 

Return becomes stereo with this operation the fader and 

controls for the right leg will be disabled on the channel strips 

and the left leg will control the stereo pair. 

10.5.3 Film Tracks 

Capricorn provides the facility for any of the 48 multitrack mix busses to be 

configured for LCR, LCRS, Split Surround, IMAX and 8-Way operation. 

Note: 

IMAX and 8-Way are only available if the relevant software 

upgrade has been purchased. 

See the Surround Sound chapter for details. 




10.5.4 Track Send Level Control 

To alter the track send output levels 

Click on the TS TRIM button in the Track Setup screen. 

The Track Send Trim Adjustment screen is displayed: 

• Track Send Trim Adjustment • 

Close 

TS1 

TS2 

TS3 

TS4 

TS5 

TS6 

TS7 

TS8 

0.0 

TS9 

0.0 

TS10 

0.0 

TS11 

0.0 

TS12 

0.0 

TS13 

0.0 

TS14 

0.0 

TS15 

0.0 

TS16 

0.0 

TS17 

0.0 

TS18 

0.0 

TS19 

0.0 

TS20 

0.0 

TS21 

0.0 

TS22 

0.0 

TS23 

0.0 

TS24 

0.0 

TS25 

0.0 

TS26 

0.0 

TS27 

0.0 

TS28 

0.0 

TS29 

0.0 

TS30 

0.0 

TS31 

0.0 

TS32 

0.0 

TS33 

0.0 

TS34 

0.0 

TS35 

0.0 

TS36 

0.0 

TS37 

0.0 

TS38 

0.0 

TS39 

0.0 

TS40 

0.0 

TS41 

0.0 

TS42 

0.0 

TS43 

0.0 

TS44 

0.0 

TS45 

0.0 

TS46 

0.0 

TS47 

0.0 

TS48 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

RESET ALL 

Click on the box showing the current output gain. 


Click when the required trim value is shown. 

Click on Close once the gains have been set on all tracks. 




10.6 4-Band Parametric Equalizer 

The 4-band parametric equalizer has individual controls for frequency, gain and 

Q for each section. The FREQ controls allow the centre frequencies of the 

bands to be moved across the audio spectrum, each widely overlapping and in 

57 actual steps. The +/– control varies the gain/attenuation between +/-20dB in 

logarithmic steps and Q varies the shape. 

EQ’s are assigned to signal paths using the Path Configuration screen. 

The Function Indicators at the top of each strip show the processing configured 

and switched in to each path. A left hand LED illuminates when the associated 

processing element is configured into the path. The right hand LEDs show when 

processing is switched in or out. 

EQ 

IN 

The EQ is switched into circuit by pressing the key. Each band may then be 

IN 

switched in or out by pressing its key. Alternatively the EQ In/Out can be 

IN 

SEL 

controlled on the channel strip using the and keys. 

The outer bands may be configured as shelving filters by pressing the 

appropriate or key. 

All the controls on the EQ section are 

automated, the switches are 

therefore all ‘double action’. The first 

press being equivalent to touch, the 

full press is required to activate the 

function. As with all switch functions 

on the desk, the green LED 

illuminates when the function is on. 

The red LED is used to indicate 

WRITE. 

EQUALISER 

FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ 

-/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ 

When any control is touched, the 

V.F.D. display situated in the AFU 

section will show the settings of the 

whole EQ section. 

EQ 

IN 

IN 

IN 

IN 

IN 




10.6.1 Controlling EQ on the Strip FACs 

To control EQ’s on the channel strip, 

EQ 

Press the button on the FAC 

selection panel. The channel strip 

rotary control will be assigned as: 

THE DISPLAY SHOWS 

THE VALUE OF THE LAST 

CONTROL TO BE TOUCHED 

BAND SELECTION 

8888 

FREQUENCY 

BAND IN/OUT 

PEAK/SHELVE 

(ON WHEN SELECTED) 

GAIN +/- 

Q CONTROL 

In this mode the channel controls cannot be used for Aux control. However, the 

BAL 

WIDTH 

lower rotary knob can control Pan/Balance or width by pressing the or 

key. 




10.7 Filters 

There are separate High and Low Pass Filters each with dedicated Frequency 

Controls located on the AFU, above the EQ Section. 

Filters are assigned to the signal 

path using the Path Configuration 

screen. See the Path Configuration 

chapter. 

HIGH PASS 

FILTER 

LOW PASS 

IN 

FLTR 

IN 

IN 

FLTR 

IN 

The filter section may be switched into circuit using the key. The associated 

High and Low pass filters may then be selected individually using the 

IN 

appropriate key. The slope of the filter can be changed using the and 

keys. When pressed, the filters are set to 4th order (24dB/oct, when the filters 

are off they are set to 2nd order (12dB/oct). 

Each Filter can be configured as a notch filter by pressing the key. The 

and keys change the notch width of the associated filter to wide or narrow. 

All these keys may be dynamically automated and so use double action 

switches. 

The red LED indicates when the control is in record. 

The green LED indicates when the function is turned on. 

When any control is touched, the vacuum fluorescent display will show the 

settings of the whole filter section. 

Alternatively, Filter IN/OUT can be 

controlled on the channel strip using 

the 

IN 

and 

SEL 

keys and the Function 

Indicators at the top of channel strip. 

When the 

SEL 

key is pressed the red 

arrow will step through all of the 

processing elements. When the FIL 

arrow is illuminated Press the 

IN 

key 

to turn the Filter On or Off. 

E/G 

COM 

LIM 

FIL 

EQ 

INS 

DEL 

Φ 

IN 

SEL IN 

STR 48V 

SEL 

The Function Indicators at the top of each strip show the processing configured 

and switched in to each path. A left hand LED illuminates when the associated 

processing element is configured into the path. The right hand LEDs show when 

processing is switched in or out. 




10.8 Dynamics 

The Compressor, Limiter and 

Expander/Gate are treated as 

completely separate processing 

elements. They can be configured in 

any order in the signal path using the 

Path Configuration screen. 

AUTO 

REL 

GMU 

LEVEL 

AUTO 

GMU 

EXP 

EXP HOLD 

GATE RATIO 

LEVEL 

HOLD/RATIO 

8888 

INV 

RELEASE TIME RELEASE TIME RELEASE TIME 

KEY 

SCL 

DELAY 

OFF 

ATTACK TIME ATTACK TIME ATTACK TIME 

FREQ 

RATIO 

RANGE 

-/+ 

THRESHOLD 

THRESHOLD 

THRESHOLD 

SCF SCF SCF 

SCF SCF SCF 

SCF 

IN 

LIM 

IN 

COMP 

IN 

E/G 

IN 

SCF 

LIMITER 

COMPRESSOR 

EXP/GATE 

10.8.1 Side-Chain Filter 

The Limiter, Compressor and Expander/Gate each have a completely separate 

side chain filter. The filter controls are located next to the Dynamics controls and 

SCF 

are assigned to one of the elements by pressing the key. 

The filter has Frequency, Boost/Cut and Q controls together which switches for 

Peak/Shelve and IN/OUT, it operates in the same way as a band of the EQ. 




Side-chain control 

The system allows the sidechains of the Limiter, Compressor and Expander to 

be individually controlled. 

Several side-chain signals can be ganged together so that they are all 

compressed/limited or expanded by a similar amount. 

The side-chains can also be driven from a completely different source, this is 

known as an External Key source and is some times used on expander/gates to 

give signal ducking. Within Capricorn the facility is provided on Compressors 

and Expander/Gates. The source of the side-chain is displayed in the 

alphanumeric display above the Side-chain filter, it will show the source of which 

ever element is currently assigned to the Side-chain Filter. 

Side-chain Listen 

SCL 

The Side-Chain Listen key is latching and works in the same way as APL 

SOLO, replacing the main monitor output with the side chain signal. 

10.8.2 Limiter 

The Limiter is assigned to signal paths using the GDS and the Path 

Configuration Menu. (see section 3.4) 

LIM 

IN 

It is then switched in and out of circuit by pressing the limiter’s key. Rotary 

SCF 

controls are provided for threshold, attack time and release time. Pressing 

assigns the sidechain filter controls to the limiter. When the SCF is in circuit the 

LED illuminates. 

Alternatively, the limiter can be 

switched in circuit using the 

and 

SEL 

keys with the Function Indicators 

at the top of channel strip. 

IN 

E/G 

COM 

LIM 

FIL 

EQ 

INS 

DEL 

Φ 

IN 

SEL IN 

STR 48V 

SEL 

When the key is pressed the red arrow will step through all of the processing 

elements. When the LIM arrow is illuminated Press the 

IN 

key to turn the LIM 

ON or OFF. 

On the Function Indicators the right hand green Indicator will show whether 

IN 

processing is in or out and therefore will follow the state of the key. The left 

hand indicator illuminates when processing is configured into the path via the 

GDS. 




Side chain ganging 

Several signals can be ganged together so that they are all compressed by a 

similar amount and the overall balance is not altered when the channel with the 

greatest signal reaches the limiter threshold. 

To make a sidechain gang for Limiters 



Click on the Modify button. 

Click on the Limiter element in the Signal Path. 

• Limiter Config Options • 

• Control Voltage Gang: • 

NONE 

Select Path(s) 

Close 

Click on the Select Path(s) box, the following overlay will be displayed, the 

list shows all the signals that currently have a Limiter configured. 

• Select CV Partners: • 

Cancel 

Execute 

Using the trackball, highlight the paths you wish to gang together. Click on 

the required paths. 

Having made your selection, click on Execute. Click on Cancel to quit without 

making any changes. 

Click on Close to leave the window and end the operation. 

SideChain Delay 




The system provides a small delay in the signal path which allows the side chain 

gain cell to control the audio instantaneously. This delay is normally in circuit but 

DELAY 

OFF 

can be switched out by pressing the key. 

10.8.3 Compressor 

The operation of the compressor is similar to that of the limiter described above. 

Rotary controls set threshold, ratio, attack time, release time and level. Auto 

release and auto gain make-up are also available. A dedicated meter shows the 

action of the compressor. 

The compressor is assigned to signal paths in the Path Configuration screen. 

COMP 

IN 

It is then switched in and out of circuit by pressing the key. This is an 

automated function and therefore has a double action switch. The green LED 

associated with the switch will illuminate when the Compressor is switched in 

circuit. The red LED will indicate when in record. 

IN 

SEL 

The compressor can be switched in circuit using the and keys and the 

SEL 

Function Indicators at the top of channel strip. When the key is pressed the 

red arrow will step through all of the processing elements. When the COM arrow 

IN 

is illuminated Press the key to turn the COM ON or OFF. 

On the Function Indicators the right 

hand green Indicator will show 

whether processing is in or out and 

therefore will follow the state of the 

IN 

key. The left hand indicator 

illuminates when processing is 

configured into the path. 

Auto Release Time 

E/G 

COM 

LIM 

FIL 

EQ 

INS 

DEL 

Φ 

IN 

SEL IN 

STR 48V 

SEL 

When the 

AUTO 

REL 

button is pressed the release time is automatically calculated. 

Auto Gain Make-up 

AUTO 

GMU 

When is pressed the upper rotary control is used to control the operating 

level. The OPER LEVEL LED will illuminate. In this mode the rotary control is 

used to set the output level of the compressor. When the button is off the upper 

rotary knob controls the gain makeup. 

SideChain filter 

SCF 

Pressing assigns the sidechain filter to the limiter, when the SCF is in circuit 

the SCF LED will illuminate. 




Sidechain ganging 

Several signals can be ganged together so that they are all compressed by a 

similar amount and the overall balance is not altered when the channel with the 

greatest signal reaches the compressor threshold. 

To make a sidechain gang for Compressors 




Click on the Compressor element in the Signal Path. 

• Compressor Config Options • 


NONE 


Close 

• Side Chain Key Source: • 

Internal 

Select Signal 

Click on the Select Path(s) box, the following overlay will be displayed, the 

list shows all the signals that currently have a compressor configured. 

• Select CV Partners: • 

Cancel 

Execute 

Using the trackball, highlight the paths you wish to gang together. 

Click on the selected paths. 

Having made your selection, click on Execute. Click on Cancel to quit without 

making any changes. 




Click on Close to leave the window and end the operation. 

External Key source 

Using Modify from the Path Configuration screen it is possible to select the 

source signal for the side-chain. Normally Internal will be selected, but if the 

Select signal box is selected then the user can choose any signal path in the 

desk to drive the sidechain control. 

•SelectKeyPath:• 

Inp 1 : I 1 

Inp 2 : I 2 

Inp 3 : I 3 

Input 

Monitor 

Group 

Output 

Aux 

Cue 

Tksend 

Ext 

Cancel 

Execute 

Side Chain Delay 

The system provides a small delay in the signal path which allows the side chain 

gain cell to control the audio instantaneously. This delay is normally in circuit but 

DELAY 

OFF 

can be switched out by pressing the button. 




10.8.4 Expander Gate 

The Expander/Gate is assigned to signal paths with the Path Configuration 

screen. The processing can operate either as an Expander or as a Noise Gate. 

EXP 

The selection is made with the key. When the controls are switched to EXP 

the upper rotary control operates as HOLD, when operating as a GATE the 

control operates as RATIO. 

EG 

IN 

The Expander/Gate is then switched in and out of circuit by pressing the key. 

Rotary controls are provided for threshold, attack time and release time and 

SCF 

Range. Pressing assigns the sidechain filter controls to the Expander/Gate. 

When the SCF is in circuit the LED illuminates. 

Alternatively, the Expander/Gate can be switched in circuit using the 

keys with the Function Indicators at the top of channel strip. 

IN 

and 

SEL 

When the 

SEL 

key is pressed the red arrow will step through all of the processing 

elements. When the E/G arrow is illuminated press the 

IN 

key to turn the E/G On 

or OFF. 

On the Function Indicators the right 

hand green indicator will show 

whether processing is in or out and 

therefore will follow the state of the 

IN 

key. The left hand indicator 

illuminates when processing is 

configured into the path. 

E/G 

COM 

LIM 

FIL 

EQ 

INS 

DEL 

Φ 

IN 

SEL IN 

STR 48V 

SEL 




Side-chain source selection 

To select the source (or key) signal to drive the side chain of the expander use 



Click on the EXP/GATE element in the signal path. 

The Exp/Gate Config Options screen is displayed: 

• Exp/Gate Config Options • 


NONE 


Close 

• Side Chain Key Source: • 

Internal 

Select Signal 

• Expander/Gate Mode: • 

Normal 

Invert 

Click on the Select Signal box in the Sidechain Key Source. The Select Key 

Path screen is displayed from which the key signal is selected. 

•SelectKeyPath:• 

Inp 1 : I 1 

Inp 2 : I 2 

Inp 3 : I 3 

Input 

Monitor 

Group 

Output 

Aux 

Cue 

Tksend 

Ext 

Cancel 

Execute 

Using the trackball select the sidechain key signal from the list. Select the 

path type by clicking on the relevant button. Click on the desired path then 

click on Execute. 

The signal feeding the sidechain can be inverted by clicking on INVERT in 

the Exp/Gate Config Options screen. 

The name of the External key signal for the Expander/Gate is displayed in the 

alphanumeric display above the sidechain filter. 




The INV LED illuminates when the 

KEY 

key source is inverted. The switch 

switches the sidechain source 

between the External Key and the 

internal signal. 

KEY 

8888 

INV 

When the SCF is in circuit the SCF 

LED will illuminate. 

External Key 

The sidechain for the Expander/Gate 

can be driven from another source. 

The alpha-numeric display will label 

the input path driving the sidechain. 

This signal may be inverted (for 

ducking) by selection on the GDS. 

When selected the INV LED will 

illuminate. 

SCL 

FREQ 

+/- 

DELAY 

OFF 

SCF 

SCF 

IN 




10.9 Signal Path Delay (Optional) 

The facility to introduce signal Delay is an option and is dependent on additional 

hardware being fitted to the system. 

The delay function consists of a separate 19" rack unit that can be fitted with the 

option of two card types: 

4 Mb = 5 secs total 

16 Mb = 22 secs total 

Each card includes the provision to interface to 4 MADI I/O connections. 

When Delay is configured into a path, the maximum amount which can be used 

by that path is set to any of the following : 

5ms 10ms 50ms 100ms 500ms 1s 10s 20s 

To set Delay on a Signal Path 

Click on the Path Config icon. 

Click on the DELAY element. 

A dialogue box will be displayed for selecting the maximum amount of delay. 

Click the required maximum amount. 


The delay element will be placed against the input or output port where the 

signal will be delayed (this depends on the path type). 

Press the button marked 

DELAY 

IN 

on the AFU. 

Turn the Delay control to the desired Delay period. 

Note: 

The Delay function is only available to the inputs and outputs of 

the system. Delay cannot be configured within internal paths. 

Delay cannot be moved to a different position within a path. 

The time period cannot be changed in real time (e.g. during a live production). 

Delay cannot be controlled by dynamic automation, but the settings are stored 

as part of the initial snapshot (I.S.S.). 




10.10 Insert Switching 

Inserts are assigned to signal paths and ports are assigned to Inserts through 

the Path Configuration screen. See the Path Configuration and Input/Output 

Configuration chapters. 

To switch an Insert into circuit 

Press the 

INS 

IN 

key. 

The external device is in circuit while the green LED is on. 

or 

SEL 

Press the key at the top of the channel strip until the red arrow points at 

the INS element. 

Press the 

IN 

key. 

10.10.1 Level Control for Inserts 

The analogue gain can be varied in 6dB steps for each of the 32 Inserts 

independently. The gain will be reciprocal across the Insert send and return. 

To set the gain on an Insert 

INS 

IN 

When the key on the AFU is 

pressed to activate an Insert, the 

Inserts menu is displayed on the 

central AFU display. 

PATH Inserts 

Send gain 0 dB 

Send return 0 dB 

< > Exit 

Three of the keys will be assigned to 

[] and [Exit] functions. 

Press the [] to increase Send gain and decrease Return gain. 

CON 

FIG 

I/P 

EXP 

GATE 





10.11 Copying 

Copy allows selected processing parameters to be copied exactly from one path 

to any number of other paths. This includes Fader levels, EQ settings, Dynamics 

values, Pan/Balance positions, etc. Any number of controls can be copied from 

the selected path in a single operation. 

Note : 

Complete functions (EQ, Compressor, etc.) can be copied but 

not individual controls within a function selected. 

To copy settings of signal processing elements 

Press the 

COPY 

key on the Monitor section. 

ACCESS 

All of the keys will be turned off. The AFU will be disabled except for the 

the Bank selection and the FAC Selection panels. 

All Touch LEDs on the AFU will illuminate. All control settings from the source 

path are selected for copying unless a specific control on the AFU is selected. 

To select a smaller set of elements to copy 

Touch the AFU controls for the required signal processing elements. 

When the first control is touched, all the touch LEDs on the AFU will extinguish 

except for the touched control. Processes are then added to the selection. 

To copy the Fader level 

Touch the AFU Fader. 

The nulling LEDs for the fader will illuminate. 

To select the source path for the copy operation 

Press the 

ACCESS 

key. 

The 

ACCESS 


To select the destination path(s) 

Press the 

ACCESS 

keys for the required paths. 

ACCESS 

ACCESS 

The pressed keys will illuminate. Each time an key is pressed it 

will be toggled in and out of the destination group. 

Use Bank switching to select destination paths which are hidden. 




To execute the copy 

Press the 

COPY 

key again. 

The selected settings will be copied and the console will return to normal 

operation. The selection for the next copy operation will be returned to the 

default of all controls. 

Or 

Press the flashing source 

ACCESS 

key. 

The selected settings will be copied and the copy operation will continue for 

selection of additional destination paths. 

The control selection on the AFU will remain until the 

terminate the copy mode. 

COPY 

key is used to 




10.12 Fader to Aux Copy 

This function allows the level on a Fader to be copied to the aux contribution 

levels for the path the Fader is on. This can be done on several paths at the 

same time. 

Alternatively, the level of one aux contribution can be copied to the any of the 

other aux contribution level controls for the same path. 

To copy Fader levels to Aux Contribution levels 

Press the 

FADER ⇔ 

AUX COPY 

key in the Monitor section. 

All the Access LEDs will be turned off and the AFU is disabled. 

The strip alpha displays will flash. 

Touch the AFU Fader. 

The nulling LEDs for the AFU fader will flash and the system will be put into Copy 

Faders mode. 

Press the 

ACCESS 

keys for the paths to transfer the fader level from. 

The integral LEDs will illuminate. 

Only Inputs, Monitors and Groups can be selected as other path types do not 

make Aux contributions. 

Touch the Aux Contribution controls on the AFU to copy the Fader levels to. 

The touch LEDs on the Contribution controls will illuminate. 

Press the 

FADER ⇔ 

AUX COPY 

key. 

The level on each selected fader will be copied to the selected Aux Contribution 

levels in the same path. 




To copy an Aux Contribution level to other Aux Contribution 

levels 

Press the 

FADER ⇔ 

AUX COPY 


All the Access LEDs will be turned off and the AFU is disabled. 

The strip alpha displays will flash. 

Touch the Aux Contribution control on the AFU to copy the levels from. 

The touch LEDs for the selected control will flash. 

Press the 

ACCESS 

keys for the paths to transfer the contribution level from. 

Only Inputs, Monitors and Groups can be selected as other path types do not 

make Aux contributions. 

Touch the Aux Contribution controls on the AFU to copy the contribution 

levels to. 

The touch LEDs on the target Contribution controls will illuminate steady. 

Press the 

FADER ⇔ 

AUX COPY 

key. 

The level on the source contribution control will be copied to the selected Aux 

Contribution levels in the same path. 




11 Auxiliaries and Cues 

11.1 Aux Control 

An auxiliary path can be configured 

with EQ, Filters, Limiter, 

Compressor, Expander/Gate and 

Inserts and and auxiliary path can be 

mono or stereo. Use Path 

Configuration to setup an auxiliary in 

the same way as any other path 

type. 

SEL 

1-8 

9-16 

MTR 

AUX CONTROL 

8888 

ACCESS 

LEVEL 

CUT 

Auxiliary paths can be assigned to 

Banks or controlled from the 

dedicated Aux Control panel on the 

Monitor section. Aux Control can 

only be used by one auxiliary path at 

a time. 

BAL 

To select an Aux to the Aux Control panel 

Press the 

SEL 

key on the Aux Control panel. 

The LED above the key will flash. 

Press the required number key 

on the Selection Matrix. 

FROM 

O/P 

EXT 

AUX 

CUE 

TO 

CUE 

SLS 

C/R 

LATCH 

1 2 

3 4 

5 6 

7 8 

9 10 

11 12 

13 

14 

15 

16 




The Aux name is shown in the alpha display. 

SEL 

SEL 

The LED above the key will continue to flash until the key is pressed again 

or the Selection Matrix is used by a different function. 

When one of the rotary controls is touched, the alpha display will give a readout 

of the control setting. When released the path assignment will be shown. 

Auxes on the AFU 

ACCESS 

The key allows the path to be assigned to the AFU in the same way as a 

path on a strip and the fader on the AFU duplicates the Level Control. 

Aux Cut 

CUT 

The key on the Aux Control panel cuts the currently selected Auxiliary path. 

The cut is pre-fader (i.e. before the Level control). 

Aux Metering 

MTR 

The key assigns the two AUX/CUE meters at the top of the monitor section to 

display auxiliary output levels. An Aux must be have an output port assigned to it 

MTR 

for the signal to be metered. Each press of the key will toggle the meter 

display between Auxes 1-8 and 9-16. 

Aux Routing 

Auxes can only be routed to Track Sends using the AFU Routing panel. 




11.2 Contribution Control 

11.2.1 AFU Contribution Control 

The contribution from the current path assigned to the AFU to all Auxiliaries can 

be adjusted using the Auxiliary/Panning controls. Only Input, Monitor and Group 

paths can contribute to Auxiliaries. 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

1 

3 

5 

7 

9 

11 

13 

15 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

8888 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

CUT 

PRE 

2 

42 

6 

8 

10 

12 

14 

16 

The alpha displays show the names of the Auxiliary paths. The number of alpha 

displays showing path names depends on the number of Aux Masters set in the 

Path Numbers screen. 

The number keys are used for selecting the Aux contribution control assigned to 

the middle FACs on the channel strips. 

To change the contribution levels 

Turn the rotary controls to the required settings. 

The alpha display will show the setting when the control is touched. 

To turn a contribution off 

Turn the rotary control anti-clockwise until the alpha displays OFF. 

Stereo Auxes 

Stereo Auxes are paired sequentially with odd numbered auxes as left legs and 

even numbered auxes as right legs (e.g. Aux 5 and 6 can be a stereo pair, but 

not Aux 6 and 7). 




When this is the case, the rotary control for contribution to the even numbered 

Aux will operate as a panning control across the stereo pair. 

Aux Pick-Off Point 

The contribution to each Aux can be picked off either pre or post fader. The 

default is post fader. 

To select a pre-fader contribution pick-off 

Press the 

PRE 

key for each required Aux contribution. 

To cut the contribution to an Aux 

Press the 

CUT 

key for the required Aux contribution. 

11.2.2 FAC Contribution Control 

The second and third row of FACs 

on the channel strips are used to 

control Aux contributions. For a 

Stereo Aux the second FAC will 

control gain and the third FAC will 

control Aux Pan. 

MI C A 

I/P 

SEL 

FILM 

FAC 

SELECTION 

TRK 

CONT 

DELAY 

GAIN 

TRIM 

The contribution FACs have 

associated up and down arrow keys 

which operate as Aux Pre/Post or 

Aux Cut. 

Aux contribution control can only be 

assigned to the middle FACs if the 

controls are not already being used 

for EQ, Aux Selection or Film 

Panning. 

Aux Level 

Aux Cut or 

Pre/Post 

Aux Level or 

Balance 

EQ 

AUX 

SEL 

AUX 1 

ON 

PRE 

IN/OUT 

OFF 

POST 

PEAK 

AUX 2 

I/P 

BAL 

AUX 

SEL 

ON 

OFF 

PRE 

POST 

AUX 

SEL 

BAL 

Changes 

function of 

Strip UP and 

DOWN keys 

P/B 

P/W 

Q 

WIDTH 

To select the Aux to contribute to on a row of FACs 

Press one of the 

panel. 

AUX 

SEL 

keys to the right of an alpha display on the FAC Selector 


Press one of the number keys on the Auxiliary/Panning panel on the AFU. 




The path name of the Aux which will be contributed to will be displayed in the 

AUX 

SEL 

alpha display next to the key. 

The LED above the 

AUX 

SEL 

key will cease to be illuminated. 

To select the function of the and keys 

ON 

PRE 

Press the or key on the FAC Selection panel. 

OFF 

POST 

The selected function is shown on the LED display next to the keys. 

Local Aux selection on channel strips 

The top FAC can be used to select 

the Aux which will be contributed to. 

This allows the Aux to be contributed 

to be different on each strip, instead 

of being globally selected. 

Aux Select 

(1-16) 

AUX 3 

I/P 

SEL 

FILM 

FAC 

SELECTION 

TRK 

CONT 

DELAY 

GAIN 

TRIM 

Press to select 

Local Aux 

Select Operation 

EQ 

AUX 

SEL 

I/P 

BAL 

Aux Level 

AUX G 

AUX 

SEL 

Aux Cut or 

Pre/Post 

ON 

OFF 

ON 

PRE 

IN/OUT 

OFF 

POST 

PEAK 

Aux Balance 

(if stereo) 

PRE 

POST 

AUX P 

AUX 

SEL 

Channel Pan 

or Balance 

BAL 

P/B 

P/W 

Q 

WIDTH 

To enable Aux contribution selection on the top FAC 

Press the top-most 

AUX 

SEL 

key on the FAC Selection panel. 

The top alpha displays will show the Aux selected last time the function was 

used. 

When a stereo Aux is selected the lower control will become balance, otherwise 

the control will be inactive. 




11.3 Aux Flip 

The Aux Flip function allows the faders to be used to control the Aux contribution 

level. 

To activate Aux Flip 

AUX 

AUX 

Press the or key above the AFU fader. 

The integral LEDs in the selected key will illuminate. The alpha displays 

associated with the 

ACCESS 

keys will flash on paths which can make aux 

contributions. 

AUX 

If the key is pressed then the faders will control the Aux contributions that 

the second row of FACs is selected to. 

AUX 

If the key is pressed then the faders will control the Aux contributions that 

the third row of FACs is selected to. 

The FACs can still be used to change the Aux contribution. If this is done then 

the fader will move to show the level changes. 

The and keys associated with the FACs will continue to control Aux Cut or 

Pre/Post fader pick off. 

The Aux selected for contribution on each row of FACs can be changed during 

Aux Flip. 

If the FACs are being used by the EQ, Local Aux selection or Film Panning 

AUX 

SEL FILM 

functions then Aux Flip will not operate. Conversely, the FAC Selection 

EQ 

and keys are inactive during Aux Flip. 

ACCESS 

The keys will function as normal and the AFU will continue to control any 

accessed path. 

AUX 

AUX 

If a fader is being touched when the and keys are pressed then 

the Flip operation will not be executed on that strip until the fader is released and 

touched again. If any other unrelated control on the AFU or channel strip is being 

touched then the operation is unaffected. 

Banks can be changed during Aux Flip to use the faders to change contribution 

levels from paths on other Banks. 




Note : 

The Fader and Mute automation controls will NOT automate 

Aux contribution level and cut. This is still controlled with the 

FAC Automation controls. 

To cut Aux Contribution during Aux Flip 

Press the 

MUTE 

key. 

To APL monitor the Aux contribution during Aux Flip 

Press the 

SOLO 

key. 

PFL and CUT SOLO facilities are not provided for Auxes and the fader 

overpress switch is also inactive. 

To end Aux Flip 

AUX 

AUX 

Press the active or key. 




11.4 Cue Sends 

The cue outputs can be controlled 

from the Cue Control panel in the 

Monitor section or assigned to strips. 

SEL 

CUE CONTROL 

8888 

ACCESS 

Up to 16 Cues may be available, 

depending on the setting in the Path 

Numbers screen. 

1-8 

9-16 

MTR 

LEVEL 

CUT 

Cues can have Filters, EQ and 

Inserts and can be defined as stereo. 

Processing is applied with the Path 


O/P 

EXT 

AUX 

FOL 

MON 

To select the Cue to work with 

Press the 

SEL 

key on the Cue Control panel. 


Press the number key for the 

required Cue on the Selection 

Matrix. 

FROM 

O/P 

EXT 

AUX 

CUE 

LATCH 

TO 

CUE 

SLS 

C/R 

1 2 

3 4 

5 6 

7 8 

9 10 

11 12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

The name of the selected Cue will appear in the Cue Control alpha display. 

SEL 

The LED above the key will remain lit for re-selection of cues until it is pressed 

again or until the Selection Matrix is assigned to a different function. 




The Cue controls will remain assigned until another cue is selected. The Level 

control will now set the output level for the selected Cue and the alpha display 

will show the setting when the control is touched. 

ACCESS 

The key assigns the selected Cue to the AFU. The output level can then 

be controlled with the AFU fader and signal processing elements can be 

adjusted as required. AFU controls which do not apply to Cues will be inactive. 

11.4.1 Cue Source 

Cue sends can be fed from the following sources: 

Aux Masters 


Main Outputs 

A Cue can also be set to follow the selection on the Control Room Monitor. 

To select a source for a Cue 

O/P EXT AUX 

Press one of the or keys on the Cue Control panel. 

The LED above the selected key will illuminate. 

The LEDs at the top of the Selection Matrix will illuminate to show the Cue 

source selection status. The LED above the current source key will illuminate. 

Press the number key for the required source on the Selection Matrix. 

To set the Cue to follow the selection on the Control Room 

Monitor 

Press the 

FOL 

MON 

key. 

To deselect this mode 

O/P EXT AUX 


Note : 

This mode will prevent the Control Room Monitor from having a 

Cue selected as a source. This is a safety measure to prevent 

feedback. 




To meter the Cues 

Press the 

MTR 

key. 

The AUX/CUE meters at the top of the monitor section will display Cue output 

levels. 

Each press of the 

Cues 9-16. 

MTR 

key will toggle the meter display between Cues 1-8 and 

No signal level will be shown for Cues which do not have an output port assigned 

to them. 

To cut a Cue 

Press the 

CUT 

key. 

This cuts the Cue at the beginning of the signal path. 



Links and VCA Ganging 

12 Links and VCA Ganging 

12.1 Control Links 

Controls can be linked together across any number of paths so that moving a 

control on one path has the same proportional effect on the others. 

Any type of control or path can be linked. A link can only consist of one control 

type. Up to 256 links may be defined. Any member of a link can be used to 

control all the other members. A control can only belong to one link at a time. 

If a linked control is being touched, a second control in the same link group can 

be moved independently of the remainder of the link. 

12.1.1 To Form a New Link 

Press the 

LINK 

key. 

The key will flash. All the strip alpha displays will flash and the AFU will be 

inactive. 

Touch the required type of control on the AFU. 

The touch indicators will illuminate on the selected control. 

ACCESS 

Press the keys of paths to be included in the link. Use the bank 

selector controls to reach hidden paths. 

ACCESS 

ACCESS 

The first key pressed will flash. Further keys pressed will 

illuminate steady. 

Note: 

For faders or mutes the first path selected will set the 

automation mode of all the other faders or mutes in the link. 

To save the link 

LINK 

ACCESS 

Press the key or the flashing key (Link Master). 

ACCESS 

If the flashing key is pressed then the currently defined link will be 

completed and the desk will remain in Link formation mode to allow additional 

links to be created. 




12.1.2 Editing Links 

To edit a Link 

Press the 

LINK 

key. 

The key will flash. All the strip alpha displays will flash and the AFU will be 

inactive. 

Touch the required type of control on the AFU. 

The touch indicators will illuminate on the selected control. 

Press the 

ACCESS 

key of any path in the required Link. 

ACCESS 

ACCESS 

The pressed key will flash and the other keys for paths in the link 

will illuminate steady. The Bank selector display will show any banks with paths 

in the link with a symbol. 

Press 

ACCESS 

keys to toggle paths in and out of the Link. 

ACCESS 

The path with the flashing key cannot be removed from the link while 

there are other members in the Link. 

Note: 

When a link is being edited a control may be moved as normal 

on the channel strips. However if a member of a link is being 

touched then paths cannot be added to or deleted from that 

link. A control which is being touched can be added to a link but 

will not affect the position of the other link members until it is 

released. 

To delete a link 

Follow the same procedure as editing a Link above. 

ACCESS 

Press the keys which are illuminated steady to take all of the 

associated paths out of the Link. 

Lastly, press the flashing 

The Link will no longer exist. 

ACCESS 

key. 




12.1.3 Out-of-range Offsets 

Controls (faders) can be moved beyond their physical end-stops and the audio 

and control positions will be maintained. If the control is touched while there is an 

out-of-range offset, this offset will be set to zero but the relative offset the control 

and other members in the link, will jump to the new position. 

12.1.4 Overriding Links with Link Isolate 

To isolate a path from a link 

Press the 

LINK 

ISO 

key. 


Any control that is now touched on that path will operate without affecting or 

being affected by any links that any controls in the path belong to. 

To return controls to their links 

Press the 

LINK 

ISO 

key again. 

The LED is turned off. 

When control are returned to links then any new offsets are maintained. 




12.1.5 Managing Links with the Graphics Display screen 

LINK 

The Link screen is displayed when the key is held down for more than 

about 1 second, or when the Link icon is clicked. 

Links 

• Linkable Ctrls • • Linkable Paths • 

AUX 1 

AUX 14 

AUX 2 AUX 15 

AUX 3 AUX 16 

AUX 4 

WIDTH 

AUX 5 

PAN 

AUX 6 

FADER 

AUX 7 

MUTE 

AUX 8 

INSERT 

AUX 9 

EQ 

AUX 10 

FILTER 

AUX 11 

LIMITER 

AUX 12 COMPRESSOR 

AUX 13 EXP/GATE 

Create 

Delete 

Copy 

Delete All 

Inp 

Inp 

Inp 

Inp 

Inp 

Inp 

Inp 

Inp 

Mon 

Mon 

Mon 

Mon 

Mon 

Mon 

Mon 

Mon 

Mon 

Mon 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

: 

I1 

I2 

I3 

I4 

I5 

I6 

I7 

I8 

MN1 

MN2 

MN3 

MN4 

MN5 

MN6 

MN7 

MN8 

MN9 

MN10 

• Temporary Master • 

Close 

INPUT 

MONITOR 

GROUP 

OUTPUT 

AUX 

CUE 

INFO 

The alpha displays on the strips will flash and the AFU will be disabled while the 

Links screen is displayed. 

To create a link with the Link screen 

Click the button for the required linkable control. 

The touch LED on the selected control will illuminate on the AFU. 

Click on a path to become a member of the link. 

This first path is the Temporary Master of the link. If the control is a Fader or Mute 

then the automation mode on this path will be used for other members of the link. 

To reach paths that are not visible in the list 

Click on the INPUT, MONITOR, GROUP, OUTPUT, AUX, CUE buttons. 

Click on the other required link member paths. 

or 

ACCESS 

Press the keys for the required link members. 

Click the CREATE button. 

The new link will be formed. 




Copying Links between Control types 

When a Link is formed using the Graphics Display then the set of paths in the 

Link is temporarily retained by the Link screen. This can be used immediately to 

create another Link on a different control for the same set of paths. 

To re-use the same paths for a new link 

Click the button for the required control. 

Click the COPY button. 

Deleting Links 

To delete all existing links 

Click the DELETE ALL button. 

A confirmation dialogue box will appear. 

Click the Execute button. 

To delete the last link formed 

Click the DELETE button. 

It is not possible to delete an existing link from the Link screen without deleting 

all Links. Existing Links must be removed on the console surface as described 

previously. 

Link Information 

Click the INFO button to display the LINK MAP DISPLAY screen. 

• LINK MAP DISPLAY • 

AUX 1 

AUX 2 

AUX 3 

AUX 4 

AUX 5 

AUX 6 

AUX 7 

AUX 8 

AUX 9 

AUX 10 

AUX 11 

AUX 12 

AUX 13 

AUX 14 

AUX 15 

AUX 16 

PAN 

FADER 

MUTE 

INSERT 

EQ 

FILTER 

LIMITER 

COMPRESSOR 

EXP/GATE 

MIC A 

Close 

I I1 

I I2 

I I3 

I I4 

I I5 

I I6 

I I7 

I I8 

I I9 

I I10 

I I11 

I I12 

I I13 

I I14 

I I15 

I I16 

I I17 

I I18 

I I19 

I I20 

I I21 

I I22 

I I23 

I I24 

M MN1 

M MN2 

M MN3 

M MN4 

M MN5 

M MN6 

M MN7 

M MN8 

M MN9 

M MN10 

M MN11 

M MN12 

M MN13 

M MN14 

M MN15 

M MN16 

M MN17 

M MN18 




Each link is shown as a different coloured square in the grid. 

To move the grid 

Press the 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key. 

Move the trackball to move the grid. 

The legends along the side and the bottom will scroll with the grid. 

Press the key 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

again to return the trackball to pointer mode. 

Click Close to return to the LINKS screen. 

12.1.6 Links and Automation 

Automation Mode 

The Automation mode is the same for all faders or mutes in the same Link. 

Changing the automation mode on any member of the link copies the new mode 

to the rest of the link. For other controls the automation modes are changed 

without affecting other members of a Link. 

Control Touch 

When one control in a link is touched then the other controls in the link are 

touched as well. This will affect the data recorded by the automation system if 

some of the controls in the link are in a suitable Record mode. 

12.1.7 Links and trim 

Using trim mode for linked faders allows a common level change to be applied to 

all faders over a pass. 

All faders in a link have the same automation mode, so if trim is selected for one 

fader the whole link is put into trim. When TRIM is pressed then all the faders in 

the link will move to the offset position. 

If a link is formed while the faders are in trim mode then the trim function will 

continue when the link forming is completed. Each fader in the link will then 

move to its individual trim position. 

When a Fader has been selected for a link, override does not prevent it from 

going into trim, it only means it delays the operation until the control is released, 

then applies its own trim value. 

Otherwise trim movement works as any other control movement. 




12.2 VCA Control 

VCA Groups allow one fader and mute to modify the gain of other faders in a 

similar way as a traditional VCA control. When a Master fader moves or is muted 

then the Slaves move and mute with it. Slave faders may be moved individually 

with no effect on the Master or on other Slaves. 

A Master can also be a slave to another VCA group but any fader can only be 

slave to one Master. If a Grand Master is moved then any Sub-Masters and their 

Slaves will move with it. 

16 VCA Groups are provided, each of which can have any number of Slaves. 

12.2.1 Forming and Editing 

To create a new VCA group 

Press the 

VCA GROUP 


The key will flash. 

Press the 

ACCESS 

key on a strip assigned to a VCA Master. 

If the 

ACCESS 

key on a strip not assigned to VCA Master is pressed first 

The strip will be reassigned to the next unused VCA Master. The fader will be set 

to 0dB and the Mute key will be set to Off. The 

ACCESS 

key will illuminate. 

To assign Slave paths to the VCA Master 

Press the 

ACCESS 

key for the required paths adds those paths. 

ACCESS 

ACCESS 

The selected keys will flash. Each press of an key will toggle it in 

and out of the VCA group. 

Different banks may be selected to bring other paths onto the surface. Banks 

with group members will indicate this with a symbol. 

To complete forming the group 

Press the flashing 

ACCESS 

key of the master. 

The 

ACCESS 

key of another Master could now be pressed to form another group. 




If a group has slaves already 

The 

ACCESS 

keys will illuminate and the master fader will not be set to 0dB. 

To abandon changes to the current VCA group 

Press the 

CANCEL 

key. 

ACCESS 

Note: The keys will not change illuminate to indicate the cancel. 

To finish creating or editing VCA groups 

Press the 

VCA GROUP 

key. 

ACCESS 

The keys will return to normal use and the channel strips remain on the 

same Bank. 

12.2.2 VCA Fader Operation 

When a Master fader is moved manually or by automation, all the slaves move 

by the same amount in dBs. This does not depend on the slave automation 

modes. 

Off Scale Moves 

If a slave is at the top of its travel (+10dB) and its master is moved upwards then 

the slave will be Off Scale. This will not change the instantaneous balance of the 

group, although that fader and audio is unable to go above +10dB. The system 

will record the offset as if the fader has been moved above +10dB. 

When the master is moved down again the system will reduce the Off Scale 

move until the physical fader can move below +10dB. 

If a fader is touched when it is Off Scale then it will be treated it as if it were 

touched at the Off Scale value and also instantaneously moved down to +10dB. 

If this fader is also a Master or in a link then the move will be applied as normal 

and there will be a drop in position for the slaved or linked faders. 




12.2.3 VCA Group Control via the Graphics Display 

VCA groups can be viewed or deleted using the Graphics screen. 

Click on the VCA icon or press the 

The VCA Groups screen is displayed: 

VCA GROUP 

key. 

VCA GROUPS 

Close 

GM 1 GM 2 GM 3 GM 4 GM 5 GM 6 GM 7 GM 8 GM 9 GM10 GM11 GM12 GM13 GM14 GM15 GM16 

**** 

DELETE DELETE ALL PATHS 

To remove a VCA 

Click the box representing the VCA Master on the screen or press its 

key. 

ACCESS 

Click the DELETE button. 

The Delete VCA Group dialogue box will be displayed. 

• Delete VCA Group • Close 

VCA 1 

VCA 2 

VCA 3 

: 

: 

: 

GM 1 

GM 2 

GM 3 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click the VCA Groups to remove. 






• Confirm Delete • 

VCA 1 : GM 1 will be deleted 

Coalesce 

Cancel 

Execute 

If required, click the Coalesce button. 

The button will change from yellow to blue. This causes any automation data 

recorded against the VCA master to be written to its slaves and sub-masters. 

Click Execute to confirm deletion. 

To remove all VCA Groups 

Click the DELETE ALL button. 

A dialogue box will ask for confirmation. 

• Confirm Delete • 

CONFIRM DELETE ALL VCA GROUPS 

Coalesce 

Cancel 

Execute 

If required, click the Coalesce button. 

The button will change from yellow to blue. This causes any automation data 

recorded against the VCA masters to be written to their slaves. 


To display all the paths which are VCA slaves 

Click the PATHS button. 

A dialogue box will appear which shows all slaved paths as a scrolling list. 

To display all the slaves of a master 

Move the trackball pointer over the box representing the VCA Master on the 

ACCESS 

screen or press its key. 

The 

ACCESS 

keys for the slaves will flash. 



Oscillator 

13 Oscillator 

Capricorn has two internal oscillators, one a fixed low frequency used for Slate, 

the other has variable level and frequency and is used as a multi-purpose tone 

source. 

13.1 Tone oscillator 

The tone oscillator is controlled 

through the Monitor Section. The 

rotary control either controls 

frequency or level as selected by the 

OSC 

OSC 

FREQ 

LEVEL 

and buttons. The numeric 

value for the selected control is 

shown in the alphanumeric display. 

To turn the oscillator on press the 

button. 

OSC 

IN 

8888 

OSCILLATOR 

OSC 

LEVEL 

OSC 

FREQ 

CAL 

OSC 

IN 

OSC 

IN 

The key is double action: fully pressing this button will display a screen 

allowing the operator to set up the tone routing as follows: 

OSCILLATOR CONTROL 

Slate Frequency 

25 Slate Level 

-10 

Close 

ENABLE 

• Routing Control • 

Edit 

Clear all 


Oscillator 


To route the tone to a new destination 

Click on Edit under Routing Control. 

The Tone routing screen is displayed: 

• Tone routing • 

Close 

INPUT 

MONITOR 

OUTPUT 

AUX 

CUE 

TKSEND 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click on the buttons on the right hand side to choose the path type that is 

displayed in the list. 

Select the destination signal paths from the list or press the 

the required paths. 

ACCESS 

keys for 

Press the 

visible. 

Press the 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key to scroll through the list to reach paths that are not 

key again to change back to pointer mode afterwards. 

Click on Close when you have selected the destinations. 

13.1.1 Preset Oscillator Settings 

CAL 

Pressing the key will set the oscillator frequency and level to a pre-defined 

CAL 

setting. To change the preset values hold the button down while turning the 

OSC 

OSC 

rotary control, use the and buttons to change the control between 

FREQ 

LEVEL 

frequency and level. 



Oscillator 

13.2 Slate Oscillator 

The slate oscillator has a fixed low level tone normally used for recording onto 

analogue tape. 

To turn the oscillator on 

Fully press the 

OSC 

IN 

to display the OSCILLATOR CONTROL screen. 

Click on ENABLE. 

The Slate tone is routed to all track send outputs. 


Oscillator 




Talkback 

14 Talkback 

Capricorn supports up to ten talkback stations, with Talkback Station 1 (called 

Engineer) fixed at the console. Talkback Station 2 is called Producer. 

Each station can have up to twelve keys which are freely assignable to switch on 

talkback to other stations and/or talkback groups. 

There are six talkback groups which allow talkback to be sent to track sends, 

main outputs, cues, headphones and the studio loudspeakers. The talkback 

groups are shared between the ten talkback stations. 

14.1 Talkback Setup 

To setup Talkback switching 

Click the Talkback icon. 

The Talkback screen will be displayed. 

Talkback 

• Station • 

Engineer 

Producer 

Station 3 

Station 4 

Station 5 

Station 6 

Station 7 

Station 8 

Station 9 

Station 10 

Clear station 

Slate 

Close 

• Key • 

• Destination • 

Sel Key 1 

Sel Key 2 

Sel Key 3 

Sel Key 4 

Sel Key 5 

Sel Key 6 

Sel Key 7 

Sel Key 8 

Sel Key 9 

Sel Key 10 

Sel Key 11 

Sel Key 12 

Engineer 

Producer 

Station 3 

Station 4 

Station 5 

Station 6 

Station 7 

Station 8 

Station 9 

Station 10 

Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

Group 4 

Group 5 

Group 6 

Click the button for the required station. 

Click the button for the key to configure. 

Click the buttons for the destinations the key will switch talkback to. 

Click Close to enable the new configuration. 

If either ‘Engineer’ or ‘Producer’ presses a talkback key then MAIN LS is 

dimmed. Also, the ‘Red Light’ switch on the console prevents accidental routing 

of talkback to main outputs and to track sends. 

If Slate is enabled when talking to a talkback group which includes track sends 

then tone is sent to track sends. Slate will not be routed to main outputs. 


Talkback 


14.1.1 Example 1: 

Sel Key 1 for talkback Station 1 (Engineer) routes talkback to Station 2 

(Producer), Station 3, Talkback Group 1 (Main Output 1, Cue 1, LS M Mon, LS 

HPH) and Talkback Group 4 (Main Output 1, LS SLS). 

Talkback 


Engineer 

Producer 

Station 3 

Station 4 

Station 5 

Station 6 

Station 7 

Station 8 

Station 9 

Station 10 

Clear station 

Slate 

Close 

• Key • 


Sel Key 1 

Sel Key 2 

Sel Key 3 

Sel Key 4 

Sel Key 5 

Sel Key 6 

Sel Key 7 

Sel Key 8 

Sel Key 9 

Sel Key 10 

Sel Key 11 

Sel Key 12 

Engineer 

Producer 

Station 3 

Station 4 

Station 5 

Station 6 

Station 7 

Station 8 

Station 9 

Station 10 

Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

Group 4 

Group 5 

Group 6 

STATION 1 

STATION 2 

STATION 3 

STATION 4 

STATION 5 

STATION 6 

STATION 7 

STATION 8 

STATION 9 

STATION 10 

TB 

GR 1 

TB 

GR 2 

TB 

GR 3 

TB 

GR 4 

TB 

GR 5 

TB 

GR 6 

OUT 1 

STATION 1 

STATION 2 

STATION 3 

STATION 4 

STATION 5 

STATION 6 

STATION 7 

STATION 8 

STATION 9 

STATION 10 

OUT 4 

CUE 1 

CUE 4 


Station 1 

Sel Key 1 

TKS 1 

TKS 16 

LS M MON 

LS SLS 

LS HPH 



Talkback 

14.1.2 Example 2: 

Sel Key 1 for talkback Station 4 routes talkback to Station 1 (Engineer), Station 8 

and Talkback Group 2 (Main Output 4, Track send 16). 

Talkback 

Close 


• Key • 


Engineer 

Producer 

Station 3 

Station 4 

Station 5 

Station 6 

Station 7 

Station 8 

Station 9 

Station 10 

Clear station 

Slate 

Sel Key 1 

Sel Key 2 

Sel Key 3 

Sel Key 4 

Sel Key 5 

Sel Key 6 

Sel Key 7 

Sel Key 8 

Sel Key 9 

Sel Key 10 

Sel Key 11 

Sel Key 12 

Engineer 

Producer 

Station 3 

Station 4 

Station 5 

Station 6 

Station 7 

Station 8 

Station 9 

Station 10 

Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

Group 4 

Group 5 

Group 6 

STATION 1 

STATION 2 

STATION 3 

STATION 4 

STATION 5 

STATION 6 

STATION 7 

STATION 8 

STATION 9 

STATION 10 

TB 

GR 1 

TB 

GR 2 

TB 

GR 3 

TB 

GR 4 

TB 

GR 5 

TB 

GR 6 

OUT 1 

STATION 1 

STATION 2 

STATION 3 

STATION 4 

STATION 5 

STATION 6 

STATION 7 

STATION 8 

STATION 9 

STATION 10 

OUT 4 

CUE 1 

CUE 4 


Station 4 

Sel Key 1 

TKS 1 

TKS 16 

LS M MON 

LS SLS 

LS HPH 


Talkback 


14.2 Talkback Group Levels 

The level for each Talkback Group is set independently. 

To set the level for a Talkback Group 

Press the required TB GRP key 

on the Levels panel in the Monitor 

section. 

8888 

LEVEL 

APL 

DIM 

DIM 

LEVEL 

APL 

PFL 

TB 

GRP 1 

TB 

GRP 2 

TB 

GRP 3 

TB 

GRP 4 

TB 

GRP 5 

TB 

GRP 6 


The alpha display and the circular bargraph will show the current setting. 

Turn the rotary control to the required setting. 




15 Transport Control 

Introduction 

Tape machines are assigned to one of six groups using the Transport Control 

Configuration screen. Transport Control groups are normally defined as part of 

the console configuration (see Input/Output Configuration). 

The six groups are then controlled using the two sets of transport keys in the 

Monitor section of the console. 

Multitrack tape machines in Group 1 are armed for recording using the keys on 

the Tape Machine Track Control panel in the Monitor section. 

Timecode and Labels are used to track the progress of audio. 

Timecode Labels have numerous uses, including setting up Cycle times, 

executing Locates and altering the Auto Record drop-in point. 




15.1 Machine Control 

There are two sets of Transport Control keys which are used to control the 

machine groups setup using the Transport Control Configuration screen. 

15.1.1 Machine Selection 

To select the machine groups for each set of keys 

Press the upper 1 to 6 keys for 

the upper set of controls, and the 

lower 1 to 6 keys for the lower set 

of transport controls. 

2nd 

FUNC 

LATCH 

LOCATE 

1 

> 

3 

> 

4 

|| 

5 

RECORD 

6 

SYNC 

GROUP 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

ROLL 

BACK 

SHUTTLE 

JOG 

CYCLE 

ALL 

STOP 

AUTO 

RECORD 

2nd 

FUNC 

LOCATE 

> 

> 

|| 

RECORD 

The same machine cannot be controlled on both sets of keys at the same time. 

To select more than one machine on the upper set of keys 

Press the 

LATCH 

key. 

The key will illuminate. 

Press the required upper 1 to 6 keys. 

Each key pressed will now toggle on and off without de-selecting any of the other 

upper 1-6 keys. 

The machines will not necessarily be synchronised together. 

Note : 

The lower set of keys is usually used to control the multitrack 

machines configured on the 1 key. This is because the extra 

functions of the autolocator are engaged on keys in the lower 

set of transport controls. 




15.1.2 Controlling the Transports 

Each set of Transport Controls has the usual keys for play, stop, pause, 

fast-forward, rewind and record. Added functionality is provided by extra keys in 

each set. 

Note : 

If the Capricorn Surround Panel (CSP) is fitted, the functionality 

of the panel as a Transport Controller will be reduced. See the 

Capricorn Surround chapter. 

Extra Function Keys 

ROLL 

BACK 

This key rewinds the tape by a pre-defined amount. The time 

is set in the Transport Control Configuration screen (see the I/O 

Configuration chapter). Rollback is only available on the 

machines controlled by the autolocator in machine Group 1. 

SHUTTLE 

Not implemented yet. 

JOG 


CYCLE 

When cycle is pressed the tape machine will cycle between two 

user defined label points. See the section on Cycle later in this 

chapter. 

ALL 

STOP 

Stops all machines. 

AUTO 

RECORD 

Puts the machine into RECORD at the time that it went into 

record in the last pass. This function is used for rehearsing 

drop-ins. See the Auto Record section later in this chapter. 

2nd 

FUNC 


LOCATE 

Machines controlled through the autolocator will locate to a 

pre-defined Label point. In the case of relay controlled 

equipment the Locate relay will be activated. See Locating later 

in this chapter. 

SYNC 

GROUP 





15.2 Track Control 

The track ready and record enable controls of up to three multitrack machines 

can be addressed independently. 

MACHINE TRACK CONTROL 

TRK 

A 

TRK 

B 

TRK 

C 

TRK 

D 

1 2 3 4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

MACHINE A 

MACHINE B 

MACHINE C 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

I/P SYNC I/P SYNC I/P SYNC 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

REHEARSE REHEARSE REHEARSE 

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 

RDY RDY RDY 

REC ENABLE REC ENABLE REC ENABLE 

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 

ALL SAFE 

READY 

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 

15.2.1 Track Arming 

To arm a selection of tracks on a machine 

MACHINE A MACHINE B MACHINE C 

Press either or to select the required machine. 

The integral LED in the key will illuminate. 

The keys are interlocked so that only one machine can be selected at a time. 

Press the number keys for the tracks which require arming. 

The LEDs above the selected keys will flash. The indicators above the meters 

for the associated paths will also flash. 

The 

RDY 

LED for the current machine will flash. 

When the tape machine goes into Record, the Ready indicators will cease 

flashing and illuminate steady. 

If a machine is already in Record then any track which is deselected will drop out 

immediately. 




To make Safe all tracks on the currently selected machine 

Press the 

ALL SAFE 

key. 

This overrides the arming selection for the Tracks. The set of Tracks which are 

selected for arming will not be changed. 

To arm all tracks on the currently selected machine 

Press the 

READY 

key. 

15.2.2 Machine Record Enable Switching 

REC ENABLE 

When the key is off (not illuminated) then no record commands can be 

sent to the associated machine. 

To arm a multitrack machine as Record Ready 

Press the associated 

REC ENABLE 

key. 

The integral LED will flash. When a record tally is returned from the machine the 

integral LED will be illuminated steady. 

To issue a record command to a multitrack machine which is 

Record Ready 

Press the 1 key for one of the sets of Transport Control keys. 

Press the relevant and keys. 

RECORD 

> 

Any tracks which were armed will now start recording. 

RECORD 

Note : The illumination of the key indicates that a record command 

has been requested by the operator. It does not reflect the 

actual state of any of the machines connected to the system. 

15.2.3 Machine Status Switching 

To always use the input to the tape machine as the return 

signal to the console 

Press the 

I/P 

key for the required machine. 





This will override the normal state where the machine automatically selects the 

off-tape signal when in PLAY, switching to its input signal in all other cases. 

To put a machine into Rehearse 

Press the 

REHEARSE 


This allows all the normal actions of Recording to take place without actually 

recording new material onto tape. 

For example, this allows a sensitive drop-in to be fully rehearsed without doing 

damage to existing material. This is particularly useful when used in conjunction 

with the Auto-Record function. 

To use the Sync Replay channel in a machine for reproduction 

Press the 

SYNC 


The yellow LED above the key will illuminate and the green LED will go out. 

This is necessary with analogue machines when performing overdubs. It is not 

usually required with digital ATRs because the delays between the Play and 

Record heads are compensated for internally. 

15.2.4 Auxiliary Tracks 

Each machine can also have up to four auxiliary tracks controlled by the system 

in addition to the the 48 main tracks. This provides a total of 156 track ready 

circuits. 

TRK 

The 4 auxiliary track switches A 

TRK TRK 

B C 

TRK 

and D are usually used to arm the 

various ancilliary tracks available on digital multitrack recorders, and will follow 

the machine assignment of the main 48 track matrix. 




15.3 Timecode 

15.3.1 Timecode Configuration 

The Timecode Configuration is used to match internal timecode handling to the 

timecode coming from the source. 

To set the Timecode Configuration 

Click on the Timecode Icon. 

The Timecode Configuration screen will be displayed. 

Timecode Configuration 

• Timecode Source Machine • 

• Display Mode • 

Close 

Unspecified 

•TypeOfCode• 

LTC 

VITC 

Biphase 

• Frame Rate • 

24 FPS 

25 FPS 

30 FPS 

Dropframe 

• Timecode Synthesis Options • 

Use synchroniser status 

8 Timecode flywheel (frames) 

• Local Zero Offset • 

+00:00:00:00.0 

Zero 

Timecode 

Foot/Frame 

• Timecode Display Format • 

Suppress hours 

Suppress frames 

• Foot/Frame • 

16MM 24FPS 

35MM 24FPS 

35MM 25FPS 

35MM 30FPS 

Other: 16FPF, 25FPS 

• Foot/Frame Display Format • 

Suppress frames 

• Foot/Frame • • Timecode • 

0.00 = 00:00:00:00.0 

The Timecode Source Machine shows Tape Machine A as setup in the 

Transport Control Configuration screen. 

The items in each option with yellow buttons are the current settings. 

Type Of Code 

This will always be set to LTC (Longitudinal Timecode). VITC (Vertical Interval 

Timecode) and Biphase are not yet operational. 

Frame Rate 

This can be set to 24 FPS, 25 FPS, 30 FPS or Dropframe. 

The Frame Rate is stored within the current Configuration or Title. If the current 

Frame Rate is not the same as the incoming Frame Rate from the source 

machine then a warning message will be displayed on the screen. 




Timecode Synthesis Options 

Use Synchroniser Status 

This button is on (yellow) by default to indicate that the state of the tape machine 

is derived from the tape machine synchroniser. 

Click the button to turn it off. 

The button will turn blue and the state of the tape machine will be derived directly 

from Timecode. For example if automation is operating directly from a Timecode 

source and no synchroniser is employed. 

Timecode flywheel (frames) 

This is the number of frames that the system will resolve before it registers a 

drop out. The default value is 8 frames and should not be increased unless a lot 

of bad Timecode is being received from the source machine which is causing 

automation mix passes to drop out. Increasing the value increases the time 

period before automation will recognise that a mix pass has ended unless the 

Use Synchroniser Status is turned on. 

Click on the number to change it. 

Roll the Trackball left and right to decrease and increase the value or enter a 

value with the keypad. 

Click again to set the displayed value. 

Local Zero Offset 

This is used to alter the Timecode that is displayed on the screen with an offset. 

This Offset can be Zero, or it may be any Offset time entered via the Timecode 

modifier field. 

To engage the Local Zero Offset 

Click the button so that it turns yellow. 

The screen will display LZ under the Timecode. 

To change the Offset 

Click the current Offset value. 

A dialogue box will appear for adjusting the Timecode. See Timecode Entry and 

Editing in this chapter. 




To reset the Offset value 

Click the Zero button. 

Note: 

When the Zero button is clicked, the Offset is automatically 

enabled (the button will turn yellow). 

Display Mode 

The Display Mode determines whether the screen will show normal Timecode 

or a Foot/Frame format used in film and video editing. 

Click the button for the required display mode. 

The selected button will turn yellow and the other button will turn blue. 

Note : 

The Foot/Frame format is for display only. When it is enabled 

the Capricorn will still use normal Timecode internally. 

Timecode Display Format 

Suppress Hours 

When this is selected, the hour field in Timecode displays will be suppressed 

until the Timecode reaches one hour. 

Suppress Frames 

When this is selected, the Frame field in Timecode displays will not be shown. 

Foot/Frame 

This is used to select the Foot/Frame rate between 16MM 24FPS, 35MM 

24FPS, 35MM 25FPS, 35MM 30FPS and Other. 

To set a non-standard rate 

Click the Other button. 

The Select Other Display Values dialogue box will appear. 

• Select Other Display Values • 

16 Frames/foot 

25 Frames/sec 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click in the Frames/sec box. 




Roll the trackball left and right to change the value or enter the required 

number on the numeric keypad. 

Click again to set the number. 

Click the Trackball in the Frames/sec box. 

Roll the trackball left and right to change the value or enter the required 

number on the numeric keypad. 



The dialogue box will close. 

The Other button will be yellow, indicating that the rates just entered will be used 

for Foot/Frame display. 

Foot Frame Display Format 

When the Suppress Frames button is on (Yellow), the Frame field in the 

Foot/Frame display will not be shown. 

Foot/Frame = Timecode 

This sets the reference point against Timecode from which the Foot/Frame 

display is measured. 

To change the Foot/Frame point 

Click on the value in either box. 

Alter the values as for normal Timecode editing (see Timecode Entry and 

Editing in this chapter). 

15.3.2 Timecode Display Area 

The lower right-hand corner of the screen always shows the current timecode. 

Ancillary information in the box is the state of the Tape Machine being controlled 

by the Autolocator, the type of timecode source (always LTC) and the timecode 

rate in frames per second. 

Also, LZ is displayed when a Local Zero Offset is in use. 

Correctly running timecode is indicated by PLAY in green. If PLAY turns red then 

the timecode is running more slowly than Capricorn is expecting. Check the 

timecode source or change the expected frame rate. 




15.3.3 Timecode Entry and Editing 

Several methods of entering and modifying timecode values are available and 

and can be used according to preference. 

Timecode is edited in a standard dialogue box as follows: 

1. Current timecode 

3. Result 

2. Modified timecode 

ie. Offset or new value 

00:28:48:01.4 = 00:28:48:01.4 

Cancel 

Execute 

1 The current field is the original timecode selected for editing. 

2 The modifier field is the area for displaying user input. 

3 The result field shows the total of the original and the modifier. 

15.3.4 Timecode Entry Formats 

Timecode can be numerically entered using the 0-9 keypad next to the trackball 

or an offset can be entered using the keypad or trackball. 

Timecode can be entered in either formal or free formats. Formal entry is 

numeric only and appears in the form in which timecode is always displayed, 

formatted as HH:MM:SS:FF.S (hours:minutes:seconds:frames.subframes). 

Free format contains both numbers and punctuation marks, the resultant 

timecode value being translated into the formal form for display. 

The following examples illustrate the free format. 

1::2 1 hr 2 secs 

:12 12 secs 

12: 12 mins 

12:12 12 mins 12 secs 

2:: 2 hrs 

2::: 2 hrs 

.1 one tenth frame 

10. 10 frames 

10.1 10.1 frames 

12:10. 12 secs 10 frames 

::12:10 12 secs 10 frames 

Leading zeros are unnecessary and blank fields are implied zeros. 

For clarity of display, the representation of timecode in lists can have 

suppression of leading zeroes in the hours field and/or suppression of the 

frames and subframes fields. This is done in the Timecode Configuration screen 

as described previously. When editing timecode values, however, the full 

timecode representation is always used. 




15.3.5 Offset Specification by Trackball 

If the trackball is moved first when a timecode editing dialogue is displayed then 

an offset field will appear with a one-quarter frame offset corresponding to the 

direction in which the trackball was moved. 

For example: 

Close 

00:28:48:01.4 - 00:00:00:00.1 = 00:28:48:01.3 

To increase the offset 

Move the trackball right. 

To decrease the offset 

Move the trackball left. 

To set the current value 

Click a trackball button. 

15.3.6 Offset Specification by Numeric Keys 

If instead of moving the ball, any of “+”, “–”, “:”, “.” or the numeric keys are 

pressed, the operator is deemed to be entering values by keys only. At this time 

the ball will be available for controlling the data entry cursor pointing in the 

modifier field 

Entering “+”or“–” signifies the entry of an offset to the original timecode field. A 

zero modifier field will appear with the + or - character as follows: 

Close 

00:28:48:01.4 + 00:00:00:00.0 = 00:28:48:01.4 

Entering digits at this point will cause them to start overwriting the modifier field, 

beginning at the frames digit, and shifting one place left with each new digit. So, 

to enter an offset of 2 secs 8 frames, the digits 208need to be entered. 

This results in a display as follows : 

Close 

00:28:48:01.4 + 00:00:02:08.0 = 00:28:50:09.3 




There is no restriction on the numeric range of any of the two digit fields in the 

modifier. It is therefore possible to specify a 95 frame offset by entering 95, the 

result field being recalculated according to the current system frame rate to 

show a valid timecode format as follows (assuming 30 fps code) : 

Close 

00:28:48:01.4 + 00:00:00:95.0 = 00:28:53:04.4 

Pressing “+” or“–” again during the numeric entry restarts the edit with a zero 

modifier field. 

15.3.7 Offset Specification in Free Format 

If during the entry of the modifier field, a punctuation key is pressed, the display 

changes to show the user input in that format. All previous keystrokes are 

retained, and the result field is recalculated to show the new effect. For example, 

if a “:” was entered in the example above the user input would represent 95 

minutes. The display would then appear as follows: 

Close 

00:28:48:01.4 + 95: = 02:03:48:01.4 

In any field between punctuation characters up to three digits will be allowed. If 

any more are entered the field will rotate leftwards, adding the new digits at the 

right. Thus if a modifier of “+”, 1,“:”, 23456is entered the display will appear as 

follows: 

Close 

00:28:48:01.4 + 1:456 = 00:37:24:01.4 

because 1:456 represents 8 mins 36 secs. 

Pressing “+” or “–” again during numeric entry restarts the edit with a zero 

modifier field, as described in the preceding section. 




15.3.8 Replacement of Original Timecode 

If a numeric key is pressed when the overlay window is first opened, it signifies 

that the operator wishes to overwrite the original timecode. On the display the 

original field is moved to the modifier field, and entered key starts the overwriting 

process at the frames digit (or the seconds digit if frames are suppressed). 

Further numeric key entries cause the newly entered digits only to shift 

leftwards, replacing the original. So for an entry of 7654, the display would 

appear as follows (again assuming 30 fps code): 

Close 

00:28:48:01.4 00:28:76:54.4 = 00:29:17:24.4 

15.3.9 Replacement of Timecode in Free Format 

If a punctuation character is entered as part of a numeric entry then the system 

will assume that an absolute timecode value is being entered. The original field 

will disappear and will be replaced with the entered data, with the punctuated 

form being translated into the result field as a totally new timecode. This 

provides a quick way of specifying any arbitrary time without having to erase the 

supplied original field by entering all the leading zeros. Again, three digits are 

allowed in any field except the tenth-frame field, where only one is legal. For 

example, entering 123:4would produce the following display: 

Close 

123:4 = 02:03:04:00.0 

15.3.10 Correction of Numeric Entry 

In any of the above cases of numeric entry, a wrongly typed digit can be 

TIME 

corrected by using the key. Only user-supplied input can be rubbed out, so if 

TIME 

a replacement edit is being done and is pressed more times than there have 

been new digits entered the display will return to showing the original, but no 

more deletion will take place. 

Pressing 

CANCEL 

at any point in this process will return to the initial displayed 

state, without the modifier field. This will also be the case if 

CANCEL 

is used during 

entry of a timecode offset by the trackball. 




15.4 Labels 

Labels provide a means of identifying or tagging particular points in a 

programme which are significant to the user . They may, for example, be used to 

mark the start of each verse and chorus section, or perhaps to flag a point in the 

mix which needs later attention or an added effect. 

Labels are particularly important in locate operations, and a number of well 

placed labels in a mix can save a lot of time and frustration in timecode 

specification. 

15.4.1 The Label List 

To access the Label List 

Click the Label List Icon. 

The list is also displayed when a Locate is requested and can be made part of 

the application area background on the screen. 


Label List 

• Mark Label • 

0 00:02:30:00.0 ... ewrrewtyu 

Close 

Number Time Markers Label 

6 00:00:00:12.2 ....... Automate, Don't Hesitate 

• Reduction String • 

- 

• Operations • 

Create 

Delete 

Renumber 

Cancel 

Execute 

If timecode is running then the list will scroll to progress through the timecodes 

the labels have tagged. 

The Mark Label box shows the current timecode assigned to Label 0. 

The main list shows labels in timecode order. Each entry has a Label number 

(assigned by the system), the timecode the label refers to, any Markers on the 

label and the label name which can be blank. 




If any Markers are present then their meaning is as follows: 

S 

Segment marker 

A Segment marker is used to delimit sections of the 

programme. These Labels are displayed in graphical 

representations of the mix and can be useful locate points. 

They are also used by the Cycle function in the absence of 

Cycle From or To markers. 

Cycle From and To markers 

Used to specify the default start and end points for the Cycle 

function that enables a section of material to be replayed 

repeatedly. 

{} The Auto Record Punch In and Out points 

Auto Record Markers can be created to define the punch-in and 

punch-out times. 

[] Safety Net On and Off 

These markers are used to specify the section of programme 

when Dynamic Automation is enabled. 

To edit a label 

Click on the required label. 

To select labels in the list that are not shown 

Use the 

or 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

to move through the the list with the trackball. 

Type the first few letters of the label name. 

The letters will appear in the Reduction String box and the list will shrink to show 

only those labels starting with the letters typed. 

To edit labels when timecode is running 

Click in the title bar at the top of the label list where the word Unfrozen is 

shown. 

The title bar will display the word Frozen. 

The list will stop scrolling and labels can now be selected for editing. 

Click the title bar again to un-freeze the label list. 

The highlight will resume following the labels as timecode progresses. 




When the required label has been clicked 

The Editing Label dialogue box will be displayed. 

• Editing Label • Close 

Editing Label number - 23 

01:28:48:00.1 ... This is the label name 

Timecode Markers Label Name Cancel Execute 

To change the Timecode 

Click on the Timecode and enter it as described previously in Timecode 

Entry and Editing. 

To change the Markers 

Click on the Marker field. 

The Label Attributes dialogue box is displayed: 

• Label Attributes • Close 

Editing markers for label number 23 

Segment 

From marker 

To marker 

Auto Record Start 

Auto Record End 

Safety Net on 

Safety Net off 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click on the buttons for the required markers. 

Click Execute to finish. 

To edit the label name 

Click on the existing name. 

The Editing Label Name dialogue box will appear. 

• Editing Label Name • 

Close 

Editing label name of label number 2 

Cancel 

Execute 




Edit the name as required with the main keyboard. 

A name can have up to 32 characters with spaces and punctuation marks. Label 

names must begin with a letter. The name does not need to be unique. 

Press on the keyboard or the 

or 

EXECUTE 

key to save the new name. 

Press the 

CANCEL 

key to restart editing the name. 

To create a label through the screen 

Click the Create button. 

The Creating Label dialogue box is displayed. 

• Creating Label • 

Close 

Enter label number for new label 

16 

Cancel Execute 

The next available label number is supplied by default (this is the highest current 

label number plus one). 

To accept the default label number supplied 

Press the 

EXECUTE 

key. 

To change the number 

Roll the trackball left and right. 

Press the 

EXECUTE 

key. 

Note : 

If the number selected already exists then a dialogue box will 

appear to inform the user and the number must be changed to 

one that is not already used. 

To abort the operation 

Click a trackball key. 

Click the Close button. 




To delete a label from the list 


The button will turn yellow. The Create and Renumber buttons will no longer be 

available. 

Click on the required labels in the list. 



Click on the Execute or Cancel button. 

No other labels are affected when the item is removed from the list. 

To renumber labels 

Click the Renumber button. 

The button will turn yellow and the Create and Delete buttons will no longer be 

available. 

Click the required label in the list. 

The Renumbering dialogue box will appear. 

• Renumbering • Close 

•Dest• 

16 

• Space • 

1 


The Dest box is used to set the new label number and shows the next available 

label number by default. 

The Space box shows the default increment between the renumbered label and 

all subsequent label numbers currently in the list. 

E.g.: If there are four labels numbered 1,2,3,4 and label number 2 is renumbered 

to number 10 with spacing of 2 then the labels will be renumbered to: 1,10,12,14. 

Click the Dest box. 

Set the number by rolling the trackball or entering the number with the 

numeric keypad. 




Note : 

If the number selected already exists then a dialogue box will 

appear to inform the user and the number must be changed to 

one that is not already used. 


Click the Space box if an increment other than 1 is required, roll the trackball 

and click again to set. 


The labels will be renumbered as selected. 

Click the Renumber button again to end renumbering mode. 




15.4.2 Creating Labels 

NEW LABEL 

The key is used to create a label with the current timecode and the 

key is used to set the Mark Label to the current timecode. 

MARK 

To create a Label 

Press the 

NEW LABEL 

key. 

A new label will be instantly added to the label list and the Enter new label name 

dialogue box will appear. It is placed over the System Status Area of the screen. 

1 

• Enter new label name • 

The dialogue box shows the label number assigned to the new label. If the Label 

List screen is currently displayed then the user will see the new label inserted in 

NEW LABEL 

the list with the timecode at the point when the key was pressed. 

Use the keyboard to type in a name if a name is required. 

Further labels can be created by pressing the 

To remove the dialogue box from the screen 

NEW LABEL 

key as required. 

Press on the keyboard or the 

The MARK label 

EXECUTE 

key. 

The Mark Label is Label 0. It is useful as a temporary point of timecode which 

does not need to be permanently saved in the label list. If the Mark Label has not 

been updated yet then it will have a timecode of 00:00:00:00.0. 

To update the Mark Label 

Press the 

MARK 

key. 

Label 0 is displayed in a separate box above the main Label List as well as 

appearing in its correct timecode ordered position in the list. 




15.5 Cycle 

CYCLE 

When is pressed the tape machines on the autolocator will cycle between 

the timecodes on the labels with the From and To markers. 

The system can either rewind and stop when it reaches the From marker, or it 

can rewind and go directly into play. This option is selected in the Transport 

Control Configuration screen. 

15.5.1 To set the Cycle Mode 

Click on the CYCLE MODE button in the Tape Machine Configuration 

screen. 

The Cycle Mode Assignment dialogue box will be displayed. 

• CYCLE MODE ASSIGNMENT • 

Close 

REWIND AND STOP 

REWIND AND PLAY 

Click on the required button. 

The selected button will turn yellow and the other button will be blue. 





15.6 Auto Record 

The system provides a means of performing automatic punch-ins. In any one 

period of forward play the points at which the operator drops in and out of 

RECORD will be stored. Returning to the start of the section and pressing 

will cause the system to replay the store, dropping in and out of RECORD at the 

same times. In this way an overdub pass which had correct drop in and out 

points, but an incorrect performance, can be re-done by the artist with exactly 

the same timings. 

The system will only perform the equivalent of pressing RECORD while holding 

down PLAY, and will not modify the machine RECORD ENABLE status. In this 

way, drop-ins can be rehearsed if required with the machine SAFE, before 

finally committing to a take. 

Note that entering AUTO RECORD mode at a point which would be in the 

middle of a RECORD segment will not result in the machine going directly into 

RECORD. It is therefore important to start an AUTO RECORD pass prior to the 

first drop-in point. 

AUTO 

RECORD 

During an AUTO RECORD pass, the 

AUTO 

RECORD 

key will be illuminated. This mode will 

be cancelled immediately if the RECORD button is pressed, or if 

by itself. 

AUTO 

RECORD 

is pressed 

Starting a new PLAY pass and entering RECORD will delete any old stored 

drop-in points and start storing new timings. 

AUTO RECORD is always available, regardless of the state of the 

switch. 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

Editing the Auto Record drop-in time 

As an alternative to manually setting Auto Record drop-in and drop-out points, 

the Label List screen allows the operator to define and “fine tune” the the drop-in 

and drop-out times. 

Two labels must be created and each is given a special attribute to define the 

Auto Record drop-in and drop-out times. Existing labels can also be used by 

editing them and applying the Auto Record attributes. 

As with manual Auto Record mode, the must be pressed before the drop-in 

time. As timecode passes the drop-in time the Tape Machine will go into 

RECORD. 

AUTO 

RECORD 

There can only be one drop-in and one drop-out label defined. 




15.7 Locating 

Both sets of Transport Controls have a Locate facility, assuming the transports 

assigned to them can execute locate commands. Locate mainly uses the Label 

List for the timecode that will be located to, but a timecode can also be specified 

manually if necessary. The Soft Panel can also be used for quick locating to 

pre-defined points. 

The locate point used most recently is displayed above the current timecode 

display on the screen. 

To Locate 

Press the 

LOCATE 

key. 

The key will flash and the Locate To dialogue box will appear. 

• PRIMARY TRANSPORT • 

LOCATE TO: 

The dialogue box will indicate the PRIMARY or SECONDARY transport 

LOCATE 

controller according to which key was pressed. The full Label List will also 

be displayed on the screen a few seconds after the Locate To dialogue box. 

There are now several options: 

• Locate to the timecode used for the previous locate. 

• Select a label to locate to. 

• Enter a Timecode to locate to. 

To execute the Locate when the Locate To timecode has been selected 

Press the 

or 

> 

key to locate to the timecode and start to play. 

Press the or key to locate to the timecode and stop. 

EXECUTE || 

To abort the Locate command before the Locate is executed 

Press the 

CANCEL 

key. 




To locate to the timecode used for the previous locate 

> || 

Press the or key immediately. 

To interrupt a Locate operation once the tape has started 

running 

ALL 

STOP || > > 

Press or key. 

The Locate will be cancelled and the transport will execute the command 

according to the key pressed. 

or 

Press the 

LOCATE 

key again. 

The transport will stop and a new locate point can be selected. 

15.7.1 To locate to a Label 

To select a Label by number 

Enter a number key on the keyboard or numeric keypad. 

If the wrong number is entered, press the 

Execute the locate. 

LOCATE 

key again to clear the number. 

If the number exists in the label list then the transport will locate to the relevant 

timecode. If the number does not exist then the transport will locate to the last 

label. 

To select a Label by name 

Enter the first letters of the label name. 

This will have the same effect as selecting labels in the list with the Reduction 

String. That is, the list will shrink to show only those labels with the matching 

letters at the start of their names. 

The highlight on the list will select the first matching label by default. 

Either continue typing letters until only one label remains or roll the trackball 

up and down to highlight the required label. 





To select a Label from the List 

Roll the trackball up and down the list (when it has been displayed). 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

The key is automatically switched to Scroll mode when the Label List is 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

displayed so that the trackball can scroll through the whole list. The key is 

switched back to Cursor mode when the Label List is removed from the screen. 


15.7.2 To Locate to a Specific Timecode 

To enter a timecode to locate to 

Press the 

TIME 

key above the numeric keypad. 

The Locate To label dialogue box (and the Label List if it had appeared) will be 

removed from the screen and a standard timecode entry dialogue box will 

appear with the current timecode as the starting point. 

Edit the timecode as usual to produce the required Result timecode. 





15.7.3 To Locate using the Soft Panel 

Press [LOCATE] in the Entry Level Menu on the Soft Panel. 

The Locate Point menu will appear: 

HOLD 

EXIT 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

L5 

CLEAR 

L6 

L7 

L8 

L9 

L10 

DEF 

To Locate instantly 

Press one of the programmable keys. 

The default labels for the keys are [L1] through to [L10]. 

The transport defined on the key will locate to the specified timecode. The 

default is the Primary Transport to timecode 00:00:00:00.0. 

To define the Soft Panel Locate To settings 

Press the key labelled [DEF]. 

The Soft Panel will display a message “Nominate key for redefinition”. 

Press one of the programmable keys. 

The Soft Panel will prompt for the Primary or Secondary Transport Controller. 

Press the key labelled [PRIMARY] or [SECONDARY]. 

The Soft Panel will display a message instructing the user to use the VDU to set 

the required timecode. The screen will display the Label List. 

Select the label with the timecode which is nearest to the required timecode 

and click a trackball button. 

Control will be transferred to a standard timecode entry dialogue box. 

Adjust the timecode (if required) to the desired value. 

Press the 

EXECUTE 

key. 

The Soft Panel will ask if the transport should Stop or Play when the timecode 

has been located to. 




Press the key labelled STOP or PLAY as required. 

The Soft Panel will ask for the label to be displayed next to the key being defined. 

It will display the current label by default. 

Edit the label as required using the main keyboard and press . 

The new label will be displayed next to the key which was defined. If the key is 

pressed then the transport selected for the key will locate to the time specified. 




16 Automation Overview 

16.1 Introduction 

Capricorn provides full dynamic automation on virtually all controls and switch 

functions. All rotary and linear controls are touch sensitive so that manual 

moves can be written and instinctively updated. During playback, non–moving 

controls have displays to indicate their positions and faders are motorised. The 

operator can see the actual control settings at all times and is able to update 

settings without any key–presses or nulling. 

Automation data is stored in the system memory and is automatically 

backed–up onto the hard disk. Mixes can be copied from the hard disk to 

magneto-optical disks for safe keeping and to increase free space on the 

system. Each pass is stored in the automation system, which allows all previous 

passes and mixes to be rapidly retrieved. 

The fader position usually shows actual gain of the signal. However, a trim mode 

is provided for offsets to be added to an existing fader move. 

Changes to the controls contained in the following table are recorded against 

timecode as a pass update. When static data is changed (such as the 

configuration of the desk) the Initial Snapshot Store is updated and the whole of 

the mix is affected. 

Controls that can be 

Dynamically Automated 

Static settings contained in the 

Initial Snapshot Store 

Fader 

Mute 

Pan/Balance 

Aux Contribution 


EQ Controls 

Dynamics Controls (Limiter, 

Expander/Gate, Sidechain Filter) 

Filter Controls 

Width 

All In/Out Switch 

Numbers of each type of path 

Port Assignment 

Path Configuration (Mono/Stereo, position 

of EQ, Processing, etc.) 

Routing 

Fader and Bank Assignment 

Input Selection 

Mic/Line Gain and Trim 

Input Balance 

Insertion Point 

Cue Fader Level 




Automation Principles 

The automation system provided within Capricorn operates on a principle of 

“Relative” gain structures. For example when automation is turned on and the 

tape transport is run for the first time. The Initial Snapshot (ISS) is taken for all 

controls that are included within Session Scope. This has the advantage that if 

the basic mix is set up prior to automation being turned on for the first time, 

automation only has to run long enough for the I.S.S to be taken, and the mix 

balance is automatically written for the duration of the track. 

Likewise for Dynamic moves made with faders and rotary controls. At the time 

the automation pass stops, the current position of faders or rotary controls are 

also automatically written to the end of the mix. 

In addition the On state, or Off state of Mute or Switch transitions are also 

automatically written to the end of the mix. 

START 

OF 

MIX 

TAPE 

TRANSPORT 

STOPPED 

END 

OF 

MIX 

I.S.S. 

CONTROL 

MOVES 

CONTROL POSITION 

CARRIED FORWARD 

TIMECODE 

Note: This means that if the transport is subsequently located to a period within 

the mix extent, the moves in the previous pass are updated and automation is 

stopped without Matching controls to the Play Pass position then the offset 

values of the controls moved will be added to all subsequent mix values. 

I.S.S. 

START 

OF 

MIX 

CONTROL 

TOUCHED 

CONTROL 

RELEASED 

UPDATE REGION 

TAPE 

TRANSPORT 

STOPPED 

PLAY 

PASS 

END 

OF 

MIX 

OFFSET 

TIMECODE 




16.2 Automation Controls 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

The automation system is controlled by the key which acts as a toggle. 

When automation is OFF, no new automation data is recorded and no previous 

data is replayed. 

Automation can only be turned on if a project directory has been opened 

because the system needs to know where to place the recorded data. If no 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

directory is currently open the key will flash and the system is ready to 

start the project logon procedure. On successful completion of this, the 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

automation system is activated and the is illuminated. Any control moves 

now made on the console are recorded against timecode and any previous 

moves can be replayed depending on the individual control settings. 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

To turn off Automation press the key so that it is no longer illuminated. 

Any outstanding mix update is saved to disk. The current play pass number is 

recorded with the mix data so that the user may return to the same point in the 

mixing process. 

The system subdivides the automation control so that Faders and Mutes can be 

independently controlled. The controls that are going to be influenced by 

automation are defined by Scope, i.e. which signals and controls are 

automated. 

16.2.1 Path Automation Controls 

REC > 

GLIDE 

The and keys below the function selector set the automation mode for 

all functions on a Path Strip except Mutes and Faders. This includes setting the 

automation modes for the strip FACs and their associated switches. These 

controls will also control the automation modes for all functions that may be 

automated on the AFU when a path is Accessed. The AFU automation keys 

provide the same functionality as the Strip automation keys. 

The Faders and Mutes have separate controls to set their automation modes. 

FDR 

PLAY 

FDR 

REC 

PLAY 

REC 

TRIM 

GLIDE 

MUTE 

PLAY 

MUTE 

REC 

Faders , Mutes , Strip 

COL 

TOUCH 

GLIDE 

There are also dedicated global automation keys for faders and mutes on the 

Monitor section. 

COL 

TOUCH 

The key affects all controls on a Path Strip, including Faders, Mutes and 

controls on the AFU for the currently Accessed path. 




16.2.2 AFU Automation Controls 

The AFU automation controls 

duplicate the functionality of the Strip 

automation controls. 

AFU 

AUTOMATION MODE 

PLAY 

RECORD 

COLLECT 

TOUCH 

GLIDE 

16.2.3 Global Automation Controls 

Global Mode control keys are provided in the monitor section for Faders and 

Mutes. In addition a separate set of global mode keys are provided to control all 

other rotary and switch controls that may be dynamically automated except 

Faders and Mutes. 

GLIDE 

Separate global keys are 

provided for Faders and Rotary 

controls, and global Match keys are 

provided for Mutes and all switches. 

ALL MATCH 

In addition an key is provided 

that may be used to simultaneously 

glide and switch all controls to the 

play pass position. 

When a Global Mode is selected, all 

controls are set to that mode and the 

locally selected mode is overridden. 

GLOBAL AUTOMATION CONTROL 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

PLAY 

COL 

TOUCH 

MUTE 

PLAY 

FDR 

PLAY 

TRIM 

MIX 

- 

REC 

GLIDE 

MUTE 

REC 

FDR 

REC 

GLIDE 

ALL MATCH 

MIX 

+ 

SW 

MATCH 

MUTE 

MATCH 

PLAY SAFE 

RECORD 

TO END 

AUTOMATION 

SCOPE 

REHEARSE 

MASTER 

RECORD 

PASS 

- 

QUICK 

STORE 

PASS 

+ 

The global automation controls are divided into sub-sections for switches, 

AUTOMATION 

mutes, faders and all. At the top of the section are ON 

PLAY SAFE 

and keys for 

enabling or disabling the automation system and record modes. 




16.3 Scope 

Not all controls have to be automated, and so the operator can reduce the scope 

of the automation system. 

Scope provides the facility to reduce the number of controls that are recognised 

by automation data, stores, or offline edit list information. 

In the case of automation it may be desirable to reduce which controls are 

recognised by automation. Controls that are not “dynamically” automated are 

still recognised by the initial snapshot. Therefore they will always return to the 

state or position they were at when the initial snapshot was taken each time a 

new “pass” is started, if they are included within Automation scope. 

For example, if routing changes are made after the initial snapshot is taken, the 

routing will switch back to its original state when an automation pass is started. 

Faders and Mutes that are not in Automation Scope do not have their 

Automation Modes displayed. 

Scope can also be set for Stores (see the Stores chapter). 

The user can select the scope for: 

Automation This defines the range of controls that are included within 

automation in the current mixing session. 

Mix Edit 

List 

Mute List 

This defines the range of controls that are to be affected by the 

off–line editing functions. 

The user can define 6 independent lists to show switch 

automation states for a range of selected signal paths. 

This selects the channels that are displayed in the Mute List. 

CH/SW List This selects the channels that are displayed in the Channel 

Switch list. 




16.4 Automation Modes 

Touch Record 

Touch Record is the default mode that all controls that may be dynamically 

automated set themselves to when the system is powered up for the first time. 

In Touch Record mode, a control replays moves from the play pass until the 

control is touched. The control then starts to record moves until it is released. 

The control then continues to replay moves, with an offset added according to 

the difference in the play position and the control setting when it was released. 

Record 

A control in Record will play back moves until it is touched. When a control is 

touched, the setting will be recorded as it is changed. When the control is 

released, it will continue to record the setting it was left at until the end of the 

pass. 

Play 

The Play mode is used to play back a previously recorded mix pass. If controls 

are moved the effect will be heard but will not be recorded. 

Play Safe 

The Play safe mode is used to play back a previously recorded mix pass. If 

controls are moved the effect will not be heard, and a new Record pass will not 

be created. 

Isolate 

In this mode the controls are isolated from the automation system and will not 

playback the automation data or record new data. 

Auto Glide 

A fader or rotary control in Auto Glide will replay moves until it is touched, record 

moves while in touch and then automatically match to the play pass position 

when it is released. 

Manual Glide 

Manual Glide allows Faders and rotary controls in Record, Touch Record, Play 

or Trim mode to be matched back to the previous play pass position and to 

continue replaying dynamic moves. 




Auto Takeover 

Auto Takeover allows faders and rotary controls in Record or Touch Record to 

be manually matched to the play pass position without using the nulling 

indicators. The control is held and its Glide key is pressed. The control is then 

moved until it moves through the play pass position, at which point it will drop out 

of record. 

Record To End 

Record To End causes any controls which are in Record mode to write their 

current settings to the end of the current pass when the transport is stopped. 

Trim 

Trim mode is only available on Faders. 

Trim mode is used to add an offset to any previously recorded fader moves 

without effecting the dynamic structure of the moves. 

Auto Join, Auto Glide Out and Safety Stop 

These modes are enabled and disabled in the Options screen accessed from 

Miscellaneous Setup. They determine how moves are written to the end of the 

pass after the transport is stopped for controls in Record. 

Auto Join causes a control to snap back to the play pass at the next move of the 

control. Auto Glide Out causes a glide to continue to be written after transport is 

stopped, until the control matches the play pass. Auto Join and Auto Glide Out 

can be enabled at the same time, but Auto Glide Out will take precedence. 

Safety Stop causes all controls in Record to match back to the play pass with a 

glide rate of 1 frame when the transport is stopped. It can not be combined with 

Auto Join or Auto Glide Out. 

16.4.1 Collect Touch 

Collect Touch allows any number of pre-selected controls to be armed for 

MASTER 

RECORD 

Record before a new pass is created. The key is used to drop the 

collected controls into Record. The function can be set to Once Only or Latched, 

and this is shown in the system status area of the screen. 

In Once Only, the controls selected for Collect Touch will drop back into the 

playback state as soon as the current pass ends. 

In Latched operation, the controls will stay in Record during successive passes 

until Collect Touch is turned off. 




16.5 Mixes, Passes and the Mix Tree 

The basic principle of the Capricorn Automation system is that all Mix/Passes 

are kept. 

Working Mix/Passes are kept in RAM and all modifications to a Mix are 

performed in RAM. As a background task, the system transfers data between 

RAM and the hard disk. The circular gauge in the bottom of the screen shows the 

amount of available RAM. 


Automation 

Status 

Display 

Collect 

Touch 

Status 

System 

Wordclock 

Display 

Timecode 

Capture 

Box 

Current/ 

Held 

Path 

Hold 

Button 

Free RAM 

99% 

AUTO ON 

XFade 

Man Glide 

Auto Glide 

ONCE ONLY 48 00:00:00:00.0 

INT 

STOP 

Play Pass: 

Rec Pass: 

I12 

HOLD 

00:24:30:12.0 

Free 

RAM 

Display 

Glide 

Times 

Display 

Current 

Pass 

Display 


16.5.1 Mixes and Passes 

Mix/Pass Numbers 

The Mix/Pass number is displayed and used in the form mix.pass (e.g. 3.17). 

Each part of the number can be in the range 1 to 99, giving a maximum 99 mixes 

by 99 passes. 

The first Mix/Pass in a Title is 0.0. This is a static starting point with no dynamic 

automation data. When Timecode is received and the first move is recorded, the 

first record Mix/Pass will be 1.1. 

Initial Snapshot 

An automation mix structure (a Mix Tree) is based on the Initial Snapshot (ISS). 

The Initial Snapshot is associated with Mix/Pass 0.0. 

When automation is turned on for the first time a snapshot is taken of the current 

position of every control and switch, including those controls that are not 

dynamically automated. All subsequent dynamic automation moves are based 

on the ISS. 

The ISS is taken for controls irrespective of which automation mode they are in, 

including Isolate. 




The ISS is even taken for controls that are not included in Automation Scope. 

Therefore controls that are put into Automation Scope after automation has 

started will be set to their ISS positions when the next Play Pass is started. 

Play and Record Passes 

During mixing, the mix data that is being replayed onto the control surface 

comes from the Play Pass. If updates are made by the user then the data 

generated by those updates is combined with the Play Pass data to become the 

Record Pass. The Play and Record Pass numbers are displayed on the screen. 

The Record Pass number will only be created when new data is produced by 

moving (or touching) an automated control or when an off-line edit is executed. 

Every time the tape is started and a control is updated then a new pass is 

created. The Mix and Pass numbers are incremented depending on which 

numbers have already been used and what the numbers for the Play Pass are. 

The first Mix/Pass (from the base mix 0.0) will be 1.1. 

Note that Mix 0.0 is special because it is the start of the mix and contains a 

snapshot of the configuration of the desk but no dynamic automation data. 

A Record Pass is the data gathered during a single continuous period of Play. 

The times when the record pass starts and stops are not confined to those of the 

play pass. 

If the transport (and timecode) is stopped and then started the current record 

pass becomes the play pass, and a new record pass will be created if changes 

are made on the control surface. If no changes are made the pass is ignored. 

At any time during the mixing process the mix has defined boundaries in time. 

The start and end of a mix are the earliest and latest points for which data has 

been recorded or generated by editing. So if the transport rewinds to a point 

before the current start of the mix then the system will move the initial snapshot 

backwards in time. 




16.5.2 The Mix Tree 

The Capricorn Automation system allows the user to select any previous 

Mix/Pass as the current Play Pass. 

This leads to a structure of data which can branch at many points and is called 

the Mix Tree. The root of the tree is always the Initial Snapshot 0.0. 

A Mix Tree is built up as new passes are created and the Tree is displayed 

graphically as follows: 

Mix Tree 

Close 

0.0 

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 

2.1 2.2 2.3 

Home 

Delete 

Display 

Milestone 

Compress 

Text 

Cancel 

Execute 

The current play pass is shown in green. Milestone mixes (see below) are 

indicated by a thick circle. 

The ‘parenthood’ of updates can be clearly seen from this form of presentation 

but as the mix tree becomes large, it will not all fit on the screen. The screen is 

arranged to act as a window into the tree, and the user can scroll left-right and 

up-down by using the trackball in SCROLL mode. Alternatively the operator can 

request an abbreviated form of display by clicking on the DISPLAY box. 

The mix tree display can be shown as a background display so that it is visible 

while other applications are not active. 

The buttons on the Mix Tree screen provide the following options: 

HOME 

DISPLAY 

DELETE 

MILESTONE 

COMPRESS 

Moves the display window back to the start, showing 

pass 0.0 

Toggles between full and brief display modes 

Delete one or more mix tree nodes 

Mark a mix/pass as a milestone 

Provides the facility to reduce the size of the mix tree 




16.6 Automation Data Storage 

As previously described the system has a large hard disk to hold system 

configuration data, Node processor Instruction data and dynamic automation 

data. Data on the hard disk can be transferred to a Magneto–Optical Disk. 

The hard disk is partitioned into three areas: System, User and Project. These 

partitions are maintained by the System Manager who requires a password to 

enable him (in addition to AMS Neve service engineers) to access the various 

housekeeping functions such as deleting and moving data. 

The System Partition contains all the files needed for running the system, and is 

not directly accessible to the user. The User Partition holds configuration data 

which defines how the system is set up, users can log on to recall or save their 

own personal configuration stores. The Project Partition contains the dynamic 

automation data in a hierarchical structure for each client. 

Project Partition 

The Project Partition contains client information and all the system 

configurations, mix data, cue lists and notes for particular jobs. The partition is 

sub-divided into Client directories, beneath which are Project directories 

containing snapshots (Stores). Projects are then further sub-divided into Titles 

(e.g. tracks on an album). 

A Title contains the automation data in a Mix Tree and a complete configuration 

store. Every time a new Title is created a new configuration store will be made. 

The system also provides a default ‘scratch mix’ directory which is available for 

general use. This may be convenient for quick, unplanned excursions into 

automated operation which do not need their data preserved. 

TITLE1 

MIX0.0 

MIX TREE 

PROJECT1 

TITLE2 

MIX0.0 

MIX TREE 

CLIENT 

TITLE1 

MIX0.0 

MIX TREE 

PROJECT2 

TITLE2 

MIX0.0 

MIX TREE 




Client directories and sub-directories can be created by any user. Client data 

can be password protected in the same way as user data. 

Client/Project/Title Log-On 

• Current Client/Project • 

Client: 

Project: 

Title: 

Paul 

Multi 

Default 

• Known Clients • 

PASSWORD 

Close 

Clients 

Projects 

Titles 

Default 05 Nov 92 16:23:12 


• Safety Store • • Current Config • 

Recall Update Recall 

Copy 

Cancel 

LOG OUT 

Execute 

Note: 

Project and Title directories and sub-directories can be deleted 

by any user. Client directories can only be deleted by the 

System Manager. 




17 Automation Operations 

17.1 Automation Quick Start 

The following steps allow a first Mix/Pass to be made: 

Select or create an appropriate console setup (how many paths, path 

processing, bank assignment, routing, etc.) if the current setup is not as 

required. 

Note : 

See the Configuration chapters. 

Set the Automation Scope to All Controls and All Paths. 

(Click the Scope icon or press SCOPE on the Soft Panel Entry Menu. 

Click the AUTOMATION button or press AUTO on the Soft Panel 

Scope Menu. 

Click the ALL CONTROLS button. 

Click the ALL PATHS button. 

Click Execute or press AUTO again on the Soft Panel Scope Menu.) 

Press the 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

key. 

The Client/Project/Title Log On screen will be displayed. 



Client: 

Project: 

Title: 

Paul 

Multi 

Default 


PASSWORD 

Close 

Clients 

Projects 

Titles 

Default 05 Nov 92 16:23:12 




Copy 

LOG OUT 


Select or create the Client/Project/Title to be worked on. 

Note : 

Select the Default Client to create an instant ‘scratch mix’. Click 

the Execute button on the Scratch Mix dialogue boxes which 

will appear. 

Automation will now be turned on. 




If this is a new Title (or a scratch mix), then faders and mutes will be in Touch 

Record and all other controls will be in Play by default. 

Put the Transport into play. 

Timecode should start running on the screen. 

Make moves to controls as required. 

A new Record Pass will be created. 

Stop the Transport. 

The Record Pass will be saved and added to the Mix Tree. 

The Record Pass will become the Play Pass. 




17.2 Automation Data 

17.2.1 Starting the Automation System 

Automation data is stored in a Mix Tree. Each Mix Tree is stored in a Title. The 

automation system cannot be switched on until the operator has selected or 

created a Title to work with. This is done with the Client/Project/Title Log-On 

screen. 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

Automation is toggled on and off by the key. When automation is off then 

no new automation data is recorded and no data is replayed. 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

If the key is pressed when no Title has been selected then the 

Client/Project/Title Log-On screen will be displayed automatically and the 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

key will flash. When a Title is logged on then the automation system is 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

activated and the key illuminates solid. Control moves can then be 

replayed and recorded against timecode. 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

To turn off automation press the key. Any outstanding mix update is 

saved to disk so the user can return to the same point in the mixing process. 

17.2.2 Using Titles 

To display Client/Project/Title Log-On screen 


or 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

key. 

Click the Client icon. 

The Client/Project/Title Log-On screen will be displayed. Clients will be shown in 

the list. 



Client: 

Project: 

Title: 

Paul 

Multi 

Default 


PASSWORD 

Default 05 Nov 92 16:23:12 

Close 

Clients 

Projects 

Titles 




Copy 

LOG OUT 





To select a Title to work with 

Click the required Client in the list. 

If the Client is protected by a password then a dialogue box will be displayed for 

entering the password. Type in the password on the keyboard and press 

or click Execute. 

The Projects stored within the Client will be displayed. 

Click the required Project in the list. 

The Titles stored within the Project will be displayed. The Store List for the 

Project will be loaded. 

Click the required Title. 

The configuration and Mix Tree stored in the Title will be loaded. The system will 

allow automation to be switched on. 

To create a Client, Project or Title 

Click the Add button when the required list is displayed. 

A dialogue box will appear for entry of the name. 

Enter a unique name using the keyboard. 

The name can be up to 36 characters long. A Client name must be unique on the 

system. A Project name must be unique within a Client. A Title name must be 

unique within a Project. 

Press to save the new name. 

A new Client will automatically have a Project name Default. A new Project will 

automatically have a Title named Default. 

Default Client 

Every time a Client is being selected the Default client is highlighted 

automatically. By repeatedly clicking on Default at each level, the operator will 

quickly start an automation mix store in a scratch-pad area. 

To set a Password for a Client 

When a Client has been created or selected: 

Click the large PASSWORD button. 




If no password already exists then the following dialogue box is displayed: 

• Password Entry • 

Close 

Enter new password for : 

"System Manager" 

Cancel 

Execute 

Enter a password with at least 6 characters and no more than 12. 

The password will not be echoed to the screen as it is typed. 

Press or click Execute. 


Re-enter the password and press or click Execute. 

Two successive identical entries are required to confirm a new password. 

The system will now request a password each time the Client is opened. 

The password will only be requested once when opening the Client, and not 

every time a storage operation is performed. All attempts to access the data 

from outside of the directory will require the appropriate password to be entered. 

Password protection is not permitted on the Default Client. 

To remove a password 

Log on to the Client and provide the existing password as part of the process. 

Click the PASSWORD button. 

Instead of typing in a password, press the space bar once each in the 

password entry dialogue box and in the confirmation dialogue box, followed 

each time by or Execute. 

The password will be removed. 

To rename a Client, Project or Title 

Click the Rename button when the required item is displayed in the list. 

Note: 

The Client must be the current Client in order to be renamed. 

Click the item to be renamed. 




A name entry dialogue box will appear. 

Type in the new name and press or click Execute. 

The name is immediately changed in the list. 

Click the Rename button again to turn it off. 

To delete a Client, Project or Title 

Note: 

Projects and Titles can be deleted when logged on as any user. 

Client directories may only be deleted when logged on as 

System Manager. See Getting Started. 

Click the Delete button when the required list of items is displayed. 

Click the item to be deleted. 



Note: 

Deleting a Client will automatically delete all Projects and Titles 

under the selected Client. Likewise deleting a Project will delete 

all Titles under the selected Project. 

To Copy a Title 

The Copy function is only available when a title has been selected to work with. 


The Copy Title dialogue box will be displayed for a new name. 

Copy From 

Client: Them 

Project: Theirs 

Title: Something 

Copy From 

Client: Them 

Project: Theirs 

Title: Something different 

Make CPP Mix 1.1 

Cancel 

Close 

Execute 

Enter the name for the copied Title. 

The name must be unique within the Project and can be up to 36 characters 

long. 




If required, click the Make CPP Mix 1.1 button. 

The button will turn yellow to indicate that it is active. This causes the current 

Play Pass to be copied to the new Title as Mix/Pass 1.1. 

Press or click Execute to confirm the name. 

The title will be copied without affecting the currently loaded title. 

Current Config Update 

If changes are made to the Configuration that is stored by a Title (e.g. adding 

processing, changing the number of paths, changing port routing, etc.) then the 

changes are automatically saved in the Configuration. 

However, changes to control positions are not automatically saved in the 

Configuration because these changes are automatically saved in the Mix Tree. 

To save control changes in a Title Configuration 

Click the Current Config Update button. 

Safety Store 

As a safety back up, the system automatically takes a static store of the 

console's control positions approximately every 15 minutes. The interval for 

taking a Safety Store can be changed in the Options in the Miscellaneous Setup 

screen (see the Miscellaneous Setup chapter). 

The Safety Store is unaffected by Scope as it is a desk wide operation. 

To use the Safety Store in the event of a system failure 

Recall the Configuration. 

Click the Safety Store Recall button. 

If you wish the control positions from the safety store to be updated within the 

Mix Tree, the control positions will need to be recorded by using the Collect 

Touch function. 




17.3 Scope 

To set Scope 

Click the SCOPE icon. 


SCOPE MENU 

Close 

AUTOMATION 

NEW STORE 

SET STORE 

MIX EDIT 

LIST 1 

LIST 2 

LIST 3 

LIST 4 

LIST 5 

COLLECT TOUCH 

MUTE LIST 

CH/SW LIST 

Click on the button for the required type of Scope. 


be displayed for the type of Scope selected: 

ACCESS 

keys will flash and a screen will 

AUTOMATION 

COPY BY PATH 

ALL CONTROLS 

ALL PATHS 

NO CONTROLS 

NO PATHS 

FADER MUTE PAN\WTH PANLAW 

EQ LMTR COMP EXPGATE 

FILTER INSERT TK CONT 

AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 




• ISS CONTROLS ONLY • 

I/O 

OPTIONS 

INFO 

ROUTING 

DELAY 

EVENTS 

CLEAR SCOPE 

Input 

Group 

Aux 

Cancel 

Close 

• VALID SCOPE PATHS • 

Inp 1 : I 1 

Inp 2 : I 2 

Mon 1 : MN 1 

Mon 2 : MN 2 

Grp 1 : GP 1 

Grp 2 : GP 2 

Out 1 : OP 1 

Out 2 : OP 2 

Aux 1 : AX 1 

Aux 2 : AX 2 

Montor 

Output 

VCA 

Execute 

The OPTIONS button is only available in the Automation Scope screen. 

The ISS Controls (I/O and Routing) are only available in Automation and Store 

Scope screens (see the Stores chapter for more information on Stores). 




To select a Scope screen with the Soft Panel 

Press the SCOPE key on the Soft 

Panel Main Menu. 

LOCATE BACKGR LIST 

SCOPE 

HOLD 

EXIT 


MANUAL 

AUTO XFADE EVENTS 

more... 

The Soft Panel will display the 

SCOPE MENU. 

Auto Set St Mute 

New St Mix Ed 

SCOPE MENU 

Ch/Sw 

HOLD 

EXIT 

List1 

List2 

List3 

List4 

List5 

Collct 

Press the Soft Panel key corresponding to the required Scope screen. 

The selected screen will be displayed and the Soft Panel SCOPE MENU will 

indicate the selection. 


ACCESS 

keys will flash. 

Scope screens can be switched freely using the Soft Panel. The current screen 

can be removed by pressing its key on the Soft Panel again. 

17.3.1 Specifying Scope 

Scope can be set by selecting a control (or all controls) and then selecting which 

paths to put in Scope for that control, or by selecting a path and then selecting 

which controls to put in Scope for that path. 

The Scope screen will show the existing Scope for controls or paths when they 

are first selected. 

Note: 

Faders and Mutes that are not in Automation Scope do not 

have their Automation Modes displayed. 

17.3.2 To set Scope by Control 

Click the button for the required processing function or aux, or touch the 

required control on the AFU. 

The selected button will turn yellow and the touch LED for the control will 

illuminate on the AFU. 




Only one control can be selected at a time with this method. 

The box above the COPY BY PATH button will display Setting By Control. 

When selecting a control on the AFU, touching any touch sensitive control or 

pressing a key to put it in touch will select a whole function. For instance, any of 

the rotary controls or any of the keys in the EQ section will select EQ for Scope. 

or 


All the control buttons will turn yellow and the touch LEDs for all controls will 

illuminate on the AFU. 

The box above the COPY BY PATH button will display Applying ALL Controls. 

To de-select all controls 

Click the NO CONTROLS button. 

All the control buttons will turn blue. Individual controls can be selected again. 

In both cases 

The paths which are already in Scope for the selected (or all) control will be 

ACCESS 

highlighted in the Valid Scope Paths list, and the keys for any of those 

paths in Scope that are on the surface will be illuminated. 

To toggle paths in and out of Scope for the selected control 

Click the path in the Valid Scope Paths list. 

or 

Press the 

paths). 

ACCESS 

keys for the required paths. (Use Bank selection for hidden 




17.3.3 To set Scope by Path 

Click the required path in the Valid Scope Paths list. 

or 

Press the 

ACCESS 


The box above the COPY BY PATH button will display Setting By Path. 

Click the buttons or touch controls on the AFU for the controls which are to be 

in Scope for the selected path. 

The buttons will turn yellow and the touch LEDs will illuminate. 

To copy Scope control selections between paths 

Click the COPY BY PATH button. 

The currently selected path will appear in a box next to the button. 

Click the paths in the Valid Scope Paths list to copy the settings to. 

The paths will be highlighted and their Scope settings will be changed. 

17.3.4 To put the whole console into Scope 


Click the ALL PATH button. 

Note : 

Note: 

This automatically activates the COPY BY PATH button. Click 

the button off if it is necessary to make further changes to 

Scope before Executing the changes. 

This does not include I/O, Routing or Delay scope for the ISS. 

These must be added to Scope separately, if required. 




17.3.5 To include Relay Events in Scope 

Click the EVENTS button so that it turns yellow. 

To save the changes to Scope settings 



• Confirmation • 

Execute will use displayed paths/params 


Click Execute to confirm changes, or Cancel to ignore changes. 

To start again from the current Scope settings 

Click Cancel. 



The Scope will be reset to the settings present when the screen was opened. 

To set Scope from scratch 

Click the CLEAR SCOPE button. 




17.3.6 Scope Information 

Click the INFO button. 

The Scope Map Display will appear. 

• SCOPE MAP DISPLAY • 

FADER 

MUTE 

PAN\WTH 

EQ 

LIMITER 

COMP 

EXPGATE 

FILTER 

IO 

DELAY 

INSERT 

ROUTING 

TK CONT 

PAN LAW 

Close 

I I1 

I I2 

I I3 

I I4 

I I5 

I I6 

I I7 

I I8 

I I9 

I I10 

I I11 

I I12 

I I13 

I I14 

I I15 

I I16 

I I17 

I I18 

I I19 

I I20 

I I21 

I I22 

I I23 

I I24 

M MN1 

M MN2 

M MN3 

M MN4 

M MN5 

M MN6 

M MN7 

M MN8 

M MN9 

M MN10 

M MN11 

M MN12 

M MN13 

M MN14 

M MN15 

M MN16 

M MN17 

M MN18 

Press the 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key to move the grid and show additional paths. 

Click on Close to return to the scope screen. 

Automation Scope Options 

In Automation scope, the OPTIONS button at the bottom of the screen is 

available. 

Click on OPTIONS to display the following Automation Scope options : 

• Store scopes • 

Close 

No change to Store Scopes 

Add additions to Store Scopes 

Overwrite Store Scopes 

• Other scopes • 

No change to other Scopes 

Add additions to other Scopes 

Overwrite other Scopes 

• New Automation Scope Controls • 

Automatic Update of ISS Settings 

Use Current ISS Settings 

Cancel 

Execute 




Store Scopes and Other Scopes 

These options allow the Scope settings for New and Set Store and all other 

Scopes to be kept in line with Automation Scope. 

No change 

The Scope settings will not be forced to be in line with Automation Scope. 

Add additions 

If controls and paths are added to Automation Scope then they will also be 

added to the Store and/or Other Scope settings as selected. 

Overwrite 

The Store and/or Other Scope settings will be forced to be the same as the 

Automation Scope every time that Automation Scope is saved. 

New Automation Scope Controls 

This selects whether or not the ISS will be updated when the Automation Scope 

is changed. If Automatic Update of ISS Settings is selected then a new ISS will 

be made of the console settings when the Automation Scope is saved. 




17.4 Managing Mixes and Passes 

17.4.1 The Mix Tree 

To display the Mix Tree 

Click on the MIX TREE Icon 

The Mix Tree screen will be displayed. 

Mix Tree 

Close 

0.0 

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 

2.1 2.2 2.3 

Home 

Delete 

Display 

Milestone 

Compress 

Text 

Cancel 

Execute 

The current Play Pass is shown in green. Milestone mixes are indicated by a 

thick yellow circle. 

The screen is a window onto the Tree and can be scrolled across the Tree by 

using the trackball in Scroll mode. Also, the Tree can be abbreviated with the 

Display button. 

The Mix Tree screen can be used as a background display so that it is visible 

when other functions are not active. 

The buttons on the Mix Tree screen provide the following options: 

Home Moves the display window back to Mix/Pass 0.0 

Display Toggles between full and abbreviated Tree displays 

Delete 

Delete one or more Mix Tree nodes to reduce clutter, 

and/or 

recover automation data storage space 

Milestone Mark a Mix/Pass as a milestone 

Compress Provides the facility to reduce the size of the mix tree 

Text Show the Mix Tree in text form. 




To abbreviate the Mix Tree 

Click the Display button. 

This causes long chains of continuously numbered passes to be collapsed so 

that only the pass at each end of the chain is displayed on the screen. A dashed 

line will connect pairs of passes which have a series of passes in between. 

No data is affected by abbreviating the display. 

The first and last pass of every mix and all milestone passes will be shown. 

To expand the Mix Tree again 

Click the Display button again. 

Mix Compress 

Mix Compress provides the facility to compress any number of Mix Passes 

within the mix tree into a single Mix Pass. This reduces the size of the tree by 

combining any number of spurious passes into a single unit. 

To compress Mix/Passes 

Click the Compress button. 

The button turns yellow. 

Click on the Mix/Pass which is to be the Base Mix. 

The Mix/Pass will turn yellow. 

Click the end point for the set of passes to be compressed. 

That Mix/Pass will also turn yellow. All the Mix/Passes between the two end 

points will turn blue to show what will be compressed. 


A warning dialogue box will advise that the operation cannot be undone. 

Click Execute to perform the Compression. 

The Base Mix and intermediate passes will be compressed into the end Mix. 

Note: 

The current Mix Pass, Milestone Mixes and side shoots cannot 

be compressed. Unwanted side shoots should be Deleted 

before Compressing the tree. 




To Delete a Mix/Pass 


Click the Mix/Pass to be deleted. 

This will set the selected Mix/Pass and all subsequent passes to be deleted. 

The passes to be deleted will be highlighted and a dialogue box will appear for 

confirmation. 


The items will be deleted. The operation cannot be undone. The Mix/Pass 

numbers will be re-used as necessary. 

Note : 

The current Mix/Pass and Milestone mixes cannot be deleted. 

To Delete an entire Mix Tree 

The operator may wish to Delete the entire Mix Tree. If the Mix Tree is deleted, 

the Initial Snapshot is also deleted. 

This may be useful if the operator wishes to record an automated Mix of the 

same Title, at the same Time Code period but with a completely different Mix 

structure to the first Mix including a completely different snapshot. 

To delete the Mix Tree 

Click on HOME to position the Tree at Mix 0.0, or use the Mix/Pass keys to 

select Mix/Pass 0.0. 

Click on DELETE and EXECUTE. 

You will be asked to confirm before Deleting the entire Tree. 

Note: 

You cannot delete the Mix Tree if Milestones are present. 




17.4.2 Milestone Mixes 

The purpose of a Milestone Mix is to mark a particular Mix/Pass as significant, 

such as being kept as a reference point for further work. 

Creating a milestone mix also creates a Milestone Store which is added to the 

end of the Store List. 

Milestone Mixes are protected from compress and delete operations and are 

identified by a thick yellow circle in the Mix Tree display. 

Mix Notes can be used to record the reason for marking a mix as a milestone. 

To mark a Milestone Mix 

Click the Milestone button. 

Click the required mix. 

A thick yellow circle will be displayed around the mix. 

A milestone store will be added to the end of the Store List. A milestone store is 

not restricted by Scope and contains the control positions for every path. The 

store description will contain the current Title, the Mix/Pass number and the 

name of the Mix/Pass . 

See the Stores chapter for further information on the Store List. 

To un-mark a Milestone Mix 

Click the Milestone button. 

Click the milestone mix to un-mark. 

The yellow circle will be removed from the mix. 

Note: 

Un-marking a mix does not remove or affect the store created 

when the mix was originally marked as milestone. 




17.4.3 Mix Tree Notes 

This function allows Mix/Passes to be named and have notes associated with 

them. 

To name a Mix/Pass and add notes to it 

Click once on a Mix/Pass in the Mix Tree. 

The Mix Notes entry screen will be displayed: 

• Entry of Text for selected Mix/Pass • Close 

Execute 

Execute 

Note: 

Mix/Pass 0.0 is named ISS (for Initial SnapShot) and the name 

and text cannot be edited. 

The cursor will be flashing in the name box. 

Enter a name for the Mix/Pass of up to 4 characters. 

The name does not need to be unique. An existing name may be edited. 

Move to the notes box by clicking on it or by pressing TAB on the keyboard. 

Enter up to 48 characters of notes for the Mix/Pass (or edit the existing text). 

Note: 

Each press of the TAB key will jump the cursor from one text 

box to the other. 

Click on EXECUTE. 

The 4 character entry will be displayed in the respective Mix/Pass Icon in the Mix 

Tree. 




17.4.4 Mix Tree Text 

There are two ways to view text entered against a Mix/Pass. 

Click on the Mix/Pass Icon to display the text entry dialogue box shown 

above. 

OR 

Click the Text button. 

The Mix Tree text screen will be displayed: 

•MixTree• 

Close 

PASS TEXT DATE CREATED MILESTONE 

0.0 ISS 3/12/96 at 16:21:16 

1.1 MM1 3/ 1/97 at 19:18:16 

Multimedia mix 1 

2.1 MIL1 6/ 1/97 at 14:15:23 

Milestone 1 

YES 

NEXT 

PREV 

FIRST 

LAST 

This screen displays Mix/Passes with text against them and those marked as 

Milestones (YES in the MILESTONE column). This is so that only mix/passes 

which have significance will appear on this screen. 

Note: 

No editing of text or the milestone attribute may take place in 

this screen. 

The buttons at the bottom of the screen are used to navigate through the list. 

NEXT displays the next screenful of the list and PREV displays the previous 

screenful. FIRST displays the top of the list (from Mix/Pass 0.0) and LAST 

displays the end of the list. 

Click on Close to return to the Mix/Pass Tree. 




17.5 Play Pass Selection 

The play pass number is normally incremented by the system automatically 

after each record pass where changes have been made. This linear progression 

can be interrupted so that the last few passes are ignored, or start another 

section of the work based on a different pass. 

This can be done from the Mix Tree display, with the transport stopped, by 

double clicking on the node to be the new Play Pass. The next record pass will 

become Pass 1 of the next mix number. 

There are four buttons in the Global Automation Control area which can be used 

for play pass selection; 

MIX 

- 

MIX 

+ 

PASS 

- 

PASS 

+ 

When any of the four buttons are pressed a window is displayed showing the 

PASS 

PASS 

newly selected pass, pressing or increases or decreases the Pass 

+ 

– 

MIX 

MIX 

number displayed. and are used to increase or decrease the Mix number. 

+ 

– 

When a new branch is selected in this way, the system uses the last pass on that 

branch as the current play pass. 

EXECUTE 

Having selected the new pass using these keys press the key to change 

the current play-pass. To terminate the operation without changing anything 

CANCEL 

press . 

Repeatedly pressing 

MIX 

PASS 

– 

– 

or will eventually select the ISS (0.0) as the play 

pass. 

17.5.1 Mix Abort 

It is possible to abort the current record pass while automation is running. 

Operation 

PASS 

– 

If the key is pressed when the current record pass is in progress, the current 

record pass will be aborted. The next time tape is started the same play pass will 

be played. This allows repeated updates to be made to a selected play pass 

without having to download the previous play pass, and reduces the amount of 

data that needs to be stored within the system. 




17.5.2 Mix/Pass Backup 

When tape is stopped the current record pass is automatically backed up to the 

Hard Disk. It is not possible to select an alternative play pass when the system is 

still backing up mix passes to the Hard Disk. 

The state of the back up procedure is indicated by the row of six smiley icons in 

the Mix/Pass display area. The smileys are normally yellow. When a record 

pass is being backed up to the hard disk, then a smiley turns red for each pass 

being backed up. As each back up is completed a smiley turns yellow again. 

Additional Mix/Passes can be created while the backup is in progress. 




17.6 Automation Modes 

The following mode descriptions apply to faders and all rotary controls that can 

be dynamically automated. 

17.6.1 Mode Summary 

FDR 

PLAY 

FDR 

REC 

PLAY 

REC 

TRIM 

GLIDE 

MUTE 

PLAY 

MUTE 

REC 

Faders , Mutes , Strip 

COL 

TOUCH 

GLIDE 

GLOBAL AUTOMATION CONTROLS 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

PLAY SAFE 

Global Mode selection for all controls 

except Mute keys and Faders 

PLAY 

COL 

TOUCH 

REC 

GLIDE 

SW 

MATCH 

RECORD 

TO END 

AUTOMATION 

SCOPE 

Global Mode selection for Mute keys 

MUTE 

PLAY 

MUTE 

REC 

MUTE 

MATCH 

REHEARSE 

FDR 

PLAY 

FDR 

REC 

Global Mode selection for Faders 

TRIM 

GLIDE 

MASTER 

RECORD 

ALL MATCH 

QUICK 

STORE 

MIX 

- 

MIX 

+ 

PASS 

- 

PASS 

+ 

Isolate 

> 

key twice in succession 

Play 

> 

key 

Play Safe 

> 

keys and the master 

PLAY SAFE 

key 

Record 

REC 

key 

Touch Record 

REC 

and 

> 

keys together 

REC 

GLIDE 

Auto Glide and keys together 

GLIDE 

Manual Glide key for any control in Play, Record, Touch Record or 

Trim 

GLIDE 

Auto Takeover Hold the control and press the key 

Trim 

TRIM 

key (faders only) 

TRIM 

GLIDE 

Auto Trim and keys together 

There are also four special automation functions which are Record To End, Auto 

Join, Auto Glide Out and Safety Stop. Record To End is described after the 

automation modes. The other three are global modes which are selected in the 

miscellaneous Options as described in the Miscellaneous Setup chapter (page 

6:16). The modes can be switched freely when the automation system is active. 




17.6.2 Isolate 

Controls in this mode are isolated from the automation system and will not 

playback the automation data or record new data. The controls will still operate 

on the audio. 

To set Isolate mode 

> 

> 

Press the global key twice or the local key once so that the associated 

LED is not illuminated. 

Controls can be switched directly from Isolate to Record while a play pass is 

running. Controls that are switched from Isolate to Record will have the new 

positions updated from that point. 

17.6.3 Play 

Play mode is used to play back a previously recorded Mix/Pass. If a control in 

Play is moved or switched then the effect will be heard but will not be recorded. 

To enable Play mode 

Press the respective 

> 

key, 

The associated green LED will illuminate solid. 

When controls are moved from the Play Pass position then the fader nulling 

LEDs will indicate the offset. On circular bargraphs the end segment will flash to 

indicate which way to turn it to null the control. Manual Glide or Match can be 

used to match the control back to the Play Pass position. 

Note: 

Play/Glide and Auto Takeover do not work in Play mode. 

17.6.4 Play Safe 

Play Safe is used to play back a Mix/Pass and prevent controls in Play from 

affecting audio output if they are moved. Play Safe can be used as a security 

lock to prevent accidental changes occurring at the output of the console during 

automation playback. It can also be used to create a step change by switching a 

control directly from Play Safe into a Record mode. 

To enable Play Safe 

Put the required controls into Play with the respective 

> 

keys. 

Press the master 

PLAY SAFE 

key when timecode is not running. 




17.6.5 Record 

Used to record new absolute positions. 

START 

OF 

MIX 

CONTROL 

TOUCHED 

TOUCH 

RELEASED 

END 

OF 

MIX 

I.S.S. 

PLAY 

PASS 

OFFSET 

TIMECODE 

To enable Record mode 


REC 

key. 

The associated LED will illuminate RED. 

Controls start at the position recorded on the Play Pass and replay any dynamic 

moves which are in that Mix/Pass. 

When a fader or rotary control is touched it drops into Record and the LED for the 

REC 

control’s key will flash. All new moves are recorded. 

When a control is released the LED continues to flash and the control will 

continue to Record at the position where it was released. 

The nulling LEDs show if an offset is present and point in the direction the control 

or fader has to be moved to remove the offset. The nulling LEDs for the fader are 

on the fader plate. The nulling LEDs for the FACs are at the top of the path strip 

and indicate for the most recent FAC on the strip that was touched. Also, the last 

LED on the circular bargraph for rotary controls flashes to indicate that an offset 

is present and which way to turn the control. 

Note : 

If timecode is stopped or automation is turned off with an offset 

in effect then the offset will be carried to the end of the mix. A 

Match (or Glide) must be performed if is is not desired. 

Record mode on Mutes and Switches 

MUTE 

REC 

The Mutes have a dedicated key and all other switches are put into Record 

REC 

with the rotary controls by using the key at the top of the path strips or the 

RECORD 

key on the AFU (for the accessed path). 

Mutes and other switches which can be automated have double action keys with 

two levels of depression. 




The first level will put the key into touch and drops the key into Record. The key 

will write its current state and the record LED will flash. This can also be used for 

overwriting actions from a Play Pass. Also, the key can be tapped (if Tap Toggle 

is enabled) to switch the key at the same time as putting it into touch. 

The second level switches the key and an action will be recorded. 

MUTE SW 

Pressing , , or will match the respective Mute/Switch states to the 

MATCH MATCH 

ALL MATCH 

Play Pass and resume play back. 

17.6.6 Touch Record 

Touch Record is the default mode that all controls that can be automated are set 

to when a blank automation Title is opened and the automation system is 

switched on. 

START 

OF 

MIX 

CONTROL 

TOUCHED 

TOUCH 

RELEASED 

TAPE 

TRANSPORT 

STOPPED 

END 

OF 

MIX 

I.S.S. 

PLAY 

PASS 

OFFSET 

TIMECODE 

To enable Touch Record 

REC > 

Press the respective and keys simultaneously. 

The associated LEDs will illuminate. 

A control in Touch Record will play back from the Play Pass until it is touched. 

When the control is touched it will drop into Record and the red LED above the 

REC 

key will flash. Any moves made will be recorded. 

When the control is released it drops out of record. The red LED above the 

key will stop flashing. 

REC 

The control resumes play back of the Play Pass with an offset added. The offset 

will be added until the end of the Pass. The offset is equal to the difference 

between the Play Pass position and the position of the control when it was 

released. 

The Nulling (or Match) LEDs show if an offset is present and point in the direction 

the control has to move to reduce the offset, as described in Record Mode. 




Touch Record on Mutes and Switches 

MUTE 

MUTE 

The Mutes have dedicated and keys and all other switches are put into 

Touch Record with the rotary controls by using the 

REC 

and 

> 

keys at the top of 

the path strips or the 

RECORD 

and 

PLAY 

keys on the AFU (for the accessed 

path). 

Mutes and other switches that can be automated have double action keys with 

two levels of depression. 

The first level will put the key into touch and drops the key into Touch Record. 

The key will write its current state and the record LED will flash. This can also be 

used for overwriting actions from a Play Pass. 

The second level switches the key and an action will be recorded. 

When a key is released it will match back to the Play Pass when the next 

switching action is played back. 

Also, the key can be tapped (if Tap Toggle is enabled) to switch the key. The key 

will stay switched until the next action is played back. 

17.6.7 Auto Glide 

Auto Glide is used to automatically match faders and rotary controls to the Play 

Pass when the control is released from touch. 

I.S.S. 

START 

OF 

MIX 

CONTROL 

TOUCHED 

TOUCH 

RELEASED 

PLAY 

PASS 

AUTOGLIDE 

TIME SET 

BETWEEN 1 frame 

and 30 seconds 

END 

OF 

MIX 

TIMECODE 

To enable Auto Glide 

REC 

GLIDE 

Press the respective and keys simultaneously. 

The associated LEDs will be illuminated solid. 

A fader or rotary control in Auto Glide will play back from the Play Pass until it is 

touched. When the control is touched it drops into Record and the red LED 

REC 

above the key will flash. Any moves made will be recorded. 




GLIDE 

When the control is is released the LED above the key will flash and the 

control will glide back to the Play Pass position at the rate set for the Auto Glide 

Time on the Soft Panel. 

When the control has matched to the play pass position the record and glide 

LEDs will go solid. The control will resume play back. 

Note: 

If a mode change was performed earlier in the pass, the offset 

created is carried over to the Auto Glide mode. A further offset 

can be added which will be removed on release of the control 

leaving the previous offset unchanged. 

17.6.8 Manual Glide 

Manual Glide is used to match faders and rotary controls to the Play Pass at any 

time. 

I.S.S. 

START 

OF 

MIX 

CONTROL 

TOUCHED 

GLIDE BUTTON 

PRESSED 

PLAY 

PASS 

MANUAL GLIDE 

TIME SET BETWEEN 

1FRAMEAND30SECS 

END 

OF 

MIX 

TIMECODE 

To use Manual Glide 


Trim. 

GLIDE 

key for a control in Touch Record, Record, Play or 

The LED above the key will flash and the control will match back to the play pass 

position at the Manual Glide Rate. When the control has matched to the play 

pass position the glide LED will go out. The control will resume playing back the 

moves of the play pass. 

17.6.9 Setting the Glide times 

The Manual Glide time, Auto Glide time and Auto xFade Time are stored 

independently and they are displayed in the System Status area of the Graphics 

Display screen. The maximum time for each is 30 seconds. 

To edit a glide time 

Press the [MAN], [AUTO]or[XFADE] keys at the entry level menu of the Soft 

Panel. 




If the [MAN] key is pressed, for 

instance, the Soft Panel will display 

the current Manual Glide time, keys 

for adjusting the time and keys for 

access to the other Glide times. 

XFADE 

AUTO 

RESTART 

SAVE 

Manual Glide Time: 7:15 

TIME 

>> 

HOLD 

EXIT 

To adjust the Glide time in 1 second steps 

Press the [] keys as required. 

To adjust the Glide time in Frames 

Press the [] keys as required. 

To use the numeric keypad to set a Glide time 

Press the [TIME] key. 

To reset the Glide time to the current value 

Press the [RESTART] key. 

To store the Glide time 

Press the [SAVE] key. 

17.6.10 Auto Takeover 

Auto Takeover enables faders and rotary controls to be manually matched to the 

play pass position using the nulling indicators. 

I.S.S. 

START 

OF 

MIX 

CONTROL 

TOUCHED 

GLIDE BUTTON 

PRESSED 

POSITION 

OF AUDIO 

POSITION 

OF CONTROL 

END 

OF 

MIX 

PLAY 

PASS 

CONTROL MOVE 

TIMECODE 

To use Auto Takeover 

The required fader or rotary control must be in either Record or Touch Record 

mode and the control must be in touch. 

Press the 

GLIDE 

key for the control while still touching it. 




The LED above the key will flash. The nulling indicators for the control will show 

the direction in which the control must be manually glided to match to the Play 

Pass. 

Move the control to match the Play Pass. 

When the control goes through the Play Pass position the Glide and Record 

LEDs will stop flashing. The audio will follow the Play Pass. 

Release the control. 

The control will return to the Play Pass position and continue to play back. 

17.6.11 Trim 

Trim is only used for Faders to add an offset to any previously recorded fader 

moves without affecting the dynamic structure of the moves. 

START 

OF 

MIX 

FADER 

MOVED 

FADER 

RELEASED 

END 

OF 

MIX 

0dB LEVEL 

FADER 

HELD 

I.S.S. 

PLAY 

PASS 

RESULT ON 

AUDIO 

TIMECODE 

To use Trim 

Press either the local or global 

TRIM 

key. 

The Trim LED on the respective Faders will go on solid. The Faders selected will 

jump to the zero position as indicated by the left hand fader scale. The fader will 

remain stationary at the zero position irrespective of the original position of the 

Play Pass or any dynamic moves. 

TRIM 

GLIDE 

Auto Trim can be selected by pressing and together. 

The left hand fader scale is only used for Trim mode. It indicates 0 in the middle 

of the scale, and shows -20dB to +20dB. 

Moving the fader +/- will increase or decrease the dynamic or static gain 

structure of previously written fader movements by +/- 20dB without overwriting 

the dynamic moves. 




If Auto Trim is selected then the fader will move back to the zero position when 

touch is released. Alternatively manual Glide may be selected by pressing the 

glide key at the desired point. The respective glide rates set for Auto and Manual 

Glide will apply. 

Note: 

Auto Takeover does not work in the Trim mode. 

When the pass is played back with the faders in a Record or Play mode then they 

will play back a combination of the original moves plus the offset introduced by 

the Trim mode. 

Note: 

If Trim has already been used in the current pass then the Trim 

offset will be retained until the transport is stopped. The Trim 

will then be consolidated with the original fader moves. 

17.6.12 Record To End 

Record To End is used to automatically write the current position of controls to 

the end of the mix from the point the pass is stopped. This automatically 

overwrites any remaining moves to the end of the pass. 

START 

OF 

MIX 

CONTROL 

TOUCHED 

TOUCH 

RELEASED 

TAPE 

TRANSPORT 

STOPPED 

END 

OF 

MIX 

I.S.S. 

PLAY 

PASS 

OFFSET 

TIMECODE 

To use Record To End 

Put the required controls into Record so that absolute control settings will be 

recorded. 

Move the controls to their required settings. 

The Record LEDs will flash. 

Note : 

Record to End can also be used in conjunction with controls 

selected for Collect Touch. 

Press the 

RECORD 

TO END 

key Global Automation control panel. 

The 

RECORD 

TO END 

key has two levels of operation. 

When the key is pressed to the first level, the Record to End function drops out 

automatically at the end of the current pass. The key will flash to indicate this. 




RECORD 

TO END 

When the key is pressed to the second level then the function will remain 

RECORD 

TO END 

engaged until the key is pressed fully to the second level again, or until 

Automation is turned off. The key will illuminate steady to indicate this. 

When Record To End is active then the last position of any controls which are in 

Record will have their last positions written to the end of the Record Pass when 

the transport is stopped. 

RECORD 

TO END 

If the function is engaged for every pass ( illuminated steady), then any 

moves for controls in Record that were made on the previous Pass will be 

deleted beyond the point where the current pass is stopped. 

17.6.13 Miscellaneous Automation Options 

These are Auto Join, Auto Glide Out and Safety Stop. They are enabled and 

disabled in the Options screen accessed from Miscellaneous Setup (see page 

6:16). 




17.7 Collect Touch 

Collect touch provides the operator with the facility to put any number of pre 

selected controls that may be automated, into a state of Record either prior to 

the start of a new pass, or at any time the current Mix Pass is playing. 

This allows the operator to set up a new mix structure that may be captured at 

MASTER 

RECORD 

any time the key is activated. 

The function can be set to operate “once only”. In this condition controls selected 

for Collect touch will drop back into the playback state as soon as the current 

pass ends. 

Alternatively the function may be “latched”. In this condition controls will remain 

in the Record state during successive passes until the operator terminates the 

function. 

GLOBAL AUTOMATION CONTROLS 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

PLAY SAFE 

Global Mode selection for all controls 

except Mute keys and Faders 

PLAY 

COL 

TOUCH 

REC 

GLIDE 

SW 

MATCH 

RECORD 

TO END 

AUTOMATION 

SCOPE 

Global Mode selection for Mute keys 

MUTE 

PLAY 

MUTE 

REC 

MUTE 

MATCH 

REHEARSE 

FDR 

PLAY 

FDR 

REC 

Global Mode selection for Faders 

TRIM 

GLIDE 

MASTER 

RECORD 

ALL MATCH 

QUICK 

STORE 

MIX 

- 

MIX 

+ 

PASS 

- 

PASS 

+ 

17.7.1 Using Collect Touch 

COL 

COL 

Press the key, either locally on the channel strip or the global key. 

TOUCH 

TOUCH 

> 

The LEDs for the respective keys will flash and the automation system goes 

into a quasi Collect Touch mode called Collect. 

Touch the control or controls to be collected for the function. 

The Touch LEDs will flash to indicate selection. Touch status is indicated for the 

faders by the Nulling LEDs. 

COL 

Note: Pressing the Local or Global key again illuminates the LEDs 

TOUCH 

COL 

TOUCH 

for the keys steady, and returns controls “not previously 

collected” to their previous modes. 




Once Only operation 

Press the 

MASTER 

RECORD 

key either before tape starts, or at any time after. 

The collected controls will collectively drop into Record. The mode indication for 

the respective controls, will change to indicate a flashing Record status. 

Note: 

The Master status selected is indicated in the AUTOMATION 

box on the screen as ONCE ONLY. 

Latching Operation 

MASTER 

RECORD 

The Every Pass function is obtained by pressing the key to the second 

level. Controls that are selected for Collect Touch will remain in the Record state 

each time a new pass is started. 

The Every pass function may be terminated by pressing the 

the second level. 

MASTER 

RECORD 

key again to 

Note: 

The Master status selected is indicated in the AUTOMATION 

box on the screen as EVERY PASS. 

Dropping pre collected controls individually into RECORD 

Pre Collected controls may be individually dropped into a record state 

MASTER 

RECORD 

independently of the key. Pressing the respective controls automation 

REC 

key either locally or globally will drop the pre collected controls into a record 

state. 

Note: 

When the Collect Touch operation has been completed, either 

by using Once Only or terminating Every Pass, the controls are 

no longer collected and have to be collected again for the next 

operation. 

17.7.2 Glide 

When Glide is pressed either locally or globally the respective controls will glide 

to the play pass position and resume in a play back state. 

MASTER 

RECORD 

If the key has been pressed to the second level then the Every Pass 

function will cause the respective controls to be in a Record state when the next 

automation pass is started. 

The Collect Touch function can be terminated by switching the 

Off/On. 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

key 




17.7.3 Rehearse Collect Touch 

The Rehearse function allows the operator to set up a completely new mix 

structure on one or any number of controls, and then by selecting Rehearse, 

monitor the audio relevant to previous play pass up to the Automation drop in 

point. This is useful when a levels or EQ values change dramatically at a 

particular point in the mix. 

To use Rehearse Collect Touch 

REHEARSE 

MASTER 

Press the key before pressing the RECORD key. 

The 

MASTER 

RECORD 

key LED will flash to indicate a Record Ready status. 

When the tape transport is started the audio monitored will be the Play Pass. 

MASTER 

RECORD 

Pressing the key when automation is playing drops all pre-Collected 

controls into Record, and the audio monitored switches from the Play Pass to 

the Record Pass. The LEDs on the collected controls will change from flashing 

Play to flashing Record. 

Note: 

The Rehearse status is indicated in the AUTOMATION status 

box on the screen with the following text: REHEARSE. 




17.8 Capture Start Of Pass Timecode 

Users can set the timecode for the start of a pass to set the drop in point for 

recording a pass. 

When timecode passes the point specified (with automation on), a new 

mix/pass will be created from that point onwards. 

To set the starting point for recording a pass 

Click on the Timecode Capture Box in the System Status area of the screen. 

Note: 

This box normally displays the Locate To time in yellow. 


Automation 

Status 

Display 

Collect 

Touch 

Status 

System 

Wordclock 

Display 

Timecode 

Capture 

Box 

Current/ 

Held 

Path 

Hold 

Button 

Free RAM 

99% 

AUTO ON 

XFade 

Man Glide 

Auto Glide 

ONCE ONLY 48 00:00:00:00.0 

INT 

STOP 

Play Pass: 

Rec Pass: 

I12 

HOLD 

00:24:30:12.0 

Free 

RAM 

Display 

Glide 

Times 

Display 

Current 

Pass 

Display 


The Select a Label Service dialogue box will appear and an Enter Timecode 

dialogue box will appear over the System Status area. 

Click on the label with the required timecode or click the Close button to enter 

a timecode manually. 

The Select a Label dialogue box will close. 

Enter or modify the timecode in the Enter Timecode dialogue box. 

Click Execute or press to save the value. 

The timecode entered will be displayed in GREEN in the Timecode Capture Box 

to indicate it is the automation record drop in point. 

Note: 

If a Locate To time has been previously entered, it will not be 

affected by setting the start of pass timecode. If a Locate is 

executed while the timecode is red, then the Locate To time 

(now hidden) will still be used. 




To use the start of pass timecode 

Select the faders and controls to automate for the new mix/pass (or use or 

modify the existing selection). 

Set the faders and controls to the initial settings desired. 

Locate the tape to a point before the timecode entered for the start of the 

pass. 

Press the 

AUTOMATION 

ON 

key if automation is not already active. 

The 

AUTOMATION 

ON 


Press PLAY. 

The Automation Status Display in the System Status area of the screen will 

display REPLAY. 

Any changes to controls will not be recorded. 

When timecode reaches the starting point entered, the display will change to 

AUTO ON. 

Rec Pass in the Current Pass Display will show a new Mix/Pass number. 

Any changes to controls will now be recorded against the new mix pass. 

Note: 

Note: 

The usual method of fader and control selection for this feature 

is Collect Touch. Faders and/or controls which are held when 

the timecode start point is reached will also be recorded. 

If the tape is put into play at a timecode point after the start 

point entered, the system will go straight into automation record 

mode and create a new Mix/Pass. 




17.9 Initial Snapshot (ISS) Amendment 

The entire automation mix structure is based on the “INITIAL SNAPSHOT” 

(ISS). When automation is turned on for the first time a snapshot is taken of the 

current position of every control and switch, including those controls that are not 

dynamically automated. 

The ISS may be amended or updated at any time after the ISS has been created 

for the following controls: 

Routing 

Input Selection 

Mic/Line Gain and Trim 

Input Balance 


Track Return Level 

Operation for rotary controls. 

Press the 

COL 

TOUCH 

key. 

Touch and change the value of the respective control. 

The Touch LED will illuminate. 

Press the 

COL 

TOUCH 

key again. 

Press the 

MASTER 

RECORD 

key. 

When automation is started a new record pass is created and the ISS will be 

amended. 

ISS amendment for Routing 

Press the 

COL 

TOUCH 

key. 

Change routing using the 

ACCESS 

key on the required path. 

Press the 

ROUTING 

TOUCH 

key situated at the bottom right of the Routing panel. 

This has the effect of Touching the amended routing structure. 

ACCESS 

Continue to change routing using the key on the required paths, 

ROUTING 

TOUCH 

pressing the key after the change to each path. 

Press the 

COL 

TOUCH 

key again when all routing changes have been made. 




Press the 

MASTER 

RECORD 

key. 

When automation is started a new record pass is created and the ISS will be 

amended. 

ISS amendment for MIC/Line input selection 

Press the 

I/P 

SEL 

key on the FAC selection panel. 

This assigns the function for input selection to the top row of FAC rotary controls. 

Select and Touch the respective input required. 

Keep the control in touch by holding the control. When automation is started a 

new record pass will be created and the I.S.S. will be amended. 




17.10 Mute/Switch Lists 

All Mute and Switch actions that are created when automation is running are 

automatically entered into Switch Lists. 

These lists can be used for offline viewing and editing of Mute/Switch actions 

and for offline creation of new Mute/Switch actions. 

Mute actions are recorded in the Mute List. Mute actions, plus all other switch 

actions are entered into a separate Switch List. 

The Switch List can become very long so 6 User Lists are also provided. These 

can have the Scope set to include only a selection of Switch actions. 

To set the Scope for Switch and User Lists 

Click on the Switch List icon. 

The screen will show all Mute and Switch transitions recorded by automation for 

the current Play Pass. 

Click on Scope. 

The Scope screen will be displayed. 

Select the paths and processing functions that are needed in the Switch List. 

Note : 

See Scope in Automation Operations. 

The procedure is the same for the six User Lists. 

Solo 

In addition to using Scope to reduce the number of events that are displayed in 

the Lists, the Solo button is used to view just one path and its respective events. 

Click on SOLO. 

The Path Edit screen will be displayed. 

Select the respective path or paths. 

Click SOLO again to revert the list to display all events. 

The edited user list information will be stored with the automation data, and will 

be available if the Mix title is subsequently recalled at a later stage. 




17.10.1 Mute/Switch List Editing 

Offline editing is available for all Mute/Switch transitions that allows new 

Mute/Switch actions to be created and existing entries to be modified. 

Mute List 

Close 

Number Time Path Param State 

Edit 

Create 

Copy Delete Scope 

Solo 

Prev 

Undo 

Redo 

Event 

Purge 

To Edit a Mute/Switch event 

Click on the Mute/Switch entry in the list to be edited. 

To edit Mute/Switch actions when Timecode is running 

Click in the title bar at the top of the Mute List where the word Unfrozen is 

shown. 

The word Frozen will now be displayed in the title bar. 

Click the EDIT button in the Mute/Switch list. 

This brings up the Edit Field. 

• Editing list data • Close 

00:00:00:00.0 Mon 2 : MN 2 MUTE ON 


The Edit Field shows the Timecode for the event, the path name and number, 

the switch type and whether the action was On or Off. 

The Timecode is edited in exactly the same way as normal. 

Mute/Switch actions can be edited individually or in groups. 




E.g. If a Mute/Switch action occurs at the same time on a number of 

paths simultaneously : 

Click and drag in the edit list and select all the required Mute/Switch actions 

that are occurring at the same time. 

When the Timecode is edited then all of the selected entries will be set to occur 

at the same time. 

E.g. If a number of Mute/Switch entries are selected for editing but the 

Mute/Switch actions do not occur at the same time : 

The first entry to be selected is the entry that is shown in the Timecode field. 

When the Timecode is modified, all of the other switch entries that were selected 

will be incremented or decremented by the same Timecode offset. 

To use the Timecode from a Label 

Click on the icon on the left of the timecode field. 

This displays the Label List. 

Click on the required Label. 


To Create a Mute/Switch event 

Click on the CREATE button in the Mute/Switch list. 


Set the timecode for the event. 

Click in the Path numbers field. 

This selects which path the Mute/Switch action is to occur on. 

Click on the Switch type field. 

This allows you to select which Mute or Switch action is to occur. 

Click in the Mute field. 

This selects if the action is On or Off. 




To Copy a Mute/Switch event 

The Copy function allows an existing Mute/Switch event to be copied to a new 

event at the same Timecode. 

Click on the Mute/Switch entry in the list to copy. 

Click the COPY button. 


Click on the path numbers field. 

Set the path to copy the event to. 

Click on the Switch type field. 

Select which Mute or Switch action is to occur at the same Timecode as the 

existing Mute/Switch entry. 

Click in the Mute field. 

Select if the copied Mute/Switch action is On or Off. 

To Delete a Mute/Switch event 

Click on the Mute/Switch entry to be deleted. 

Click on DELETE button. 

Click Execute to confirm. 

Prev 

Previous allows selection of the last Mute/Switch edit that took place. When 

selected the last entry is highlighted in yellow. 

Undo 

The UNDO button reverses the last edit of a Mute/Switch event that took place. 

Redo 

The REDO button is used to reverse the effect of the UNDO button. 




17.10.2 Purge Repeated Mute/Switch Events 

Purge is used to remove repeated switch actions (e.g. two consecutive ON 

events on the same switch on the same path). The automation system will 

automatically remove repeated events the next time the tape is played, but only 

for the duration that the tape is running. A new Record pass is created 

automatically when this happens. The Purge function can be used to remove all 

other repeat events. 

To Purge repeat events from a Mute/Switch list 

Click the Purge button. 

This brings up a screen with the following selections. 

No purge 

Purge All 

This will Purge all repeated Mute/Switch entries across the 

whole Mix/Pass. 

Purge between Timecodes 

A dialogue box will be displayed for setting the Timecodes to 

start and end the Purge on. Timecodes can also be set from the 

Label List. 

Click the button for the required option and, if necessary, set Timecodes as 

required. 





17.11 Relay Event List 

Up to 24 relays can be triggered with a pulse or latching signal from the Soft 

Panel. Each time this happens it is a relay event and the events are recorded by 

the automation system in the Event List against timecode. 

17.11.1 Event List 

The Event List screen allows Relay Events to be edited, created, copied and 

deleted. These functions are used in the same manner as the same functions in 

the Mute/Switch List. 

17.11.2 Relay Setup 

The behaviour of each relay is controlled with a setup screen accessible via the 

Event List screen. 

To setup Relays 

Click the Event List icon. 

The Event List will be displayed. 

Event List 

Close 

Number Time Path Param State 

Edit 

Create 

Copy Delete Scope 

Solo 

Prev 

Undo 

Redo 

Event 

Purge 

Click the Event button. 




The Event Setup screen will be displayed. 

•EventSetupMenu• 

Close 

Num Name Mode Pulse Length Pol 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

LATCH 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

PULSE 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

00:00:00:00.0 

CLOSE 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

OPEN 

Click the Relay Event to setup. 

A dialogue box will be displayed for adjusting the Relay Event. 

• Event set-up Edit • 

Close 

LATCH 00:00:00:00.0 CLOSE 

Cancel 

Execute 

There are four parts to the Relay Event field that can be changed: the name, the 

event mode, the pulse length and the polarity. 

To change the Relay Event name 

Click in the name area. 

A dialogue box will appear for entry of the name. 

Type in the name on the keyboard and press or click Execute. 

To change the Relay Event mode 

Click the current mode type (PULSE or LATCH). 

The mode will toggle between PULSE and LATCH each time it is clicked. 

To change the Pulse Length 

Click on the Timecode value for the Pulse Length. 




A standard box will appear for editing the Timecode. 

Set the time to the required value and Execute. 

To change the Polarity 

Click the current Polarity setting (OPEN or CLOSE). 

The mode will toggle between OPEN and CLOSE each time it is clicked. 

To save changes to the Relay Event 


The changes will appear in the Setup list. 

17.11.3 Using Relays 

Each time a Relay is used it creates an entry in the Event List. 

To use Relays 

Press the [EVENT] key at the Entry Level Menu on the Soft Panel. 

The Soft Panel will display the 

EVENT AUTOMATION menu with 

Relays 1 to 8 directly available. 

1 2 3 

EVENT AUTOMATION 

5 6 7 

4 

8 

> 

9-16 

--- Play --- 

REC 

HOLD 

EXIT 

Engage the automation system (if it is not already running). 

Press the [PLAY] and [REC] keys to set the automation mode of the Relays. 

Press the numbered keys to switch the Relays. 

Press the [] keys to access different groups of relays. 






Offline Editing 

18 Offline Editing 

To access the Offline Editing functions 

EXIT 

Press the key associated with the VFD to return the Soft panel to the entry 

level menu. 

Press the [BACKGROUND] key. 

Press the key for the next available Background number (i.e. 1, 2, or 3). 

Press [EDIT]. 

The screen will display the Offline Edit icons as part of the background. 




18.1 Offline Trim 

Offline Trim enables the value of any number of pre-selected faders to be 

trimmed either for the extent of the Mix, or between points in timecode. The Trim 

value may be monitored in real time when Tape is running, or executed as an 

offline function. 

To use Offline Trim 

Click on the TRIM icon. 

The Global Trim Operation screen will be displayed. 

GLOBAL TRIM OPERATION 

Close 

•MIX• 

1.1 

•TRIMEXTENTS• 

Trim Entire Mix 

Trim To Time 

Trim From Time 

Trim Between Times 

•dB• 

-0.1 

SCOPE 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click on Scope. 

The Trim Scope screen will be displayed. 

Select the faders to be Trimmed. 

Execute the Scope. 

Click the Tree button to select a Mix/Pass from the Mix Tree. 

Note: 

Mix/Pass 0.0 may not be selected for Trim. 

Click the required TRIM EXTENTS button. 




This controls the fields which are displayed to select the amount of the Mix/Pass 

which will be affected by the Trim operation, as follows: 

TRIM ENTIRE MIX 

The Trim value will be applied to the faders in Scope across the whole of the 

Mix/Pass. Only the Mix/Pass needs to be selected. 

TRIM TO TIME 

The Trim will be applied to the faders in Scope from the start of the Mix/Pass to 

an End Time. An End Time will be displayed to set the required Timecode. The 

Label List can be used to set the timecode by clicking the button next to the End 

Time. 

TRIM FROM TIME 

The Trim will be applied to the faders in Scope from the Start Time to the end of 

the Mix/Pass. A Start Time will be displayed to set the required Timecode. The 

Label List can be used to set the timecode by clicking the button next to the Start 

Time. 

TRIM BETWEEN TIMES 

Both a Start Time and End Time will be displayed to set the required Timecodes. 

Each can be set from the Label List. A Duration will also be displayed. The 

Duration is automatically calculated or it can be set instead of setting the End 

Time. 

Click in the dB box to set the trim value. 

The trim range is ±20dB. 

Use the Trackball or Cursor keys to scroll the value. 

The dB value can be adjusted irrespective of whether tape transport is running 

or not. The Trim value entered will be reflected by the position of the selected 

faders, and if the tape transport is running the effect of the trimmed value will be 

monitored. 

Press 

EXECUTE 

or click the Execute button. 

This will execute the offline Trim and create a new Mix/Pass. 

Note: 

The transport must be stopped before the function can be 

Executed. 




18.2 Offline Delete 

Enables dynamic moves or switch actions for any number of pre-selected 

controls to be Deleted between nominated timecode points. All dynamic moves 

or switch actions previously recorded between the nominated timecode values 

will be erased. 

To Delete events 

Click the DELETE icon. 

This will launch the offline DELETE screen. 

Click the Scope button. 

This will launch the Scope screen. 

Select via Scope the controls to be included in the offline Delete. 

Clost the Scope screen. 

Click in the Mix field to select the Mix/Pass that offline delete should be 

based on. 

Click on the Start field and enter the timecode that the Delete will start from. 

Click on the End field and enter the timecode up to which events will be 

deleted. 

Both the Start and End timecodes are edited in standard timecode editing 

dialogue boxes, and the Label List can be used to set the times. 

The Duration time will be automatically calculated. 


This will execute the offline Delete and create a new Mix/Pass. 

Note: 

Executed. 

Tape transport must be stopped before the function is 




18.3 Mix Conform 

Mix Conform allows the automation system to follow changes in the running 

order of film and video productions. The timecodes for automation events are 

adjusted according to the Mix Conform function used. 

Timecode must be continuous to allow Mix Conform functions to operate. 

The functions are: 

Move 

Used to move a section of automation data from one position to another. 

Delete 

Used to cut out a section of automation data. 

Insert Stock 

Used to insert blank space into a mix (e.g. when a new scene is added). 

To access Mix Conform 

Click on the Mix Conform icon when the Offline Edit icons are displayed. 

The Mix Conform screen will be displayed. 

MIX CONFORM 

•Mix/Pass• 

1.1 

•XFadeTime:• 

1 

Close 

• CONFORM OPERATION • 

Move 

Delete 

Insert Stock 

Move from: 

•Start• 

00:01:01:03.0 

•End• 

00:01:02:04.0 

•Duration• 

+00:00:01:01.0 

Move to: 


00:01:02:04.0 

Cancel 

Execute 




18.3.1 To Move a section of a Mix/Pass 

Click on the Move button in the CONFORM OPERATION options. 

Click on the Tree button to the left of the Mix/Pass field. 

The Mix/Pass Tree will be displayed. 

Click on the Mix/Pass to be edited. 

Note : 

The default is the current Play Pass. 

Click on the Start timecode to set the start time for the section to move. 

Click on the End timecode to set the end time for the section to move. 

The Duration timecode field will be automatically calculated. 

Alternatively, enter the Duration time for the section to be moved. 

The End time will be automatically calculated. 

Click on the Destination timecode to set the time to move the section to. 

The Start, End and Destination timecodes can also be set using the Label List. 

Click in the Xfade Time dialogue box if you wish the section to crossfade at 

the edit points. 

The crossfade period may be selected between 1 & 100 frames. 

Click Execute to perform the Move. 

A new Mix Pass will be created. 




18.3.2 To Delete a section of a Mix/Pass 

Click the Delete button in the CONFORM OPERATION options. 

Click on the dialogue button in the Mix/Pass field. 

This will launch the Mix Tree. 

Click on the Mix Pass you wish to edit. 

Note : 


Click on the Start timecode to set the start time for the section to be deleted. 

Alternatively, click the Label icon next to the Start time and select a time 

using the Label List. 

Click on the End timecode to set the end time for the section to be deleted. 

Alternatively, click the Label icon next to the End time and select a time using 

the Label List. 

The Duration timecode will be calculated automatically. 

Alternatively, set the Duration time for the section to be deleted and the End 

time will be calculated automatically. 

Click on the Xfade Time box to set the crossfade duration at the Start and 

End points. 


Clicking on Execute to perform the Delete. 





18.3.3 To Insert Stock 

Click on the Insert Stock button in the CONFORM OPERATION options. 

Click on the tree button in the Mix/Pass field. 

The Mix Tree will be displayed. 

Click on the Mix Pass to edit. 

Note : 


Click on the Start timecode to set the time for the beginning of the blank 

section. 

Alternatively, click the Label icon next to the Start time and select a time 

using the Label List. 

Click on the End timecode to set the time for the end of the blank section. 

Alternatively, click the Label icon next to the End time and select a time using 

the Label List. 

The Duration timecode will be calculated automatically. 

Alternatively, set the Duration time for the blank section and the End time will 

be calculated automatically. 

Click on the Xfade Time box to set the crossfade duration at the Start and 

End points. 


Clicking on Execute to insert the blank stock. 





18.4 Slide 

The Slide function allows the Timecodes for an entire Mix/Pass to be adjusted 

by a selected amount. For instance, this is useful in post-production or mix-down 

when a new section of material is required at the beginning of a Mix. 

To Slide a Mix/Pass 

Click the Slide icon in the Offline Edits background screen. 

The Slide Edit Screen will be displayed. 

SLIDE EDIT SCREEN 

Close 

•Mix/Pass• 

1.1 

• Slide Offset • 

00:00:00:00.0 

SCOPE 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click the Tree button to select a Mix/Pass from the Mix Tree. 

Click in the Slide Offset timecode field. 

A standard Timecode editing dialogue box will be displayed. 

Set the Timecode to the required value and Execute. 

Click the SCOPE button to change the selection of controls and paths which 

will be adjusted. 

Click the Execute button to Slide the Mix/Pass. 

A new Mix/Pass will be created. 




18.5 Mix Compare 

Mix Compare facility allows a merge between selected Mix/Passes or Stores in 

real time. The merge information is held in memory, but allows the merge 

information to be changed and updated before creating an additional Mix/Pass. 

A combination of up to three Mix/Passes or Stores can be pre-selected for 

merging. Merge information can also be performed and edited off-line. 

To perform Mix Compare (Merge) 

Click the Mix Compare icon in the Offline Edits background screen. 

The Compare Operation screen will be displayed. 

COMPARE OPERATION 

Close 

• Mix Law XF Time • 

SCOPE 

PURGE ASSIGN ADD DELETE 

Cancel 

Execute 

At the same time the Soft Panel on 

the Monitor section will be setup for 

Real Time Merge operation. 

HOLD 

EXIT 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

HOLD 

-Tch 

Rec - 

BASE 

A 

B 

C 

Play 

Rec 

Click the Scope button. 

The MIX EDIT Scope screen will be displayed. 

Select the controls to be included in the Merge and Execute the scope. 

Click the ASSIGN button. 




The ASSIGN MIX SCREEN will be displayed. 

• ASSIGN MIX SCREEN • 

Close 

• MIX TYPE • 

MIX 0.0 

STORE 0 

HOLD 

DEFAULT 0.0 

BASE 

A 

B 

C 

Cancel 

Execute 

Up to three Mix/Passes or Stores can be selected for Merging in real time with 

the selected base mix. 

Click the BASE button. 

The current Mix/Pass is automatically selected by default. 

To change the Mix/Pass 

Click the Mix/Pass number. 

The EDIT POINT SCREEN will appear for entry of the Mix/Pass number. 

• EDIT POINT SCREEN • 

Close 

•MIX• 

1.1 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click in the MIX field and enter the required Mix/Pass or click the Tree button 

and select a Mix/Pass from the Mix/Pass Tree. 


The selected Base Mix/Pass number will be shown above the [BASE] key on the 

Soft Panel. 




To select a Mix/Pass to Merge with the Base Mix/Pass 

Click the A or B button on the ASSIGN MIX SCREEN screen. 

Note : 

The C button can only be used for a Store or HOLD. 

Click the MIX button. 

Click on the Mix/Pass number. 

The EDIT POINT SCREEN will appear for entry of the Mix/Pass number. 


Close 

•MIX• 

1.1 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click in the MIX field and enter the required Mix/Pass or click the Tree button 

and select a Mix/Pass from the Mix/Pass Tree. 


The selected Base Mix/Pass number will be shown above the [A] or [B] key, as 

selected, on the Soft Panel. 

To select a Store to Merge with the Base Mix/Pass 

Click the A, B or C button. 

Click the STORE button in the MIX TYPE area. 

Click on the current STORE number. 

The EDIT POINT SCREEN will appear for entry of the Store number. 


Close 

•STORE• 

0 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click on the Store number and use the Trackball, numeric keypad or cursor 

keys to set the required Store number. 

or 

Click on the List icon and select the required Store from the Store List. 

Click Execute to set the Store number and return to the Assign Mix Screen. 




The selected Store number will appear above the [A], [B] or [C] key, as selected, 

on the Soft Panel. 

To set C to HOLD 

Click the C button. 

Click the HOLD button in the MIX TYPE area. 

The word HOLD will appear above the [C] key on the Soft Panel. 

This function enables the current mix position to be held and all dynamic moves 

will be disregarded until disengaged. 




18.5.1 Real Time Merge 

Real Time Merge can be pre-set to operate in several ways : 

Isolate 

Press the PLAY button twice on the Soft Panel. 

This enables the Merge to be rehearsed in real time, but the merge points are 

not stored. 

Play 

Press the PLAY button on the Soft Panel. 

This enables a merge mix from memory to be played back and make changes in 

real time, but the changes will not be recorded to memory. 

Record 

Press the RECORD button on the Soft Panel. 

This enables a Merge Mix to be Recorded and Played back. The mix points will 

be recorded, and will be listed on the screen. On play back the Mix Merge can be 

overwritten and the changes will be reflected on the screen list for any controls 

touched until tape is stopped. 

Touch Record 

Press the PLAY and RECORD button together on the Soft Panel. 

This enables a Merge Mix to be Recorded and Played back. The mix points will 

be recorded, and will be listed on the screen. On play back the Mix Merge may 

be overwritten and the changes will be reflected on the screen list, but only for 

the period that controls are touched. 




To perform a Real Time Merge 

Run Automation. 

The mix will start by playing the selected Base Mix. 

Press the A-B-C buttons at the required merge points. 

If a Record modes has been used then the Merge Points will be shown on the 

screen. On playback the merges performed will be played back, but at this stage 

a new Mix Pass has not been created. The Merged Mix can be updated or 

amended as required. 

To save the Merged Mix 


A new Mix/Pass will be created. 

To cancel the Real Time Merge 

Click on CANCEL on the screen. 




18.5.2 Off-line Merge 

Merge entries performed may be edited off-line, and additional entries may be 

added. 

To edit an existing entry 

Click on the entry in the list. 

This will launch the EDIT POINT SCREEN screen. 

The mix selected will be the default, but an alternate mix may be selected by 

clicking on the respective dialogue box. 

To enter an XFade value 

Click in the Frames field and use the Trackball, numeric key pad or cursor 

keys to select the Xfade value. 

Click to set the value. 

To change the timecode 

Click in the EDIT POINT TIME box. 

This will launch the Timecode edit dialoge box. 

Or, click on the Icon at the beginning of the Timecode field to select a label 

from the Label List. 

To add an entry 

Click the ADD button. 

This will launch the EDIT POINT SCREEN screen. 

Add the information in the same manner as described above. 

To delete an entry in the merge list 

Click on DELETE. 

Click on the entry in the list. 




Stores 

19 Stores 

Stores are a static snapshot of the positions of the controls that are selected by 

New Store Scope, and are based on a specific Configuration or automation 

Title. The Store can then be recalled (or Set) to the console surface at a later 

time. 

Stores can be used independently of Automation. 

A User Configuration can contain up to 300 Stores. 

A Title within the Client/Project Automation hierarchy can contain up to 100 

Stores. 

If a new user Configuration is added, or if a new Title is created within 

Automation, any Stores that are resident in the current Store list are carried 

across into the new Configuration or Title. When Logging In to Automation from 

a user Configuration that contains more than 100 Stores, a message will 

indicate that the excess number of Stores needs to be deleted. 

The Stores List shows all of the Stores relating to the Configuration or Title that is 

currently logged on. 

Store Scope 

New and Set Store Scope are used to limit the controls which are included in a 

snapshot or recalled from a snapshot (E.g. save a Store of the position of Faders 

and E/Q on track return paths 1 to 8). 

New Store Scope 

Set Store Scope 

This defines the range of controls that are 

included when a snapshot store is taken. 

This defines the range of controls that are 

updated when a snapshot store is recalled 

(controls that are within the Set Store Scope that 

were not within the New Store Scope when the 

store was saved will not be affected by a Set 

Store). 


Stores 


19.1 The Store List 

Clicking on the LIST icon followed by the STORE LIST icon. 

or 

Press the [LIST] key on the Soft Panel followed by the [STORE LIST] key. 

or 


SET 

STORE 

The Store List will be displayed. 

key for a short period of time. 

Store List 

• Number 

Name • 

Close 

•SearchString• 

•Scope• New Set 

• Operations • 

Name Renumber Delete XFade 

• Safety Store • 

Recall Save 

Browse 


The screen shows all the stores in numeric order. 

To reduce the size of the list 

Use the keyboard to type in the first few letters of a Store name. 

As each letter is typed, the list displayed will be reduced to the items with the 

names with the same first few letters. The letters will be displayed in the Search 

String box. 

Press the BACKSPACE key to erase letters and restore the full list to the 

display. 

To scroll through the list 

Press the 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key. 




Stores 

Roll the trackball up and down. 

Press the 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key again to change the trackball back to pointer mode. 

19.1.1 New and Set Store Scope 

New Store Scope and Set Store Scope are used to select which controls are 

included when a Store is taken and which controls are Set when a Store is 

recalled. 

New Store and Set Store Scopes may be set up independently of Automation 

Scope. Set Store Scope cannot recall settings for controls that are not included 

within New Store Scope. 

To select NEW STORE or SET STORE scope screens 

Click on the SCOPE icon. 

Click on either NEW STORE or SET STORE buttons. 

or 

Click on the New or Set Scope buttons in the Store List screen. 

Note: 

New Store Scope should be reduced to include only those 

controls that are necessary for the production so that the 

amount of data that is stored is minimised. This also reduces 

the amount of time required to load Configurations and Titles 

that have large Store Lists. 

See the Scope section in Automation Operations. 

19.1.2 To create a Store 

Press the 

NEW 

STORE 

key. 

The new Store will be given a unique number which is one greater than the last 

number currently in use. 

A dialogue box will appear for entry of a name for the Store. 

Type a name on the keyboard (if required) and press the or 

EXECUTE 

key. 

The name must start with a letter. 

Store names are for user reference only and do not need to be unique. 


Stores 


19.1.3 To delete a Store 

Click the Delete button in the Store List screen. 

Select the required Store from the list. 

Any number of Stores may be deleted simultaneously. 


19.1.4 To rename a Store 

Click the Name button in the Store List screen. 

Click the Store to rename. 

A dialogue box will appear with the existing Store name (if any), ready for 

editing. 

Use the keyboard to change the name or enter a new name. 

Press the or 

EXECUTE 

key. 

19.1.5 To Renumber Stores 

Click the Renumber button. 



The Store numbers will be changed. 

19.1.6 Quick Store 

Quick Store is used to save an instant global Store to Store zero in the Store List. 

Store zero can not be deleted and is not available for use in the Sequence Store 

List. 

To make a Quick Store 

Press the 

QUICK 

STORE 

key. 



Stores 

19.2 Recalling Stores 

There are two ways to Set a Store to the console surface. The first is the 

standard Set Store function which instantly sets the controls (in Set Store 

Scope) to the values in the Store. The second uses the Auto XFade time 

(between 1 frame and 30 seconds) to glide the controls to their new values. 

See Setting Up Glidetimes in Automation Operations. 

19.2.1 To Recall a Store 

SET 

AUTO 

Press and hold the STORE or XFADE key. 

A dialogue box will appear for selection of the required Store. 

Enter the Store number with the numeric keypad or enter the Store name 

with the keyboard. 

The Store List will also appear after a small delay. 

Select a Store from the list by clicking on the required entry. 

Press the 

EXECUTE 

key. 

The Store will be Set to the console surface. If the 

then the controls will glide to their new settings. 

key was originally pressed 

The next Store in the List will be highlighted each time a Store is Set. 

Or 

Double click on each Store as required. 

This is used to recall Stores in any order, as required. 

19.2.2 Automation Notes 

If a Store is recalled when automation is running then the automation Modes of 

controls which have settings recalled will apply. 

Controls in Touch Record or Auto Glide will move to the recalled values, but they 

will immediately go to the play back state and continue to play the original play 

pass moves. If this is not required then the respective controls should be set to 

Record mode either locally or globally. Controls in Record mode will move to the 

value in the Store and will stay at the Store position until a glide is activated 

either the locally or globally, or until Timecode stops. 

AUTO 

XFADE 


Stores 


19.3 Browse Stores 

This is used to view Stores from other Configurations or Titles and copy them to 

the current Configuration or Title. 

19.3.1 To browse stores 

Click on the Browse button in the Store List screen. 

The following dialogue box will appear: 

• Browse Store Lists • 

Close 

Client/Project/Title 

User/Configuration 

Click on the Client/Project/Title or User/Configuration button. 

The associated Browse screen will be displayed. 

or 

Click on Close to cancel the operation. 

19.3.2 Browse Client/Project/Title 

Browse Client/Project/Title 


Client : Paul 

Project : Multi 

Title : Default 

• Available Titles • 

Default 05 Nov 96 16:23:12 

Close 

Clients 

Projects 

Titles 

The Browse Client/Project/Title defaults to showing Titles for the current Client 

and Project. 



Stores 

Any Client/Project/Title combination can be selected. 

Click on a Title (from the Available Titles list) to browse the associated 

Stores. 

The following confirmation dialogue box will be displayed: 

•Confirmation• 

Do you wish to view store list of 

configuration: 

Default 


Click on Cancel to return to the Browse screen. 

OR 


The Browse Store List screen will be displayed: 

• Browse Store List • 


Client : Paul 

Project : Multi 

Title : Default 

• Store Number 

1 

Name • 

Close 

Copy to current loaded title 

Copy config control positions 

Cancel 

Execute 

To copy a store 

Click on the Copy to current loaded title button. 


Click on the required stores in the list. 


Stores 


The Execute and Cancel buttons will become available. 


The selected store(s) will be copied to the end of current store list with the next 

available number(s). 

Note: 

Copied stores do not keep their original numbers as they are 

likely to clash with existing store numbers in the current list. 

The screen will return to the Browse Client/Project/Title screen to allow 

selection of further stores. 

To finish browsing stores 

Click on Close in the Browse Client/Project/Title screen. 

19.3.3 Browse User/Configuration 

Browse User/Configuration follows the same procedure as Browse 

Client/Project/Title. 

The screens will show Users and Configurations. The Browse Store List screen 

has the same options available. The confirmation dialogue boxes are also the 

same. 

Use the instructions given for Browse Client/Project/Title above. 

19.3.4 Copying Configurations 

The Browse Store List screens have a button labelled Copy config control 

positions. If this is selected (clicked on to make it yellow), then when the copy is 

Executed the current configuration will be replaced. 

The copied configuration will not be active on the console surface until it is 

re-loaded. (This means the configuration can be re-saved which, if necessary, 

will undo the Config copy.) 



Stores 

19.4 Sequenced Stores List 

The Sequenced Stores List provides the facility to arrange any of the Stores that 

have been created in the current Configuration or Automation Title into a 

specific running order. The Sequenced Stores List can also be set against 

timecode, independently from the automation system. 

A Store can be entered into the Sequence list as many times as required, 

inserted or moved to any position in the list, and an entry in the Sequence list can 

be copied to other positions in the list. 

Stores in the Sequence list are given a Sequence number corresponding to the 

sequential position within the list. When a Store is Set from the Sequence list it is 

the Sequence Store number that the system references to. 

In addition to the independent number allocated to Stores within the Sequence 

list, Stores can be independently named. 

To access the Sequence List 

Click the Stores Sequence icon. 

The Sequenced Stores List screen is displayed. 

Sequenced Store List 

•Seqno Num Name• 

Close 

Edit 

• Set to Time • • Order by • 

Disabled 

Number 

The screen shows the Store Sequence number, the original Store number and 

the original Store name or the name that has been entered to override the name 

copied from the originating Store. 

By default, the list is ordered by the Sequence number and the Set to Time 

function is disabled. 


Stores 


To order the Sequenced Store List by Timecode 

Click the Order by button so that the legend changes from Number to 

Timecode. 

The List display will change so that the Timecode for each Sequenced Store is 

also shown. 

Sequenced Store List 

Close 

• Seq no Num Name Timecode • 

Edit 

• Set to Time • • Order by • 

Disabled 

Timecode 

Order by must be set to Timecode in order for the Timecode field to also be 

available in the Edit Sequenced Store List screen. 



Stores 

19.4.1 Creating a Sequenced Store List 

Click on the Edit button. 

The Edit Sequenced Store List screen will be displayed. 

Edit Sequenced Store List 

•Seqno Num Name• 

Close 

Available Stores 

• Number 

Name • 

Add 

Insert Move Copy Delete Edit 

Cancel 

Execute 

The Available Stores list shows all of the Stores associated with the current 

Configuration or Title. 

If Order By is set to Timecode in the Sequenced Store List screen then the 

Timecode column will be shown. 

Edit Sequenced Store List 

Close 

• Seq no Num Name Timecode • 

Available Stores 

• Number 

Name • 

Add 

Insert Move Copy Delete Edit 

Cancel 

Execute 

Note also that the Insert, Move and Copy buttons are not available. 


Stores 


To Add a Store to the Sequence List 

Click the Add button. 

Click the required Store in the Available Stores list. 

The selected Store will added to the Sequence list and it will be given a 

Sequence Number. 

If Timecode order is enabled then the Sequenced Store will be given the current 

Timecode. 

To Insert a Store in the Sequence List 

Click the Insert button. 

Click the required Store in the Available Stores list. 

Click on the entry in the Sequence list where you wish to insert the selected 

Store. 

The Store selected in the Available Stores list will be inserted into the Sequence 

list above the clicked entry. 

All the Stores in the Sequence List will be renumbered to keep them in order. 

To Move a Sequence List entry to a different position 

Click the Move button. 

Click the entry to be moved. 

Click the entry in the Sequence list that the moved item is going to be above. 

The Store will be moved to its new position within the Sequence List. The List will 

be re-numbered to keep the items in the new order. 

To Copy a Sequence List entry to addition positions 


Click the entry in the Sequence Stores list to be copied. 

Click the entry in the Sequence list that the copied item is going to be above. 

The Store will be copied to the selected position in the Sequence list. The List 

will be re-numbered to keep the items in the new order. 



Stores 

To Delete a Sequence List entry 


Click the Sequence Stores List entries to be deleted. 

Any number of entries can be selected. 


To change the Name of a Sequence List entry 

Click the Edit button. 

Click the required entry in the Sequence Stores list. 

If the list is ordered by Number then the Name the Sequenced Store dialogue 

box will be displayed. 

• Name the sequence store • 

•Name• 

Close 

Cancel 

Execute 

If the list is ordered by Timecode then the Select name or time to edit dialogue 

box will be displayed. 

• Select name or time to edit • 

•Name• 

Close 

•Time• 

Cancel 

Execute 

Enter or edit the name from the keyboard. 

Click on Execute or press the RETURN key to confirm the new name. 

The name given to the Store in the Sequence list will override the name copied 

from the Store list. The original Store will remain unaffected. 

Click on Close to return to the Edit Sequenced Store List screen. 

To change the Timecode of a Sequence List entry 

Click in the Time field when the Select name or time to edit dialogue box is 

displayed. 

See Timecode Entry and Editing (page 15:11). 

The Sequenced Stores will change order accordingly. 


Stores 


19.4.2 Using the Sequenced List 

The Sequenced Store List can be stepped through with the cursor keys on the 

numeric keypad or the keyboard, or the Stores can be recalled against running 

Timecode. 

Each time a Store is recalled, the controls will Xfade at the current rate set with 

the Soft Panel. Set the Xfade time to the minimum of 1 frame if the Stores are to 

be Set instantaneously. 

To use the Sequenced List 

Click on the first Store to be Set. 

The item will be highlighted. 

Press the 

SCROLL 

CURSOR 

key to use Scroll mode. 

Press on the keyboard or click a Trackball button. 

The Store will be recalled. 

To move down the list and set each Store in turn 

Press the down cursor key. 

The next Store will be highlighted to indicate it will be used next. 



To move up the list and set each Store in turn 

Press the up cursor key. 

The next Store upwards will be highlighted to indicate it will be used next. 



To continually Set the same Store 

Press on the keyboard or click a Trackball button as many times 

as required. 



Stores 

To recall Stores against Timecode 

Click the Set to Time button so that the legend changes to Enabled. 

The button will also turn yellow. 

Click the Order by button so that the legend displays Timecode. 

Put the transport into Play. 

When the running Timecode matches the Timecode on a Sequenced Store then 

the Store will be recalled. 

Note: 

It is advisable to avoid having Stores with the same Timecode 

in the Sequence List. 


Stores 




Capricorn Surround 

20 Capricorn Surround 

This chapter describes the operation of three hardware options that can be used 

to extend the surround sound capabilities of the Capricorn console. 

Standard Surround Features 

The Capricorn console allows surround panning to sets of tracks (called Film 

Groups) as standard. The panning formats available are LCR, LCRS and Split 

Surround (also called 5.1). IMAX and 8-Way (7.1) formats can be purchased as 

software upgrades (they are included as standard with CXS and CSP). 

CXS 

This is a console section that allows full control of surround sound monitoring 

and Film Stem configuration. The Capricorn system software automatically 

detects the presence of the CXS and extends the functionality of configuration 

software for setting up Film Stems, direct playback inputs and speaker trims. 

The CXS adds a full section to the console, consisting of a dedicated meter 

bridge (moving coil VU meters), a Joystick Module, faders for dialogue and 

music, and a main section for monitoring and stem control. 

Joystick Module 

The Joystick Module is used to provide intuitive control over the pan position of 

signals within a surround sound field. Up to two channels can be controlled 

simultaneously, and the module is fully automated to preserve panning that has 

already been completed. 

A maximum of two Joystick Modules can be installed in a Capricorn console. 

Joystick Modules are compatible with the CSP or the CXS. Note that one 

Joystick Module is supplied as standard as part of the CXS. 

Capricorn Surround Panel (CSP) 

This alters the functionality of the transport panel to provide a complete set of 

surround monitoring facilities. 

This option is not compatible with the CXS. 




20.1 Standard Surround Features 

This allows a set of consecutive Track Sends to be associated as a Film Group 

with a user selected surround sound format. Source paths can then be routed to 

the Film Group. A pan law is selected for each source path to determine how the 

signal is apportioned to the Track Sends in the Film Group. The pan law of a 

source path would normally match the surround format of a Film Group, 

although it does not have to. 

20.1.1 To define Track Sends for Film Groups 


The Tracks Setup screen will be displayed. 

Track Setup 

Close 

ALL 

MONO 

MONO 

STEREO 

LCR 

LCRS 

SPLT 

IMAX 

8-WAY 

M 

1 

L 

9 

M 

17 

M 

25 

M 

33 

M 

41 

M 

2 

C 

10 

M 

18 

M 

26 

M 

34 

M 

42 

M 

3 

R 

11 

M 

19 

M 

27 

M 

35 

M 

43 

M 

4 

M 

12 

M 

20 

M 

28 

M 

36 

M 

44 

M 

5 

M 

13 

M 

21 

M 

29 

M 

37 

M 

45 

M 

6 

M 

14 

M 

22 

M 

30 

M 

38 

M 

46 

M 

7 

M 

15 

M 

23 

M 

31 

M 

39 

M 

47 

M 

8 

M 

16 

M 

24 

M 

32 

M 

40 

M 

48 



TS TRIMS 

Click on the LCR, LCRS, SPLT, IMAX or 8-WAY button as required. 


Click on the track send that is going to be Left. 

Note: 

There must be enough consecutive mono track sends following 

the track selected for Left for the assignment to take place. 

The consecutive track sends (following the send selected for Left) will 

automatically be assigned as follows: 

Left. Centre. Right 

The next two adjacent Track Sends will become Centre and Right (this is 

illustrated in the example screen above). 

Left. Centre. Right. Surround 

The next three adjacent Track Sends will become Centre, Right and Surround. 




Split Surround (5.1) 

The next four adjacent Track Sends will become Centre, Right, Left Surround 

and Right Surround. 

IMAX 

The next five adjacent track sends will become Centre, Right, Left Surround, 

Top and Right Surround. 

8-Way (7.1) 

The next six adjacent track sends will become Left Extra, Centre, Right Extra, 

Right, Left Surround and Right Surround. 

The speaker assignments will be indicated above the track numbers. 

The sub-woofer must be designated manually for Split, IMAX and 8-way. It can 

be a track send or an aux. Using an aux for the sub-woofer has the advantage of 

allowing the source paths to contribute to the sub-woofer separately from the 

level and pan sent to the rest of the film group. 




20.1.2 Routing to Film Groups 

There are two quick methods of routing inputs to all track sends used for a film 

group: route a single input to a film group, or route multiple inputs to a film group 


To route a single input to a film group 

Press the 

STEM 

SEL 



Press the 

ACCESS 

key on the desired source path. 

Press one of the track send keys which corresponds to a track send in the 

film group. 

The LEDs associated with the set of track sends for the film group will illuminate. 

Additional film groups can be selected. 

Press a different 

ACCESS 

key to change the source path. 

Press the 

STEM 

SEL 

key on the Routing panel to turn it off and finish. 

To route several inputs to a film group 

Press the 

STEM 

SEL 



Press the 

ROUTE 

key. 

The 

ROUTE 


Press the number key for one of the track sends in a film group. 

The path names on the console surface will flash. 

Press the 

Press the 

ACCESS 

ROUTE 

keys of the required source paths. 

key to end the process. 

Press the 

STEM 

SEL 

key on the Routing panel to turn it off. 

Page 20 : 4 Issue 5



20.1.3 Panning Routed Inputs 

Each path that is routed to a Film Group must have the pan law set (the default is 

stereo). The selected pan law determines the portions of the signal that will be 

sent to the Track Sends in the Film Group. 

For instance, if there is an IMAX Film Group then the pan law on source paths 

would normally be set to match this. However, it is possible to use different pan 

laws to achieve different effects. In this example, the sound of a motorbike 

crossing the screen could have the pan law set to LCR so that the sound 'sticks' 

to screen (i.e. the front of the surround field). 

Signals that are routed to the Film Groups can be panned using the optional 

Joysticks Module. The joysticks provide an intuitive control over surround 

panning and this is described later in this chapter in the section on the Joystick 

Module (see page 20:35). 

Also, the FACs on the channel strips or the AFU can be used for panning. 

To select the Pan Law 

Press the 

FILM 


The channel strip FACs now operate as follows: 

The top row of FACs select PAN LAW 

The second row of FACs control SPLIT between LS and RS 

The third row of FACs control FRONT/BACK PAN 

The fourth row of FACs control PAN, dependent on the law set. 

Rotate the top FAC to select the required Pan Law. 

This will change the FAC assignments as follows: 

FAC 

Pan Law 

1 - Pan Law MONO STR LCR LCRS SPLT IMAX 8WAY 

2 - LS/RS Split LS/RS LS, Top, RS LS/RS 

3 - F/B Pan F/B F/B F/B F/B 

4 - Pan Stereo pan LCR LCR LCR LCR L, LE, C, RE, 

R 

Width (AFU) 

Stereo inputs 

only 

Stereo inputs 

only 

Width for 

stereo input, 

divergence 

for mono 

Divergence Divergence Divergence Divergence 

Note: 

This also enables the corresponding pan axes for paths when 

they are called to the Joystick Module (if installed). 

Issue 5 Page 20 : 5



To pan with the channel strip FACs 

Press the 


Rotate FACs 2, 3 and 4 as required, according to the selected Pan Law. 

Panning to Film Stems on the AFU 

The PAN and WIDTH controls are available to the accessed path according to 

the current pan law. In addition, three of the FACs on the AFU can be set to 

control pan law, surround split and front/back pan. 

To use the FACs on the AFU for film panning 

Press the 

FILM 

FILM 

MODE 


The three furthest to the right on the bottom row of AFU Aux FACs will become 

(from right to left) pan law, surround split and front/back pan controls (normally 

used for Auxes 12, 14 and 16). 

The display in the middle of the AFU will show the current settings for the 

accessed path. It will also show which controls are available for the current pan 

law. If the display changes, it can be restored to show the film settings by 

FILM 

touching one of the FACs enabled by 

MODE 

. Alternatively, the display may be 

HOLD 

locked to showing the film panning settings with the key. 




20.2 CXS 

The CXS consists of a dedicated meter bridge, a main panel for monitoring and 

stem control, a pair of faders for music and dialogue and a joystick module. 

Meter Bridge 

7 5 3 2 1 

10 

0 1 

20 2 

3 

7 5 3 2 1 

10 

0 1 

20 2 

3 

7 5 3 2 1 

10 

0 1 

20 2 

3 

7 5 3 2 1 

10 

0 1 

20 2 

3 

L/1 C/2 R/3 SW/4 

7 5 3 2 1 

10 

0 1 

20 2 

3 

7 5 3 2 1 

10 

0 1 

20 2 

3 

7 5 3 2 1 

10 

0 1 

20 2 

3 

7 5 3 2 1 

10 

0 1 

20 2 

3 

LS/5 RS/6 LE/7 

RE/8 

Cxs 

The dedicated meters show the analogue monitor level. 




Main CXS Panel 

L 

MONITOR TRIMS 

C R LS RS SW LE 

RE 

-10 

+10 

-10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 

+10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 

SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO 

TRIM TRIM TRIM TRIM TRIM TRIM TRIM TRIM 

SOLO 

MUTE 

MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE 

MISC 

PROCESSING 

PANEL 

ON 

INS 

IN 

REC= 

STEM 

ACAD 

MONO 

SEL 

ALT 

MON 

SELECT 

CAP 

LS 

2T 

LT- 

RT 

LR 

1 

LR 

2 

-3 -3 

0 

0 

-6 -6 

TRIM 

C 

L-R 

-6 0 -6 

C TO 2T 

0 

0 

SURROUND 

TO 2T 

0 

+10 

2T OUTPUT 

+10 

DIALOGUE 

C 

SW 

LE- 

RE 

LS- 

RS 

ON 

ON 

0 0 0 

TRIM TRIM TRIM 

LOCK 

+10 +10 +10 

PB 1 ON PB 2 ON PB 3 

ON 

STEM 

CONTROL 

SPEAKERS 

STEM SELECT 

SOLO 

CLEAR 

LINK 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

LOUDSPEAKERS 

SOLO 


CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT 

L 

C R LS RS SW LE RE 

1 SAFE 2 SAFE 3 SAFE 4 SAFE 5 SAFE 6 SAFE 7 SAFE 8 SAFE 

REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC 

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 

STEM STEM STEM STEM STEM STEM STEM STEM 

PB PB PB PB PB PB PB PB 

Scoring System 

The main CXS panel controls the stems, playbacks, surround monitoring and 

the 2-track mix. 




Faders and Joysticks 

+ 

10 

5 

MUSIC 

DIALOGUE 

+ 

10 

5 

0 

5 

10 

P+G 

P+G 

0 

5 

10 

P+G 

P+G 

FRONT 

FREEZE 

NARO 

P.LAW 

AARD 

HOLD 

CALL 

FRONT 

FREEZE 

NARO 

P.LAW 

FXF3 

HOLD 

CALL 

20 

20 

F/B 

FREEZE 

DELAY 

F/B 

FREEZE 

DELAY 

30 

30 

SURR 

FREEZE 

GRAB 

SURR 

FREEZE 

GRAB 

40 

40 

PLAY 

REC 

PLAY 

REC 

- 

- 

COL 

TOUCH 

GLIDE 

COL 

TOUCH 

GLIDE 

The faders provide dedicated level control for dialogue and musical score 

inputs. The joysticks are used for panning channels across film stems. The 

joysticks are identical to the standalone Joystick Module (see page 20:35 for 

operational details on the joysticks). 




20.2.1 How CXS Operates 

The CXS uses Film Stems which are film groups that have been labelled with a 

letter from A to F. A film group is a set of Track Sends which have been grouped 

together according to a surround sound output format (e.g. Split Surround - also 

known as 5.1 format). The film group is created as normal in the Tracks Setup 

screen and then labelled as a stem. 

Film Stem 

up to 8 

Track Sends wide 

Track 

Send 

x 

Film 

Mon L 

L 

Track 

Send 

x+1 

Film 

Mon C 

C 

Track 

Send 

x+2 

Film 

Mon R 

R 

Panned 

Source 

Paths 

Track 

Send 

x+3 

Track 

Send 

x+4 

Film 

Mon LS 

Film 

Mon RS 

LS 

RS 

Track 

Send 

user sel 

Film 

Mon SW 

Sub 

Track 

Send 

x+5 

Film 

Mon LE 

LE 

Track 

Send 

x+6 

Tracks Sends are auto 

routed to correct Film Mons 

Film 

Mon RE 

RE 

A source path can then be routed to all the Track Sends in a Stem in a single 

operation. The source signal is apportioned to the Track Sends according to the 

pan control settings and the pan law for the speaker that each Track Send 

corresponds to. The routing of the Track Sends in a Stem to the correct Film 

Monitors is transparent and automatic when a Stem is selected for monitoring. 

Film Stems 

eachupto8 

Track Sends wide 

Film 

Mon L 

L 

Stem 

A 

Film 

Mon C 

C 

Stem 

B 

Film 

Mon R 

R 

Panned 

Source 

Paths 

Stem 

C 

Stem 

D 

Select 

Stems 

to 

Monitor 

Film 

Mon LS 

Film 

Mon RS 

LS 

RS 

Stem 

E 

Film 

Mon SW 

Sub 

Stem 

F 

Film 

Mon LE 

LE 

Tracks Sends are auto routed to 

the correct Film Mons when 

Stems are selected for monitoring 

Film 

Mon RE 

RE 




Labelling the Film Stems from A to F is a convenient reference technique and is 

used on the CXS for Stem Selection, both for monitoring purposes and for 

recorder control. 

The CXS has three playbacks. These can be taken directly from Inputs or 

Monitors and one playback at a time can be used in the monitor mix. 

A 2-Track Mix can be created - this must enabled in addition to enabling the 

CXS. The 2-Track Mix starts with the Left and Right Film monitors. Adjustable 

contributions can then be added from the other Film Monitor paths and the 

overall output level can be trimmed. 

The Music fader is used to control the overall output level to the speakers. This 

can be switched to operate from the main Control Room Level pot. 

The Dialogue fader is used to control the level of the analogue dialogue input. 

This is mixed directly with the analogue output to the Centre speaker or the Left 

and Right speakers. The level control can be switched to the pot on the Dialogue 

section. 




20.2.2 Configuring for CXS 

The system must be configured correctly before the CXS can be used. This has 

three main steps: 

• Enable the CXS (and 2-Track Mix if required). 

• Select which Tracks will belong to which Film Stems. 

• Route source paths to the Film Stems. 

To enable CXS 

Click the Path Numbers icon. 

The System Path Allocations screen will be displayed. 

System Path Allocations 

Close 

Input 

Monitor 

Group 

Main Output 

Aux Master 

Cue Send 

Total 

Free 

• Old: • 

0 

0 

8 

0 

0 

0 

8 

22 

Preset System Parameters 

24 

4 

16 

Track Sends 

Monitoring Ouputs 


•New:• 

10 

2 

8 

2 

2 

2 

26 

4 

8 

8 

30 

• Limits: • 

30 

30 

24 

8 

16 

16 

Talkback Inputs 

Talkback Outputs 

Total available paths 

CXS options 

CXS enable 

2T enable 

Cancel 

Execute 

Two extra buttons are available at the bottom of the screen because the CXS is 

installed. 

Click the CXS enable button. 

This automatically allocates Cues 9 to 16 for use as Film Paths. If necessary, the 

number of Cue Sends allocated will be increased by up to 8. The current usage 

of Cues 9 to 16 will be cancelled. The 2T enable button will become available. 

If required, click the 2T enable button. 

This automatically allocates Cues 7 and 8 for use as the 2-Track mixdown bus. If 

necessary, the number of Cue Sends allocated will be increased by up to 2. The 

current usage of Cues 7 and 8 will be cancelled. 

Note: 

There is no Execute required for CXS enable and 2T enable. 




Note: 

Each Cue that is used as a Film Monitor can feed up to four 

output ports. At least one of these outputs from each Film 

Monitor must feed the analogue part of the surround sound 

monitoring system. The additional ports could be used, for 

instance, for simultaneous track laying. 

To define Film Stems 


The Tracks Setup screen will be displayed. 

Track Setup 

Close 

ALL 

MONO 

MONO 

STEREO 

LCR 

LCRS 

SPLT 

IMAX 

8-WAY 

M 

1 

L 

9 

M 

17 

M 

25 

M 

33 

M 

41 

M 

2 

C 

10 

M 

18 

M 

26 

M 

34 

M 

42 

M 

3 

R 

11 

M 

19 

M 

27 

M 

35 

M 

43 

M 

4 

M 

12 

M 

20 

M 

28 

M 

36 

M 

44 

M 

5 

M 

13 

M 

21 

M 

29 

M 

37 

M 

45 

M 

6 

M 

14 

M 

22 

M 

30 

M 

38 

M 

46 

M 

7 

M 

15 

M 

23 

M 

31 

M 

39 

M 

47 

M 

8 

M 

16 

M 

24 

M 

32 

M 

40 

M 

48 



A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

PB/SW setup 

TS TRIMS 

The CXS has been enabled so there are now buttons available for Film Stems A 

to F and PB/SW setup (playback and sub-woofer). 

A Film Group with the desired surround format is created first, and then the Film 

Group is labelled as a Film Stem. 

To make a Film Group 

Click on the LCR, LCRS, SPLT, IMAX or 8-WAY button as required. 


Click on the track send that is going to be Left. 

Note: 

There must be enough consecutive mono track sends following 

the track selected for Left for the assignment to take place. 




The consecutive track sends (following the send selected for Left) will be 

automatically assigned as follows: 

LCR 

LCRS 

Split (5.1) 

IMAX 

The next two adjacent Track Sends will be Centre and Right. 

The next three adjacent Track Sends will be Centre, Right and 

Surround. 

The next four adjacent Track Sends will become Centre, Right, 

Left Surround and Right Surround. 

The next five adjacent track sends will become Centre, Right, 

Left Surround, Top and Right Surround. 

8-Way (7.1) The next six adjacent track sends will become Left Extra, 

Centre, Right Extra, Right, Left Surround and Right Surround. 

The speaker assignments will be indicated above the track numbers. 

To label a Film Group as a Film Stem 

Click the required Stem button, A to F. 


Click any of the Tracks that have been assigned to to the Film Group. 

The speaker assignment legends will change to show the Stem letter and the 

speaker. The following example shows Split Surround starting on Track 1 

assigned as Stem A: 

Track Setup 

Close 

ALL 

MONO 

MONO 

STEREO 

LCR 

LCRS 

SPLT 

IMAX 

8-WAY 

AL 

1 

M 

9 

M 

17 

M 

25 

M 

33 

M 

41 

AC 

2 

M 

10 

M 

18 

M 

26 

M 

34 

M 

42 

AR 

3 

M 

11 

M 

19 

M 

27 

M 

35 

M 

43 

ALS 

4 

M 

12 

M 

20 

M 

28 

M 

36 

M 

44 

ARS 

5 

M 

13 

M 

21 

M 

29 

M 

37 

M 

45 

M 

6 

M 

14 

M 

22 

M 

30 

M 

38 

M 

46 

M 

7 

M 

15 

M 

23 

M 

31 

M 

39 

M 

47 

M 

8 

M 

16 

M 

24 

M 

32 

M 

40 

M 

48 



A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

PB/SW setup 

TS TRIMS 

Note: 

A stereo pair can also be labelled as a Film Stem, if required. 




If Split Surround, IMAX or 8-Way has been selected 

The Sub-Woofer must be assigned individually. 

Click the PB/SW setup button. 

The PB/SW setup screen will be displayed. 

• PB/SW setup • Close 

Sub-woof select 

A 

B 

C 

TS 7 

---- 

---- 

Playback select 

Playback 1 

Playback 2 

Playback 3 

D 

E 

F 

---- 

---- 

---- 

L C R LS RS Sub LE RE 

---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- 

---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- 

---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- 

Speaker Trims 


Set 1 

Set 2 

Set 3 

+0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 

+0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 

+0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 

Click the button for the required Stem in the Sub-woof Select box. 

The Sub-woof select dialogue box will be displayed. 

• Sub-woof select • Close 

Aux 1 : abcd 

Aux 2 : AbCd 

TKS 17 : TS17 

TKS 18 : TS18 

TKS 19 : TS19 

TKS 20 : TS20 

TKS 21 : TS21 

TKS 22 : TS22 

TKS 23 : TS23 

TKS 24 : TS24 

TKS 25 : TS25 

TKS 26 : TS26 

Cancel 

Execute 

Select the required path from the list. 

Note that Auxes can be used for the Sub-Woofer. 


The Sub-woof select dialogue box will be removed and the selected path will be 

indicated next to the selected Stem. This is also shown next to the Stem letter on 

the Tracks Setup screen. 




Playbacks and Speaker Trims 

The PB/SW screen is also used to select the inputs for the Playbacks and for 

trimming the analogue output level to the speakers. 

To change the playback inputs 

Click the PB/SW setup button in the Tracks Setup screen. 


• PB/SW setup • Close 

Sub-woof select 

A 

B 

C 

TS 7 

---- 

---- 

Playback select 

Playback 1 

Playback 2 

Playback 3 

D 

E 

F 

---- 

---- 

---- 


---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- 

---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- 

---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- 

Speaker Trims 


Set 1 

Set 2 

Set 3 

+0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 

+0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 

+0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 | +0.0 

Each playback can have up to eight inputs, corresponding to each speaker 

position. There are no default Playback inputs. 

Click the Playback 1, Playback 2 or Playback 3 button. 

The Playback Select dialogue box will be displayed. 

• Playback Select • Close 

Inp 1 : I 1 Input 

Inp 2 : I 2 

Inp 3 : I 3 

Monitor 

Inp 4 : I 4 

Inp 5 : I 5 

Inp 6 : I 6 

Inp 7 : I 7 

Inp 8 : I 8 

Inp 9 : I 9 

Inp 10 : I 10 

Inp 11 : I 11 

Inp 12 : I 12 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click on the required Inputs or Monitors that will feed the playback. 

Up to eight can be selected. They will be highlighted. 




Note: 

The playbacks are intended for routing finished tracks on a tape 

machine directly to the surround monitors, so the selected 

Inputs or Monitors would normally be consecutive. (This does 

not preclude other uses.) 


The Playback Select dialogue box will close and the selected paths will be 

displayed in ascending order from left to right against the selected Playback. 

The order in which the paths are designated to speakers may not be changed. 

To change the analogue speaker trims 

Click the PB/SW setup button in the Tracks Setup screen. 


Click the Set 1, Set 2 or Set 3 button as required. 

The Edit speaker trims dialogue box will be displayed. 

• Edit speaker trims • Close 

Speaker set 1 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

L 

C 

R 

LS 

RS 

Sub 

LE 

RE 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

Cancel 

Execute 

Click in the box for the required level. 

Enter a trim value with the keypad or roll the trackball left/right to scroll the 

value. 

Click when the value is correct. 

Change other speaker trims as required. 


The Edit speaker trims dialogue box will close and the trim values will be shown 

in the PB/SW setup screen. 

Note: 

If Set 3 is selected then only the trim values for L and R will 

have an effect. Speaker Set 3 has outputs for Left and Right 

only. 




Routing to Film Stems 

There are two quick methods of routing source paths to track sends used for film 

stems: routing a single input to a film stem, or routing multiple inputs to a film 

stem simultaneously. 

To route a single input to a film stem 

Press the 

STEM 

SEL 



Press the 

ACCESS 

key on the desired source path. 

Press one of the track send keys which corresponds to a track send in the 

Film Stem. 

The LEDs associated with the set of track sends for the Film Stem will illuminate. 

Additional Film Stem can be selected. 

Press a different 

ACCESS 

key to change the source path. 

Press the 

STEM 

SEL 

key on the Routing panel to turn it off and finish. 

To route several inputs to a film stem 

Press the 

STEM 

SEL 



Press the 

ROUTE 

key. 

The 

ROUTE 


Press the number key for one of the track sends in a Film Stem. 

The path names on the console surface will flash. 

Press the 

Press the 

ACCESS 

ROUTE 

keys of the required source paths. 

key to end the process. 

Press the 

STEM 

SEL 

key on the Routing panel to turn it off. 




Panning Routed Inputs 

Each path that is routed to a Film Stem must have the pan law set according to 

the desired signal to be sent to the Track Sends in the Stem. This is described on 

page 20:5. 

For instance, if there is an IMAX stem then the pan law on source paths would 

normally be set to match this. However, it is possible to use different pan laws to 

achieve different effects. In this example, a the sound of a motorbike crossing 

the screen could have the pan law set to LCR so that the sound 'sticks' to screen 

(i.e. the front of the surround field). 

Signals that are routed to the Film Stems can be panned using the joysticks that 

are supplied as part of the CXS. The joysticks provide an intuitive control over 

surround panning and this is described in the following section on the Joystick 

Module (see page 20:35). 

Also, the FACs on the channel strips or the AFU can be used for panning as 

usual. See page 20:5. 




20.2.3 Using CXS 

A Capricorn console with CXS installed supports two monitoring systems: 

standard stereo monitoring and surround sound monitoring. There are three 

sets of speakers and the Left and Right speakers are shared by the two 

monitoring systems. The CXS panel must be switched on to take control of the 

monitoring system. 

To enable CXS to control surround monitoring 

Press the 

PANEL 

ON 

key. 

The key will illuminate and the monitoring system will switch to eight speaker 

surround output controlled by CXS. 

The direct feeds to Left and Right from the standard control room monitoring 

system will be cut. They can still be selected as a source using the Alternative 

Monitor Select section (see page 20:30). 

Note: 

It is advisable to move the Music fader to its minimum setting 

and turn down the level control pot on the Control Room 

Monitoring section before switching control between standard 

and surround monitoring. This will prevent sudden loud noises. 




Stem Control 

The Stem Controls consist of two sets of paddle switches for Stem/Playback 

selection (also called Bus/Tape switching) and recorder control, a matrix of 

indicators showing the status of all Stems, track safe keys, cut, solo and stem 

selection. Stems can be linked so that paddle switches operate in unison. 

LOCK 

STEM 

CONTROL 

SPEAKERS 

STEM SELECT 

SOLO 

CLEAR 

LINK 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

LOUDSPEAKERS 

SOLO 



L C R LS RS SW LE RE 

1 SAFE 2 SAFE 3 SAFE 4 SAFE 5 SAFE 6 SAFE 7 SAFE 8 SAFE 

REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC 

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 

STEM STEM STEM STEM STEM STEM STEM STEM 

PB PB PB PB PB PB PB PB 

The Stem Select keys (A to F) and Loudspeakers keys (cut and solo) are shared 

between Stem Control and Monitoring. 

To assign the Stem Select, cut and solo keys to Stem Control 

Press the 

SPEAKERS 

key so that it is not illuminated. 




To select which Stem to work with 

A B C D E F 


The LED above the key will illuminate and the keys and paddles will show the 

status of the Stem. 

To select multiple Stems to work with 

Press the 

LOCK 

key. 

The LED above the key will illuminate. The currently selected Stem will remain 

active. 

A B C D E F 

Press the and keys as required. 

The most recently selected stem is active on the keys and switches. If the active 

stem is de-selected then the active stem will default to the first one available 

from left to right. 

CUT SOLO SAFE 

All the selected Stems will be switched by the paddles, 

and 

keys. When a paddle or key is used then the same switch on other stems will be 

forced to follow the state of the paddle or key for the active stem. 

For instance, Stems A, C and F have been selected and Stem C is active. If the 

SAFE 

key for Centre is toggled off then it will also be forced off on Stems A and F. 

To switch a Track between the tape send and tape return 

Push the required paddle to STEM to monitor the tape send. 

Push the required paddle to PB to monitor the tape return. 

The paddle will illuminate green when it is switched to PB. The corresponding 

green LED in the stem status matrix will also illuminate. 

To record a Track 

The tape machine must be record ready and the Track must not be safe. 

Push the required paddle to REC. 

The paddle and the corresponding letter indicator in the stem status matrix will 

flash red until a Rec Tally is returned from the tape machine. The paddle and the 

indicator will then illuminate red steady. 

Push the paddle to OFF when the required material has been recorded. 




To make a Track safe 

Press the required 

SAFE 

key. 

The LED above the key will illuminate. If the Track was recording then this will be 

turned off. The default status is all tracks safe. 

To force STEM selection when going into REC 

Press the 

REC= 

STEM 

key. 


When a record paddle is switched to REC, the corresponding STEM/PB switch 

will be forced to STEM. 

To link a group of Stems 

Press the 

LINK 

key. 

The LED above the key will flash. The LED above the currently selected Stem 

will cease to be illuminated. 

A B C D E F 


The LED above the key will flash. This indicates that the selected Stem is the 

temporary master for setting up the link. 

Press other Stem Select keys. 

The LEDs above further selected keys will illuminate steady. Each time a Stem 

Select key (other than the link master) is pressed the Stem will be toggled in and 

out of the link. 

Press the 

LINK 

key again to end link setup. 

The LED above the key will stop flashing and the LED above the currently 

selected Stem will illuminate again. 

When a Stem in a link is selected then all the other Stems in the link will be 

LOCK 

selected at the same time, regardless of the status of the key. The LEDs 

A B C D E F 

above the appropriate and keys will illuminate. 

Multiple links can be setup as required, but they may not overlap. When setting 

up links, selecting any Stem in an existing link will make it the temporary master 

for link setup. 




To un-link Stems 

Press the 

LINK 

key. 

A B C D E F 

Press any of the or keys that belong to the required link. 

The LED above the key will flash to show it is the temporary master. 

Press the keys for the other link members until they are all de-selected. 

CUT SOLO SAFE 

To link paddle switches, keys, keys or keys 

Press the 

LINK 

key. 


Push the required paddle switch down (to OFF or PB) or press the required 

CUT SOLO SAFE 

, or key. 

The paddle, key or LED will flash as appropriate. 

The LED above the active stem key will illuminate. This shows that the switches 

or keys are being linked for that stem. If there is no active stem then the switches 

or keys may not be linked. 

Switch additional paddles or keys as appropriate (e.g. if making a solo group 

SOLO 

then press keys). 

Press the flashing paddle or key when the link is complete. 

If required, make a link for any of the other paddles or switches. 

Press the 

LINK 

key again to finish. 

The link can be deconstructed in the same way as deconstructing a link of 

stems, as described above (i.e. go to link mode, select a link, remove 

non-flashing members). 




To cut a Track 



CUT 

key. 

The signal will no longer be sent to the surround monitors. This does not affect 

the tape send or return. 

To solo a Track 


SOLO 

key. 

SOLO 

The key will illuminate. The CLEAR 

CUT 

key will flash. The keys for all other 

Tracks in the Stem will illuminate. All the Tracks in other Stems will also be cut. 

Only the signal from the path in solo will be sent to the surround monitors. 

Press additional 

SOLO 

keys to monitor a custom combination of Tracks. 

Tracks from other Stems can also be monitored by selecting the Stem and then 

SOLO 

pressing the appropriate keys. 

Each time a 

SOLO 

key is pressed it will be toggle on or off. 

To cancel solo 

Toggle off all the 

or 

SOLO 

keys that are on. 

Press the 

SOLO 

CLEAR 

key. 




Surround Monitoring with CXS 

The Stem Select keys (A to F) and Loudspeakers keys (cut and solo) are shared 

between Stem Control and Monitoring. 

To assign the Stem Select, cut and solo keys to Monitoring 

Press the 

SPEAKERS 

key so that it is flashing. 

To adjust the overall monitor level 

Rotate the Control Room Level pot to the required setting. 

or 

Press the 

MUSIC 

FADER 

key. 

The LED above the key will illuminate. Level control will be transferred to the 

Music Fader. 

Move the Music Fader to the required setting. 

To select a Stem for monitoring 

A B C D E F 


The LED above the key will illuminate. If another Stem was selected it will be 

de-selected. 

To select no Stems to the monitor 

A B C D E F 

Press the or key that is currently selected. 

The LED above the key will cease to be illuminated. This is useful for listening to 

a Playback or the Dialogue input by itself. 

To select multiple Stems to the monitor 

Press the 

LOCK 

key. 


A B C D E F 

Press the required and keys. 

The LEDs above the selected keys will illuminate. The Stems will be summed to 

the monitors. 




To monitor a Playback 

Press the 

ON 

key for the required Playback. 

The selected Playback will be added to the monitor mix. 

Panned 

Source 

Paths 

Stem 

A 

Stem 

B 

Stem 

C 

Stem 

D 

Stem 

E 

Playback 

1, 2 or 3 

Stem 

Cut 

Stem 

and 

Monitoring 

Solo 

Selection 

Film 

Monitors 

2-Track 

Mix 

Film 

Monitor 

Cut and 

Solo 

L+R 

plus 

other 

contribs 

Film 

Monitor 

Trims 

2-Track 

Mix 

Overall 

Trim 

Assigned 

Signal 

Procs 

Analogue 

O/P 

(can be 

monitored) 

O/P to 

Analogue 

Monitor 

Domain 

Stem 

F 

Only one Playback can be selected at a time. If a different Playback is selected 

then the current Playback will be de-selected. 

To adjust the level of the Playback 

Press the 

TRIM 

key for the required Playback. 


Rotate the adjacent trim pot to the required level. 

0 0 0 

TRIM TRIM TRIM 

+10 +10 +10 

0 0 

0 0 

0 0 

PB 1 ON PB 2 ON PB 3 

ON 

The level will be shown in the alphanumeric display at the top of the panel. 

The trim pot has the same range as a standard Capricorn fader. 

Note: 

It is advisable to set the trim pot to 0dB (unity gain) or below to 

prevent sudden jumps in level. The level defaults to 0dB when 

trim control is off. 




To monitor the analogue Dialogue input 

Press the Dialogue 

ON 

key. 

0 


0 0 

+10 

C L-R 

DIALOGUE 

C 

L-R 


FADER 

ON 


C 

The causes the Dialogue to be summed to the Centre speaker and the 

key sends the left and right legs of the Dialogue to the Left and Right speakers. 

Rotate the level control pot the the required setting. 

The setting will be shown on the alphanumeric display at the top of the panel. 

L-R 

Note: 

Dialogue is not included in the signal shown on the meters. 

To use the Dialogue Fader to control the Dialogue level 

Press the 

FADER 

key. 

The LED above the key will illuminate. The Dialogue level will change to match 

the fader level. 

To switch the insert into the Film Monitor 

Press the 

INS 

IN 

key. 


This is a standard insert that is added to the Film Monitor paths (Cues 9 to 16) 

with Path Configuration (see page 5:14). 

Note: 

The insert can be switched in and out of individual Film 

Monitors (Cues) using the AFU. 

To switch in the Academy Filter 

Press the 

ACAD 

key. 

The LED above the key will illuminate and the Academy Filter will be switched 

into the analogue monitoring path. 




To monitor a selectable mono mix 

Press the 

MONO 

SEL 

key. 


SOLO 

CUT 

The and keys in the Loudspeakers section will now control 

selection of the mono mix. 

SOLO 

CLEAR 

LINK 

LOUDSPEAKERS 

SOLO 




The 

SOLO 

keys select the sources - the sources are the analogue feeds to the 

speakers according to the current monitoring selection (see diagram on 

following page). The 

CUT 

keys select which speakers the mix will be 

monitored on. 

The previous selection is restored when the mono mix is engaged. 



off. 

SOLO 

CUT 

keys to toggle the sources on and off. 

keys to toggle the speaker destinations on and 

LS and RS are selected as a pair. LE and RE are selected as a pair. At least one 

destination must be selected (i.e. if there is only one destination selected it may 

not be turned off). 

Note: 

This does not affect or include the Dialogue input. 

MONO 

SEL 

SPEAKERS 

Press or to return to cancel mono mix selection. 

To listen to the mono mix 

Press the 

MONO 

key on the Control Room Monitoring section. 

This can be done at the same time as selecting the mono mix to listen to various 

combinations as they are made. 




To monitor an alternative source 

Press the required key in the Alt Mon Select 

section. 


The selected source will replace the feed from 

the Film Monitors. The keys are interlocked, so 

that selecting one will cancel the existing selection. 

ALT 

MON 

SELECT 

PATCH 

CAP 

LS 

2T 

LT- 

RT 

LR 

1 

LR 

2 

The following simplified diagram shows how the current monitor source is used 

in the analogue domain of the CXS: 

Film Monitor DACs 

Meter 

Send 

Analogue Patch Inputs 

2-Track Mix 

Lt-Rt (Return) 

LR 1 

LR 2 

CAP LS 

Monitor 

Select 

Mono 

Mix 

Selection 

(pass thru 

when off) 

Academy 

Filter 

Level 

Control 

(+ Analogue 

Trim and 

Dim) 

Speakers 

Cut & 

Solo 

Select 

Speaker 

Set 

1, 2 or 3 

8-way 

8-way 

Dialogue Input 

Dialogue 

Level 

Control 

L/R 

Direct output from Capricorn stereo monitoring (CAP LS) to selected speaker set when CXS is switched off (PANEL ON key not illuminated) 

PATCH 

The key selects the analogue patch input. This could be used for a Dolby 

Encoder/Decoder return, for instance. 

The 

The 

LT- 

RT 

2T 

key selects the Lt-Rt return from the Dolby Matrix Encoder. 

key selects the analogue output from the 2-Track Mix. 

CAP 

LS 

The key selects the output from the standard Capricorn monitoring system, 

as set on the Control Room Monitoring section (including phase reversal, cut 

right/left, etc.). This does not bypass the rest of the analogue monitoring system 

unless the 

PANEL 

ON 

key is turned off (as shown above). 

Note: 

When a speaker set is selected, it is changed on both the 

normal Capricorn monitoring system and the CXS. 

LR 

LR 

The 1 and 2 keys select the first and second spare analogue Left/Right 

inputs. 




To solo the Film Monitors 


SOLO 

key. 

MONITOR TRIMS 


-10 

+10 

-10 +10 -10 +10 -10 +10 -10 +10 -10 +10 -10 +10 -10 

+10 

TRIM SOLO TRIM SOLO TRIM SOLO TRIM SOLO TRIM SOLO TRIM SOLO TRIM SOLO TRIM SOLO 

MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE 

MUTE 

The LED above the key will illuminate and the keys for the other Film 

Monitors will illuminate. The muted Film Monitors will send no signal to the 

analogue part of the monitoring system. 

Press additional 

Press the active 

SOLO 

SOLO 

keys as required. 

keys to cancel solo. 

Note: 

This is separate from the normal solo mechanism that operates 

on the Capricorn console. Solo on a Film Monitor (Cue) from a 

channel strip or the AFU will be sent to the APL bus. 

To cut individual Film Monitors 


MUTE 

keys. 

The key will illuminate. The muted Film Monitors will send no signal to the 

analogue part of the monitoring system. 

Note: 

Film Monitor cut and solo do not affect the 2-Track Mix or 

Dialogue input. 




To solo the analogue speaker outputs 

Press the 

Press the 

SPEAKERS 

SOLO 


key for the required speaker. 

The key will illuminate and the 

SOLO 

The 

CLEAR 


CUT 

keys for the other speakers will illuminate. 

Press 

SOLO 

keys for additional speakers as required. 

SOLO 

Press CLEAR 

SOLO 

or turn off the individual keys to end speaker solo. 

To cut the analogue speaker outputs 

Press the 

Press the 

SPEAKERS 

CUT 


keys for the required speakers. 

The keys will illuminate. The selected speakers will receive no audio. 

Press the 

CUT 

keys again to restore audio to the speakers. 

To select the set of speakers in use 

Press the 

SPK1 SPK2 

or 

SPK3 

key in the Control Room Monitoring section as 

required. 


Note: The 

SPK3 

key selects output to a stereo pair only. This could be 

used for testing a mix on near field speakers, for instance. 

To use both rear speakers for monitoring LCRS format 

Press the 

LS>RS 

4>5 

key. 


The signal being fed to the Left Surround speaker will now also be fed to the 

Right Surround speaker. This will replace the normal feed to the Right Surround 

speaker. 




2-Track Mix 

The 2-Track Mix is a stereo mix created from the current selection of monitored 

Stems. Cut and solo on the Stems also affects the 2-Track Mix. 

Panned 

Source 

Paths 

Stem 

A 

Stem 

B 

Stem 

C 

Stem 

D 

Stem 

E 

Playback 

1, 2 or 3 

Stem 

Cut 

Stem 

and 

Monitoring 

Solo 

Selection 

Film 

Monitors 

2-Track 

Mix 

Film 

Monitor 

Cut and 

Solo 

L+R 

plus 

other 

contribs 

Film 

Monitor 

Trims 

2-Track 

Mix 

Overall 

Trim 

Assigned 

Signal 

Procs 

Analogue 

O/P 

(can be 

monitored) 

O/P to 

Analogue 

Monitor 

Domain 

Stem 

F 

The basic 2-Track Mix uses the whole of the signal for Left and Right. The 

signals for Centre, Sub-Woofer, LS/RS (as a pair) and LE/RE (as a pair) can be 

switched into the mix and trimmed as required. The resulting stereo mix then 

has an overall level trim. 

Note: 

The 2-Track Mix must be enabled in the Path Assignment 

Screen (see page 20:12). 

To switch on the 2-Track Mix 

Press the 

ON 

key in the 2T Output section. 

-3 

-3 

0 

-6 -6 

TRIM 

-6 0 -6 

0 

C TO 2T SURROUND 

TO 2T 

0 

0 0 

0 0 

0 0 

0 

+10 

2T OUTPUT 

C 

LE- 

RE 

SW 

LS- 

RS 

ON 

To adjust the overall 2-Track Mix output level 

Press the 

TRIM 

key in the 2T Output section. 

Rotate the trim pot to the required level. 

The level will be shown in the alphanumeric display at the top of the panel. 

Note: When the 

TRIM 

key is off the signal will be passed through at unity 

gain. 




To add the Centre signal to the 2-Track Mix 

Press the 

C 

key in the C To 2T section. 

The LED above the key will illuminate. The signal will be divided evenly across 

the left and right legs (i.e. no pan). 

Rotate the trim pot above the key to the required setting. 

The maximum is unity gain (0dB). 

To add the Left Extra and Right Extra signals to the 2-Track Mix 

Press the 

LE- 

RE 

key in the C To 2T section. 

The LED above the key will illuminate. Left Extra will go to the left leg and Right 

Extra will go to the right leg of the 2-Track Mix. 



To add the Sub-Woofer signal to the 2-Track Mix 

Press the 

SW 

key in the Surround To 2T section. 

The LED above the key will illuminate. The signal will be divided evenly across 

the left and right legs (i.e. no pan). 



To add the Left Surround and Right Surround signals to the 2-Track Mix 

Press the 

LS- 

RS 

key in the Surround To 2T section. 

The LED above the key will illuminate. Left Surround will go to the left leg and 

Right Surround will go to the right leg of the 2-Track Mix. 






20.3 Joystick Module 

The Joystick Module is an option for the Capricorn and allows full panning 

control of up to two paths. The controls are fully automated. 

I 12 

I 14 

100 HOLD CALL LCRS HOLD CALL 

FRONT 

FREEZE 

PLAW 

FRONT 

FREEZE 

PLAW 

F/B 

FREEZE 

DELAY 

F/B 

FREEZE 

DELAY 

SURR 

FREEZE 

GRAB 

SURR 

FREEZE 

GRAB 

PLAY 

REC 

PLAY 

REC 

COL 

TOUCH 

GLIDE 

COL 

TOUCH 

GLIDE 

20.3.1 Joystick Module Displays 

The green LED matrix display panel shows a diamond of four dots and a 

separate dot. 

The diamond shows the pan position within the soundfield (i.e. where the audio 

sounds like it is coming from to someone sat in the middle of the surround field), 

and the dot shows the joystick position. 

The diamond and the dot can move independently or together, depending on 

the controls being used. 

The red speaker symbols above and below the LED matrix show the speakers 

which correspond to the current pan law as they would be used in the final 

listening environment. The top row are for L, LE, C, RE and R speakers. The 

bottom row are for LS, CS (or TOP) and RS speakers. 

The larger alpha display (immediately below the surround speaker symbols) 

shows the current path and the smaller alpha display shows the 

width/divergence setting or the current pan law. 




20.3.2 Control Replication 

The joystick is used to replicate the actions of the three surround panning FACs 

(front speaker pan, front/back pan and surround split) which are active when the 

FILM 

FILM 

key on the FAC Selection panel is enabled. The key does not need to be 

enabled for the joystick to pan the sound. 

The 

PLAW 

key replicates the top FAC on the channel strip for pan law selection. 

PLAY REC 

The TOUCH 

COL 

GLIDE 

and keys replicate the strip automation keys. 

Changes to controls on the Joystick Module will show on the strip for the 

currently selected path and vice versa. The changes will also register on the 

AFU if the path on the joystick is accessed and panning control changes will 

show on the AFU if the 

FILM 

MODE 

key is enabled. 

20.3.3 Selecting the Path to Pan 

The path to pan with a joystick can be selected by calling a path into the AFU or 

using the path stepping keys below the joystick. 

To call the path into the AFU and the Joystick Module 

Press the 

ACCESS 

key on the required path. 

The path will be called to all joysticks which are not held (see below). 

The diamond on the green LED matrix will jump to the pan position set for the 

path and the speaker symbols will illuminate according to the selected pan law. 

To select the path using the path stepping keys 

Press the or key next to the large alpha display. 

The alpha display will step through the user defined path names on the primary 

access bank. 

The diamond on the green LED matrix will jump to the pan position set for the 

path and the speaker symbols will illuminate according to the selected pan law. 

To hold the current path and prevent selection with the 

ACCESS 

key 

Press the 

HOLD 

key. 




The 

joystick. 

ACCESS 

keys will be prevented from changing the current path on the 

The and keys will still operate for path selection. 

To take the path off the joystick 

Press the and keys together. 

The alpha displays will go blank, the red speaker symbols will cease to be 

illuminated and the LED matrix will show only the joystick position dot. 

20.3.4 Pan Law 

The pan law may be selected using keys on the Joystick Module in addition to 

using FACs on the strip and AFU. 

To select the pan law 

Press the 

PLAW 

key. 

The integral LED will illuminate. 

Press the or key next to the smaller alpha display. 

The alpha display will step through the available pan laws. 

The red speaker symbols above and below the green LED matrix will illuminate 

according to the pan law selected. 

20.3.5 Panning the Sound 

The main joystick display (green LED matrix) shows a diamond and a dot which 

can move independently or together as a solid cross. The diamond shows the 

panned position of the source within the sound field. The dot shows the current 

position of the joystick. 

The diamond may be ‘grabbed’ to the joystick position or picked up as the dot 

passes through it. 

To pick up the diamond 

Press the 

CALL 

key. 

The integral LED will illuminate red. 




Move the joystick so that the dot passes through the diamond. 

The integral LED on the 

CALL 

key will turn green. 

Note: 

If the LED flashes red, this indicates a touch conflict with 

another film or pan control on the console. 

CALL 

Note: The key puts the joystick into touch on the three pan control 

functions. This means the corresponding FACs on the strip and 

AFU will be locked out (if they are in film mode) and will indicate 

touch conflict if an attempt is made to use them. 

Further movement of the joystick will pan the sound. The diamond and the dot 

will move together as a cross. 

To grab the diamond 

Press the 

GRAB 

key. 

The diamond will jump to the position of the dot and the integral LED on the 

key will turn green. 

CALL 

Movement of the joystick will pan the sound. The diamond and the dot will move 

together as a cross. 

To release the diamond 

Press the 

CALL 

key. 

The LED will cease to be illuminated. 

The dot will move away from the diamond when the joystick is moved. 

Joystick touch sensitivity 

CALL 

The joystick itself is not touch sensitive. The key puts the joystick into touch 

so that it takes control of the panning functions. 

20.3.6 Width/Divergence 

Width/divergence is controlled using the and keys on either side of the 

small alpha display. 

To adjust width/divergence 

Ensure the LED in the 

PLAW 

key is not illuminated. 




Press the or key on either side of the small alpha display to 

decrease or increase the setting. 

The alpha display will show a range from NARO to WIDE with a range of 1 to 27 

in between (i.e. NARO is 0 and WIDE is 28). 

20.3.7 Pan Freezing 

Three keys are used to freeze each aspect of panning. They restrict the 

movement of the diamond to show the effect of reduced axis panning. 

To freeze a panning axis 

FRONT F/B 

SURR 


FREEZE FREEZE FREEZE 

The 

The 

The 

FRONT 

FREEZE 

F/B 

FREEZE 

SURR 

FREEZE 

key freezes panning across the front speakers. 

key freezes panning between the front and rear surround speakers. 

key freezes panning across the rear surround speakers. 

The integrated LED on the key pressed will illuminate. 

Any combination of keys may be pressed (assuming the selected pan law allows 

the relevant panning action). 

Movement of the joystick will now cause the dot and diamond to separate as the 

diamond moves to show the panned position of the sound. 

Note: 

When a freeze key is enabled, the corresponding pan function 

is taken out of touch on the joystick. This means the FAC on 

the strip or AFU can be used to adjust the value while the 

freeze key is enabled. 

To un-freeze a panning axis 

Press the required freeze key which has its LED illuminated. 

The diamond will snap to a new position based on the current joystick position 

and any remaining freeze keys which are active. 

If only one freeze key was active, the diamond will snap to the dot. 




20.3.8 Joystick Automation 

The automation system only records changes to the settings for the three pan 

controls, the width/divergence setting and the pan law selection. No recording is 

made of which controls on the console surface were used to set the value. 

This means that when a mix is replayed, the joystick or the panning FACs can be 

used in any combination to change the mix. 

CALL 

Note: When key is enabled (i.e. green LED), the panning functions 

are in touch and the pan position will overwrite existing moves 

until the key is released. 

Tip - Grabbing a moving diamond 

GRAB 

The key is useful when replaying a mix. If a path is panning rapidly, the 

diamond on the LED matrix will move to reflect this rapid panning. This can 

CALL 

GRAB 

make the diamond hard to pick up when using the key. The key will 

cause the diamond to snap to the dot and give control to the operator. 

Glide 

CALL 

Releasing the key in auto-glide mode will cause the diamond to glide back 

to match the current mix/pass position. 

CALL 

The key will be forced to release control of the panning functions when the 

GLIDE 

key is pressed and the diamond will glide back to match the current 

mix/pass position. 

Tape machine controls 

CALL 

The key will be released when the tape machine drops out of play (i.e. when 

it is stopped, put into fast forward, etc.). 




20.4 Capricorn Surround Panel (CSP) 

The Capricorn Surround Panel is an option which uses keys which replace the 

top three rows of transport keys, as shown below. 

MULTI 

SPEAKER 

2TRACK 

SELECTOR 

INSERT 

DS4 

CONSOLE 

THRU 

DS4 

ACAD 

FILTER 

SOFT 

L 

C 

R 

MS 

SW 

TRIM 

> 

METER 

PRE 

DS4 

LS 

RS 

LE 

RE 

MONITOR 

LEVEL 

FIXED 

METER 

POST 

DS4 

ROLL 

BACK 

SHUTTLE 

JOG 

CYCLE 

ALL 

STOP 

AUTO 

RECORD 

2nd 

FUNC 

LOCATE 

> 

> 

|| 

RECORD 

20.4.1 Enabling and Disabling the CSP 

The CSP must be enabled before any of its functions will operate. 

To enable the CSP 

Press the 

MULTI 

SPEAKER 

key. 


The multi speaker monitor system will be engaged. 

The other CSP keys will be enabled. 

To disable the CSP 

Press the 

MULTI 

SPEAKER 

key again. 

The key will cease to be illuminated. 

The other CSP keys will be disabled. 




20.4.2 Speaker Selection 

Eight keys are provided for speaker selection: 

L C R 

Left, Centre and Right 

LS RS LE RE 

MS 

SW 

Left Surround, Right Surround, Left Extra and 

Right Extra 

Mono Surround and Sub Woofer 

SPK1 SPK2 

Note: When the CSP is enabled, the speaker select keys and 

SPK3 

in the monitor section are used to select between three sets 

of speakers. Each set of speakers has 8 speaker outputs. This 

provides a total of 24 speaker feeds. 

To select the speaker outputs 

L C R LS RS LE RE 

Press the and keys as required. 

Each key will illuminate when it and the associated speaker is enabled. 

To trim the loudspeaker output level 

MS 

SW 

Press the 

TRIM 

key. 

The key will blink. 

Press the required speaker selection key. 


The 16 character display on the CSP meter bridge will show the current trim for 

the selected speaker. 

> 

Press the or keys. 

Each press will step the trim up or down by 0.1dB. 

The display will show changes in the trim value. 


> 



To zero the trim value 

> 


To change the trim value rapidly 

> 

Hold down the or key as required. 

The trim valued will change at the rate of 10 steps per second. 

Note: 

Note: 

Trims are individual for each loudspeaker in a group of 

loudspeakers. 

Trim values are stored and recalled when the system is 

powered down and up again. 




20.4.3 Monitoring Other Sources 

Sources other than the CSP monitor output may be monitored when the CSP 

monitor is active. The output from the alternative source is sent to the control 

room left and right speakers via the headphones output. The headphones 

output is effectively placed into Follow Monitor mode for this function. 

To select an alternative monitor source with CSP active 

EXT AUX CUE 

FOL 

Press the or ACC key in the Control Room Monitor panel. 

The associated LED will illuminate. 

The 

2TRACK 

SELECTOR 


The selected source will be heard on the left and right speakers instead of the 

CSP monitor signal. 

OR 

Press the 

O/P 

key. 

The associated LED will illuminate. 

2TRACK 

SELECTOR 

The key will now control whether the CSP monitor source or control room 

monitor 2-track output is sent to the speakers. 

Press the 

2TRACK 

SELECTOR 

key. 


The 2-track output will be heard on the left and right speakers instead of the CSP 

monitor signal. 

Note: 

The level of the left and right speakers is still controlled by the 

level set using the control room monitor level control, plus trim 

applied in the CSP. 

The headphones level control will have no effect. 




20.4.4 Inserts 

To enable an analogue insert across all eight monitor paths 

Press the 

INSERT 

key. 


The insert return will be switched in. 

Note: 

The send is always hot. 

To enable a second insert across all eight monitor paths 

Press the 

DS4 

key. 


The DS4 insert will follow the insert engaged by the 

signal path. 

INSERT 

key (as above) in the 

Note: 

This is intended for switching Dolby DS4 or a similar 

encode/decode device into the monitor feeds. 

2TRACK 

SELECTOR 

Note: If the key is enabled (lit) then this insert will be disabled. 

CONSOLE 

THRU 

DS4 

DS4 

The key can be used to force to be active as 

described below. 

To enable DS4 when monitoring a different source 

2TRACK 

SELECTOR 

DS4 

i.e. Enable when the key is illuminated. 

Press the 

CONSOLE 

THRU 

DS4 

key. 


Ensure the 

DS4 

key is illuminated. 

The selected source will now be monitored via the DS4 insert. 




DS4 

Note: The most recent status of the key is stored. If it was enabled 

and then cut out by engaging the 

2TRACK 

SELECTOR 

key (or other monitor 

CONSOLE 

THRU 

DS4 

DS4 

source) then will engage as soon as is pressed. 

Note: 

CONSOLE 

THRU 

DS4 

has no effect if the CSP is not enabled. 

20.4.5 Mono Mixes and Academy Filters 

A mono mix can be monitored through an Academy Filter with one of three 

pre-defined curves - X (Standard), Small Room and Cascade. 

To select a mono mix from the CSP feeds 

MONO 

Hold down the key (in the Control Room Monitoring section) and press 

the desired speaker selection keys in the CSP. 

The LED associated with the 

MONO 


The selected speaker keys will illuminate. 

A mono mix of the selected feeds will be heard on the centre or left and right 

speakers. 

Note: 

maintain 

As more channels are summed, the level is adjusted to 

constant output level. 

To select a mono mix from the standard mix bus 

MONO 

Hold down the key (in the Control Room Monitoring section) and press 

any speaker selection keys in the CSP which are illuminated. 

This will deselect all feeds to the mono mix from the CSP. 

The mono mix will be taken from the Control Room Monitoring selection. 

MONO Group will be displayed on the CSP meter bridge display. 


> 



To select the Academy Filter curve 

Hold down the 

ACAD 

FILTER 

key. 

The 16 character display on the CSP meter bridge will cycle through the three 

curve options - X, Small Room and Cascade. 

Release the 

ACAD 

FILTER 

key when the desired curve is displayed. 

To enable the Academy Filter 

Press the 

MONO 

key if it is not already enabled. 

MONO 

Note: The Academy Filter will not become active if is not enabled. 

Press the 

ACAD 

FILTER 

key. 


ACAD 

FILTER 

Note: The on/off state of the key is stored when mono mode is 

disabled, ready for the next time mono is used. 

To select the mono mix output speakers 

Ensure that mono is active on the console, i.e. the LED for the 

illuminated. 

MONO 

key is 

L C R 

Press the and keys on the CSP as required. 

Note: 

Note: 

Valid combinations are Centre or Left and Right, but not all 

three. 

The mono mix output can only be routed to these three 

speakers. 

To trim the mono output level 

> 

MONO 

Hold down the and press the and keys. 

> 

Each press of the and keys will adjust mono sum output in 0.1dB steps. 




20.4.6 Solo 

The CSP has the facility to allow a solo signal through to the control room 

speakers when a solo is engaged on the console. This will cut the output from 

the CSP so that only the solo is heard. 

To enable solo to be heard when the CSP is enabled 

Engage a solo anywhere on the console. 

Press the 

SOFT 

key. 

The 

MULTI 

SPEAKER 


SOFT 

Note: If there is no solo active on the console the key will have 

no effect. 

The CSP monitor output will switch to the 

to the speakers. 

To exit solo mode 

Press RESET on the console. 

2TRACK 

SELECTOR 

path and the SOLO signal will go 

This will deselect the 

OR 

2TRACK 

SELECTOR 

monitor immediately. 

Release the SOLO directly. 

The 

MULTI 

SPEAKER 

key will stop flashing. 

The solo will time out after approximately 250ms after the last transition of the 

RESET lamp. 


> 



20.4.7 Speaker Level Fixed 

The CSP provides a facility for using a fixed speaker level which also prevents 

the Control Room Monitoring level control from adjusting the output level to the 

loudspeakers. 

To select a fixed output level to the speakers 

Press the 

MONITOR 

LEVEL 

FIXED 

key. 


The Control Room Monitoring level control will not have any effect on the output 

level or the value shown in its associated display. 

MONITOR 

LEVEL 

FIXED 

Note: Use caution when using for the first time. First selecting DIM 

on the console will prevent excessively high output levels. 

Note: 

Any adjustment made with the Control Room Monitoring level 

control will have effect when 

MONITOR 

LEVEL 

FIXED 

is released. 

To adjust the fixed output level 

MONITOR 

LEVEL 

FIXED 

Hold the key down and press the or keys. 

The level will be adjusted in 0.1dB steps. 

The loudspeaker output level will change. 

To zero the fixed output level to 85dB reference 

> 

MONITOR 

LEVEL 

FIXED 

> 



> 



To adjust the fixed level relative to the control room level 

MONITOR 

LEVEL 

FIXED 

TRIM 

Hold the and keys down and press the or keys. 

The reference level displayed in the Control Room Monitoring level display will 

be adjusted in 1dB steps. 

This sets the level displayed for the fixed level relative to the level in the control 

room when 0 is displayed on the Control Room Monitoring level display. 

The level from the loudspeakers will not be changed. 

To zero the display reference to 85dB 

> 

MONITOR 

LEVEL 

FIXED 

> 

TRIM 





20.4.8 Metering Point 

The pick off point for the CSP meters may be selected between pre and post the 

DS4 encoder/decoder insert. 

To meter the signal before the DS4 insert 

Press the 

METER 

PRE 

DS4 

key. 


If the 

METER 

POST 

DS4 

key is illuminated, it will cease to be illuminated. 

To meter the signal after the DS4 insert 

Press the 

METER 

POST 

DS4 

key. 


If the 

METER 

PRE 

DS4 

key is illuminated, it will cease to be illuminated. 

METER 

PRE 

DS4 

DS4 

Note: The and keys are interlocked. 

METER 

POST 

To disable CSP metering 

METER 

PRE 

METER 

POST 

DS4 

DS4 

Press the or key which is illuminated. 

No signal will be fed to the CSP meter bridge. 




20.4.9 Resetting The Console 

If the console has been reset, the CSP may not get the correct message from 

Capricorn. This may cause the CSP to cease operating correctly. There are two 

ways to force the CSP to operate correctly. 

There is also an initial 3 minute delay to allow Capricorn to boot up. The operator 

can override the delay to allow immediate use of the CSP. 

To force the CSP to operate immediately after a console reset 

MULTI 

SPEAKER 

SOFT 


The CSP will be forced into active mode and the 3 minute delay will be 

overridden. 

To force a full reset of the CSP 

Turn the control room monitor level control all the way to down to -103dB. 

Note: 

If this is not done, output signal levels may be excessively high 

when the CSP is restarted. 

MULTI 

SPEAKER 

MONITOR 

LEVEL 

FIXED 

SOFT 


A full reset of the CSP will be forced, and the CSP RAM buffers will be flushed. 

Loudspeaker offset levels will be lost. 

SOFT 

Re-enable the CSP by pressing and as above. 

MULTI 

SPEAKER 



MIDI 

21 MIDI 

The Capricorn can issue MIDI Program changes on specified MIDI Channels via 

a modified serial port on the AFU assembly. 

The program changes are selected on the soft panel according to the setup on 

the MIDI List in Miscellaneous Setup (page 6:20). 

21.1 MIDI Program Changes 

To send MIDI Program changes 

Press the more... key on the Soft Panel Entry Level Menu. 

An extra menu with additional 

options will be displayed. 

EVENTS 

MIDI 

HOLD 

EXIT 

LOCATE 


BACKGR 

LIST 

more... 

Press the MIDI key. 

The MIDI Instruction List will be 

displayed. 

1 2 3 

MIDI Instruction List 

4 

> 

9-16 

HOLD 

EXIT 

5 

6 

7 

8 

PLAY 

REC 

Press the > key if the key with the required MIDI Channel and 

Program is not shown. 

Each time > is pressed the 8 numbered keys will cycle through a different 

set of key numbers. The numbers underneath > show which set of key 

numbers will be displayed. 

Press the required number key. 

The MIDI Channel and Program number will be transmitted from the MIDI port 

on the AFU. 


MIDI 


21.2 MIDI Automation 

The keys labelled PLAY and REC on the MIDI Instruction List are used to 

automate the MIDI number keys. 

Automation modes are selected as usual with PLAY and REC. 

The automation system records and plays back MIDI key events as single key 

presses. There is no change of state to record and play (i.e. on or off). 

The automation system only records which key has been pressed. The MIDI 

Channel and Program associated with the key are ignored. 



Diagnostics 

22 Diagnostics 

The diagnostics screen provides access to miscellaneous system maintenance 

options. 

To access diagnostics 

Click on the Diagnostics Icon. 

The Diagnostics screen will be displayed. 

Tools 

Close 

•Options• 

DSP 

Logs IO Res Diags 

AMS 

NEVE 

Capricorn 

V2_81.000 

12:11:41 

16/10/97 


Diagnostics 


22.1 DSP 

The DSP option shows the functionality of the digital signal processing cards in 

the system. It also allows bad elements on a card to be marked and 

subsequently ignored. 

To access DSP diagnostic options 

Click on the DSP button. 

The DSP Options dialogue box will be displayed. 

•DSPOptions• 

Paths on card 

List nodes 

Locate path 

Bus errors 

Bad Elements 

Close 

Click the required button. 

22.1.1 Paths on card 

The Paths on card screen allows a particular card in the system to be 

interrogated and for bad elements on cards to be marked. 

To view the paths on a processing card 

Click the Paths on card button. 

The Paths on card selection screen will be displayed. 

Close 

•Pathsoncard• 

Contrib 

Contrib 

Contrib 

Contrib 

Contrib 

Contrib 

Contrib 

IO 

IO 

Filt/EQ 

Filt/EQ 

Filt/EQ 

DRC 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

3 

4 

10 

11 

12 

2 



Diagnostics 

Click on the processing card in the system to interrogate. 

The Paths on card interrogation screen will be displayed. 

Close 

Paths on card 13 

Num Global Path Sub Path Leg 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

GR 1 

GR 2 

GR 5 

GR 6 

GR 9 

GR10 

I 1 

I 2 

I 5 

I 6 

I 9 

I 10 

I 13 

I 14 

I 17 

I 18 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

NONE 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

Mark Bad 

The number of the card is its Node number within the system. The columns in 

the list depend on the type of card. 

Contribution Cards 

Num 

Global Path 

Sub Path 

Leg 

The path number on the card the path is resident on. 

The system name for the path. 

Indicates if a sub path is included. 

Indicates if the path is mono (M) or the left (L) or right (R) leg of 

a stereo pair. 

E/Q and DRC Cards 

Num 

Global Path 

Element 

Leg 

The slot number on the card. 

The system name for the path 

The type of processing. 

Indicates if the path is mono (M) or the left (L) or right (R) leg of 

a stereo pair. 

To remove a faulty element in a card 

Click on Mark Bad. 


Click on the faulty slot or slots. 

The slot entry will turn yellow. When Capricorn is re-booted, these slots will be 

ignored and paths and processing will be allocated around them. 


Diagnostics 


To un-mark a faulty element 

Click on Mark Bad. 


Click on a previously marked slot. 

Re-boot Capricorn to make the elements available again. 

22.1.2 List Nodes 

The List Nodes dialogue box shows the number of each type of Node in the 

system. The example shown is for a typical Capricorn console. 

•ListNodes• 

Close 

Node type and number present 

Contrib 

IO 

Filt/EQ 

DRC 

Graphics 

Tape 

Strip 

AFU 

Storage 

Joystick 

7 

2 

3 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

1 

0 

22.1.3 Locate Path 

Locate Path is used to indicate the location of a path on the console surface. 

To find a path 

Click the Locate path button. 

The Locate Path screen will be displayed. 

• Locate Path • 

Close 

Available Paths 

Inp 1 

Inp 2 

Inp 3 

Inp 4 

Inp 5 

Inp 6 

Inp 7 

Inp 8 

Inp 9 

Inp 10 

Inp 11 

Inp 12 

: I 1 

: I 2 

: I 3 

: I 4 

: I 5 

: I 6 

: I 7 

: I 8 

: I 9 

: I 10 

: I 11 

: I 12 

Input 

Cue 

Montor 

VCA 

Group 

Tksend 

Output 

Talkbk 

Aux 

Mainmn 



Diagnostics 

Click the required path to be found. 

ACCESS 

The key will illuminate on the strip where the path is assigned. A Path 

Processing box will be displayed next to the Available Paths list. 

22.1.4 Bus Errors 

Clicking on Bus Errors shows a list of bus errors. 

If there are no Bus Errors then the button will be un-available. 

22.1.5 Bad Elements 

The Bad Elements option is used to quickly view and un-mark paths or slots that 

have been marked as bad on processing cards. 

If there are no Bad Elements the button will be un-available. 


Diagnostics 


22.2 Logs 

The Log is a list of errors that have occurred. 

To view the Logs 

Click the Logs button in the Diagnostics screen. 

The Activity Log screen will be displayed. 

• Activity Log • 

Num 

Description 

Close 

Reset 

Data First Last Entries 0 

To jump to the last entry 

Click the Last button. 

To jump to the first entry 

Click the First button. 

To remove all entries in the list 


To toggle between text and data entries 

Click the Data button. 

The button will change legend to show Text. The heading above the list will 

change from Description to Details. The text descriptions of errors will be 

replaced with raw data entries which includes the node number and the time and 

date. 



Diagnostics 

22.3 IO Reset 

This is used to force a reset to the rack configuration (which racks are on which 

MADI ports) the next time that a User Configuration or Automation Title is 

loaded. 

To reset the racks 

Click the IO Res button in the Diagnostics screen. 

The IO Reset screen will be displayed showing the most recent setup of which 

racks are on which MADI ports. 


A dialogue box will be displayed with the message : Any new rack(s) will not be 

seen until the next configuration or title recall. 



Diagnostics 


22.4 Diags 

Miscellaneous items are provided via the Diags button. 

•Logs• 

Deaths 

Misc 

Close 

STOP 

SYSTEM 

REBOOT 

SYSTEM 

22.4.1 Logs 

Deaths 

The Death Log shows items in the system that have failed. This is primarily 

intended for use by engineering staff from AMS Neve. 

Misc 

The Miscellaneous Log provides information not catered for by the System Log 

or the Death Log. This is primarily intended for use by AMS Neve engineers. 

22.4.2 Stop System 

This is used to shut down a Capricorn console in a clean and safe manner. All 

DSP activity should be terminated before the system is stopped. 

To stop (shut down) a Capricorn console 

Click the STOP SYSTEM button. 



or 

Type stop and press on the DSP terminal. 



Diagnostics 

22.4.3 Reboot System 

To re-start the system 

Click the REBOOT SYSTEM button. 



Note : 

Note: 

The software reboot feature is not guaranteed to function 

correctly on older Capricorn systems. Contact your AMS Neve 

distributor or the Customer Services Department if your system 

does not re-start correctly. 

If a STOP command has already been executed then the 

system must be reset manually using the RESET switch on the 

Storage Node (DSP Rack). This will generate a hard re-boot of 

the Capricorn system (see the Getting Started chapter). 


Diagnostics 




Index 

! 

4-band parametric equalizer ................10:13 

8-Way surround format ................20:3, 20:14 

A 

Index 

Abbreviate the Mix Tree. ...................17:16 

Academy filter curve ......................20:47 

Academy filters ..........................20:46 

Access ..................................1:10 

Access key reverse routing ...................7:4 

ACCESS on SOLO ........................6:19 

Activity Log. ..............................22:6 

After pan listen. ...........................8:17 

After Pan Listen ...........................8:12 

AFU.................................2:12, 7:6 

AFU forward routing. ........................7:2 

AFU Graphic Display .......................2:13 

AFU reverse routing. ........................7:3 

AFU Section. .............................1:12 

AFU, using ...............................2:13 

All match ...............................17:26 

Allocating ports to inserts. ...................5:16 

APL ....................................8:12 

APL/PFL Bus Monitoring ....................8:19 

Application window ........................1:27 

Arm tracks on a machine ....................15:4 

Assign a bank ............................10:2 

Assign a port to a path. ......................5:2 

Assignable console .........................1:1 

Assignable facilities unit ................2:10, 2:12 

Assignable meter .......................9:3, 9:9 

Assignable meter source .....................9:4 

Assigning a path to new fader .................4:4 

Assigning channel strips to a bank ............3:18 

Auto Finish dither. .........................5:13 

Auto gain make-up. .......................10:19 

Auto glide. ..............................17:27 

Auto glide out. ............................6:18 

Auto Glide time ..........................17:28 

Auto join. ................................6:16 

Auto record .............................15:23 

Auto Record drop-in time. ..................15:23 

Auto Record Punch In and Out points .........15:16 

Auto release time. ........................10:19 

Auto takeover. ...........................17:29 

Auto xFade Time .........................17:28 

Auto XFade time ..........................19:5 

Automation ..............16:1 - 16:12, 17:1 - 17:48 

Automation controls ........................16:3 

Automation Data ..........................17:3 

Automation Data Storage. ..................16:11 

Automation modes. ............16:7, 17:23 - 17:24, 

.................17:27 - 17:28, 17:30 - 17:31, 18:2 

Automation Modes, Overview ................16:6 

Automation options ........................6:16 

Automation Quick Start .....................17:1 

Automation record ........................17:25 

Automation Scope ........................17:14 

Automation Scope Options .................17:13 

Automation, joystick module ................20:40 

Aux control. ..............................11:1 

Aux Control panel .........................11:1 

AuxCut .................................11:2 

Aux flip ..................................11:6 

Aux Metering .............................11:2 

Aux Pick-Off Point .........................11:4 

Aux Routing ..............................11:2 

Aux/Cue meters ............................9:9 

Auxes on the AFU .........................11:2 

Auxiliaries .........................11:1 - 11:10 

Auxiliaries and cues. .........11:3, 11:6, 11:8 - 11:9 

Auxiliary tracks. ...........................15:6 

Available configurations. .....................3:3 

B 

Background display .........................2:9 

Backup and restore .........................3:9 

Bad Elements. ............................22:5 

Bank assignment .....................2:10, 3:17 

Banks. ..................................10:1 

Blacktape threshold .........................9:6 

Boot Capricorn. ............................2:1 

Brightness of controls .......................6:7 

Broadcast mode. ..........................8:13 

Bus Errors ...............................22:5 

Buttons on the graphics screen ................2:3 

C 

Cancelling all mutes. .......................8:22 

Capricorn surround ..................20:1 - 20:52 

Capture Start Of Pass Timecode. ............17:36 

Capture timecode. ........................17:36 

Channel strip meter mode selection ............9:8 

Clicking trackball buttons .....................2:2 

Coalesce VCAs ..........................12:10 

Collect touch ......................17:33 - 17:35 

Compare mixes ..........................18:10 

Compress Mix/Passes .....................17:16 

Compressor .........................4:8, 10:19 

Configuration management ...................3:3 

Configurations .............................3:1 

Console setup ........................3:1-3:24 

Console Surface ...........................1:6 

Contribution Cards. ........................22:3 

Contribution control ...................11:3 - 11:4 

Contribution levels .........................11:3 

Contribution off. ...........................11:3 

Control links ..............................12:1 

Control room monitoring .................8:3-8:4 

Controlling EQ on the channel strips ..........10:14 

Controlling Transports ......................15:3 

Copy a Title ..............................17:6 

Copy configuration to floppy/optical disk .........1:3 

Copy path configurations ....................4:10 

Copying complete client or project data. ........3:12 

Copying links between control types ...........12:5 

Copying path configurations ................10:27 

Correction of numeric timecode entry .........15:14 

Create a Client, Project or Title ...............17:4 

Creating a bank ...........................3:17 

Creating a label through the screen. ..........15:18 

Creating a password ........................2:5 

Creating a sequence store list ...............19:11 

Creating a store ...........................19:3 

Creating new labels .......................15:21 

CSP...................................20:41 

CSP meters .............................20:51 

Cue sends ..........................11:8 - 11:9 

Cue Source ..............................11:9 

Cues .............................11:1 - 11:10 

Current Config .............................3:4 


Index 


Current config update ......................17:7 

Current configuration loaded ..................3:3 

CutaCue...............................11:10 

Cut a path ...............................8:22 

Cut level in solo ...........................8:14 

Cut solo .................................8:12 

Cut solo mode ............................8:17 

Cut solo pre aux cut. .......................8:15 

Cut the Control Room Monitor output ...........8:5 

CXS relays. ..............................6:14 

Cycle ..................................15:22 

Cycle From and To markers ................15:16 

D 

De port ..................................5:10 

De port a track send. ........................5:8 

De-assign all paths from a bank ..............3:21 

De-assigning channel strips from a bank. .......3:20 

De-assing processing .......................4:6 

Default Client .............................17:4 

Delay times for system events. ................6:5 

Delete a client, project or title. ................17:6 

Delete a configuration .......................3:8 

Delete a link ..............................12:2 

Delete a Mix/Pass ........................17:17 

Delete events. ............................18:4 

Deleting a label from the list. ................15:19 

Deleting links .............................12:5 

Deleting the mix tree ......................17:17 

Deporting Options .........................5:10 

Desk level ................................6:3 

Desk level setup. ...........................9:2 

Diagnostics ........................22:1 - 22:10 

Digital word length .........................5:13 

Dim level .................................8:6 

Dim level for solo ..........................8:14 

Dim level when APL/PFL is active .............8:19 

Dim monitors .............................6:19 

Dim the Control Room Monitor output ...........8:6 

Disk maintenance ..........................3:9 

Display all the slaves of a master ............12:10 

Display brightness control screen ..............6:7 

Display screen, introduction. .................1:26 

Dither ...................................5:13 

Divergence. .............................20:38 

Double action keys, introduction ..............2:11 

DS4...................................20:45 

DSP diagnostic options .....................22:2 

Dual mono ................................7:6 

Dual Mono source .........................10:6 

Dynamics controls ........................10:16 

E 

Edit a label ..............................15:16 

Editing a bank ............................3:17 

Editing Links. .............................12:2 

Editing the auto record drop-in time. ..........15:23 

Eject a magneto-optical disk .................3:11 

Entry level menu, soft panel. ..................2:8 

EQ Cards ................................22:3 

EQ on the channel strips ...................10:14 

Equalizer ...............................10:13 

EX-M, EX-S and EX-C. ......................6:4 

Expand the Mix Tree ......................17:16 

Expander gate ...........................10:22 

External inputs from digital sources. ...........6:11 

External key .............................10:24 

External key source .......................10:21 

External port selection ......................6:12 

F 

FAC selection. ............................2:12 

FACs ...................................2:11 

Fader relays. .............................4:11 

Fader to Aux Copy. .......................10:29 

Faders ..................................1:11 

Faders, VCA operation .....................12:8 

Faulty element in a card. ....................22:3 

Film mode ................................7:6 

Film tracks ..............................10:11 

Filters ..................................10:15 

Find a path. ..............................22:4 

Fix the monitoring level for speakers ............8:5 

Foldback mix .............................8:10 

Foot/Frame ..............................15:9 

Foreign solo mode .........................8:13 

Form a new link ...........................12:1 

Forming a link via the graphics interface ........12:4 

Frame Rate ..............................15:7 

Free up a resource. .........................4:7 

Freeze a panning axis, joystick module. .......20:39 

Freeze overdub ...........................6:19 

Fuel gauge, hard disk ...................3:8, 3:14 

Function assignable control selection ..........2:12 

Function assignable controls .................2:11 

Function indicators. ........................10:3 

G 

Gain ....................................10:5 

Gate ...............................4:8, 10:22 

Gearing ..................................6:9 

Getting Started. .......................2:1-2:14 

Glide. ..................................17:34 

Glide time. ..............................17:28 

Grab the diamond on the joystick display ......20:38 

Graphics Display ...........................2:2 

Graphics display, introduction ................1:26 

Graphics options ...........................9:5 

H 

Hard disk organisation .......................1:2 

Headroom ................................6:3 

Hi-res meter mode ..........................9:3 

HOLD. .................................18:13 

Hold the current path, joystick module. ........20:36 

I 

Icons on the graphics screen. .................2:3 

IMAX surround format. ................20:3, 20:14 

In port. ..................................5:11 

Initial snapshot amendment. ................17:38 

Input Balance. ............................10:5 

Input meter overload ........................9:2 

Input Paths. ..............................10:4 

Input source ..............................10:4 



Index 

Input source selection ......................10:4 

Input/output configuration ...............5:1-5:22 

Insert stock. ..............................18:8 

Insert Stock ..............................18:5 

Insertion in/out ...........................10:26 

Inserts ..................................5:14 

Inserts in surround monitoring ...............20:45 

Intensity of surface controls ...................6:7 

Interlock solo .............................8:20 

Interrogation, signal routing ...................7:5 

Introduction ..........................1:1-1:28 

IO Reset. ................................22:7 

Isolate .................................17:24 

Isolate a path from a link ....................12:3 

ISS amendment ..........................17:38 

ISS amendment for mic/line input selection. ....17:39 

ISS amendment for routing .................17:38 

J 

Joystick automation .......................20:40 

Joystick control replication. .................20:36 

Joystick module ..........................20:35 

Joystick module displays ...................20:35 

Joystick module, path selection ..............20:36 

Joystick panning .........................20:37 

Joystick touch sensitivity ...................20:38 

K 

Keyboard gearing. ..........................6:9 

Keys, double action ........................2:11 

L 

Label list. ...............................15:15 

Labels ............................15:15, 15:18 

Latched solo. .............................8:20 

Latching ................................17:34 

Left or right speaker cut ......................8:5 

Left-right swap .............................8:6 

Level control for inserts ....................10:26 

Level for APL/PFL .........................8:19 

Limiter ..............................4:8, 10:17 

Link information ...........................12:5 

Link Isolate. ..............................12:3 

Links ...............................12:1, 12:5 

Links and automation modes. ................12:6 

Links and trim. ............................12:6 

List Nodes ...............................22:4 

Local Aux selection ........................11:5 

Local zero offset. ..........................15:8 

Locate Path ..............................22:4 

Locate to a Label .........................15:25 

Locate to a specific Timecode ...............15:26 

Locate using the Soft Panel. ................15:27 

Locating ................................15:24 

Log out from the current user. .................2:5 

Logging on to the system. ....................2:4 

Logging-on to the system. ....................2:1 

Logs ...............................22:6, 22:8 

Loudspeakers for monitoring ..................8:5 

M 

Machine Control. ..........................15:2 

Machine groups ...........................15:2 

Machine record enable switching. .............15:5 

Machine Selection .........................15:2 

Machine status switching. ...................15:5 

MADI Link selection .........................5:4 

Madi links. ...............................5:20 

Main Output meters .........................9:9 

Make Safe ...............................15:5 

Manual glide. ............................17:28 

Manual Glide time ........................17:28 

Mark Bad ................................22:3 

Mark Label ........................15:15, 15:21 

MARK label .............................15:21 

Master Record ...........................17:33 

Master Solo Controls ........................8:3 

Merge. ...........................18:14 - 18:16 

Meter control screen ........................9:3 

Meter graphics options. ......................9:5 

Meter mode selection. .......................9:8 

Meter operation ............................9:3 

Meter reference point. .......................9:6 

Meter scale ............................9:2, 9:7 

Meter scale modes. .........................9:4 

Meter scale offset. ..........................9:4 

Meter the Cues ..........................11:10 

Metering. ............................9:1-9:10 

Metering point for CSP. ....................20:51 

Mic/line gain. .............................10:5 

Mic/line trim ..............................10:5 

MIDI ..........................6:20, 21:1 - 21:2 

MIDI Automation ..........................21:2 

MIDI List. ................................6:20 

MIDI program. ............................6:20 

MIDI Program Changes .....................21:1 

Milestone mixes ..........................17:18 

Miscellaneous options ......................6:14 

Miscellaneous Setup ...................6:1-6:22 

Mix abort ...............................17:21 

Mix Compare ............................18:10 

Mix compress. ...........................17:16 

Mix conform ....................18:5, 18:7 - 18:8 

Mix Merge ..............................18:10 

Mix tree ...........................16:10, 17:15 

Mix tree display ..........................17:16 

Mix tree notes ...........................17:19 

Mix Tree Text. ...........................17:20 

Mixed cues. ..............................8:11 

Mixes and passes ....................16:8, 17:15 

Momentary reverse routing ...................7:4 

Momentary solo ...........................8:20 

Monitor meters. ............................9:9 

Monitor mode. .............................8:2 

Monitor Mode Controls. ......................8:2 

Monitor Section ...........................1:19 

Monitor signal paths. .......................10:8 

Monitoring ...........................8:1-8:22 

Monitoring controls. .........................8:2 

Monitoring level ............................8:5 

Monitoring options ..........................8:5 

Monitoring other sources with CSP ...........20:44 

Mono sum ................................8:6 

Mono surround mixes .....................20:46 

Mono/stereo levels. ........................6:15 

Move a section of a Mix/Pass ................18:6 

MS......................................7:6 

MS sources ..............................10:6 

Multiple output ports. ........................5:6 


Index 


Multitrack send busses .....................10:9 

Multitrack tape machine interconnection ........5:18 

Multi-user operation .........................1:2 

Mults set up ...............................5:9 

Mute. ...................................8:22 

Mute Controls. .............................8:3 

Mute inhibit. ..............................8:14 

Mute/switch automation. ...17:40, 17:42 - 17:44, 18:4 

Mute/Switch event ........................17:41 

Mute/switch lists. .........................17:40 

N 

Name ports ...............................5:6 

Naming a path .............................4:2 

Naming a store. ...........................19:4 

O 

Offline Delete .............................18:4 

Offline Editing ......................18:1 - 18:16 

Off-line Merge ...........................18:16 

Off-line trim ..............................18:2 

Offline Trim ..............................18:2 

Offset Gain. ..............................10:5 

Offset the monitoring level ....................8:5 

Offsets ..................................12:3 

Once Only ..............................17:34 

Operating levels. ...........................6:3 

Options settings ...........................6:14 

Order Sequenced Stores by 

number or timecode. .....................19:10 

Oscillator ...........................13:1 - 13:4 

Other metering options ......................9:7 

Out-of-range offsets. .......................12:3 

Output configuration ...................5:1-5:22 

Output level for APL/PFL ....................8:19 

Overdub ..................................8:2 

Overdub freeze ...........................6:19 

Overdub monitoring .........................8:9 

Overdubbing .............................8:10 

Overload .................................9:2 

Overload LED display option ..................9:7 

Overpress ...............................8:18 

Overpress enable. .........................8:14 

Override links. ............................12:3 

P 

Pan freezing, joystick module ...............20:39 

Pan law selection, joystick module ...........20:37 

Panning film stems on the AFU ...............20:6 

Panning with the joystick ...................20:37 

Parametric equalizer ......................10:13 

Password for a Client. ......................17:4 

Passwords ................................2:5 

Path configuration .....................4:1-4:12 

Path naming. ..............................4:2 

Path numbers. ............................3:15 

Path structure. .............................1:4 

Path swap ...............................3:23 

Paths on card. ............................22:2 

PFL................................8:12, 8:18 

PFL mode ...............................8:13 

PFL Overpress. ...........................8:18 

PFL/Solo output ............................8:6 

Phantom power ...........................10:7 

Phase invert. ..............................8:6 

Phase reverse ............................10:7 

Pick up the diamond on the joystick display ....20:37 

Play pass selection .......................17:21 

Play safe ...............................17:24 

Play, automation mode ....................17:24 

Port naming ...............................5:6 

Port selection ..........................5:1, 5:5 

Port users. ...............................5:12 

Port Users ...............................5:17 

Ports, introduction ..........................1:5 

Pre Fade Listen ...........................8:12 

Pre-fade listen ............................8:18 

Pre-Roll time .............................5:22 

Preset oscillator settings ....................13:2 

Primary Access ...........................10:2 

Primary and secondary banks ................2:10 

Processing allocation, introduction .............1:4 

Processing configuration .....................4:5 

Project partition. ......................1:3, 16:11 

Purge repeated Mute/Switch events ..........17:44 

Q 

Quick Start, Automation. ....................17:1 

Quick Store ..............................19:4 

R 

Real Time Merge .........................18:14 

Reboot System ...........................22:9 

Recall a configuration .......................3:5 

Recalling a store ..........................19:5 

Record Ready ............................15:5 

Record to end ...........................17:31 

Rehearse ................................15:6 

Rehearse collect touch ....................17:35 

Relay Event List. .........................17:45 

Relay Events in Scope. ....................17:12 

Relays ..................................4:11 

Remove a VCA ...........................12:9 

Remove all VCA Groups ...................12:10 

Remove processing from a path ...............4:6 

Rename a bank. ......................3:17, 3:22 

Rename a client, project or title ...............17:5 

Rename an existing configuration ..............3:8 

Replacement of original timecode ............15:14 

Replacement of timecode in free format .......15:14 

Reset switch. ..............................2:1 

Resetting controls .........................2:13 

Resetting the overdub system ................8:11 

Resource is used up ........................4:7 

Return cues ..............................8:11 

Reverse routing ............................7:3 

Rollback time .............................5:22 

Rotary controls. ...........................2:11 

Route tone ...............................13:2 

Routing ..............................7:2-7:4 

Routing auxes ............................11:2 

Routing touch. ...........................17:38 



Index 

S 

Safety Net ..............................15:16 

Safety stop. ..............................6:18 

Safety store ..............................17:7 

Safety Store ...............................3:4 

Safety store times .........................6:19 

Sample frequency ..........................6:2 

Scope. .............................17:8 - 17:9 

Scope by Control ..........................17:9 

Scope by Path ...........................17:11 

Scope for Switch and User Lists .............17:40 

Scope Information ........................17:13 

Scope Map Display .......................17:13 

Scope of automation control .................16:5 

Scratch mix ..............................17:1 

Scrolling lists ..............................2:3 

Secondary access .........................10:2 

Segment marker .........................15:16 

Select a rack ..............................5:4 

Select a Store to Merge ....................18:12 

Selecting a screen object. ....................2:2 

Selecting the removable disk drive ............3:11 

Sequence Stores by timecode. ..............19:10 

Sequenced store list ............19:9, 19:11 - 19:13 

Setting up dynamics processing ...............4:8 

Setting up the glide time ...................17:28 

Setting up the pre-roll time. ..................5:22 

Setting up the rollback time ..................5:22 

Setting up the tape machine .................5:19 

Shut down ...............................22:8 

Side chain delay ....................10:18, 10:21 

Side chain ganging ..................10:18, 10:20 

Side-chain control ........................10:17 

Side-chain filter .....................10:16, 10:19 

Side-chain listen. .........................10:17 

Side-chain source selection. ................10:23 

Signal matrix .............................4:11 

Signal path delay .........................10:25 

Signal path meter overload ...................9:2 

Signal path structure ........................1:4 

Signal ports, introduction .....................1:5 

Signal present threshold .....................9:5 

Signal Processing ...................10:1 - 10:30 

Signal routing. .........................7:1-7:6 

Slate oscillator ............................13:3 

Slide a Mix/Pass ..........................18:9 

SLS and headphone monitoring ...............8:7 

SLS/phones ...............................8:2 

Snapshot stores. ...........................3:2 

Soft panel ............................1:24, 2:7 

Solo. ..........................8:12 - 8:13, 8:17 

Solo combine .............................8:15 

Solo Controls ..............................8:3 

Solo cut level .............................8:14 

Solo immune .............................8:16 

Solo memory operation .....................8:21 

Solo Modes ..............................8:12 

Solo options ..............................8:13 

Solo Reset ...............................8:20 

Solo setup ...............................8:13 

Solo switch operation. ......................8:20 

Solo with CSP enabled ....................20:48 

Source for a Cue ..........................11:9 

Source to be monitored ......................8:4 

Speaker level fixed. .......................20:49 

Speaker selection for surround monitoring .....20:42 

Speakers level offset ........................8:5 

Start of pass timecode .....................17:36 

Starting the Automation System ..............17:3 

Starting Up Capricorn .......................2:1 

Status Switching ..........................15:5 

Stem sel. .................................7:6 

Stereo Auxes .............................11:3 

Stereo tracks ............................10:10 

Stop System. .............................22:8 

Store a new configuration ....................3:5 

Store scope ..............................19:3 

Stores ............................19:1 - 19:16 

Stores sequence list ............19:9, 19:11 - 19:12 

Strip assignment .....................3:17 - 3:18 

Strip Section. ..............................1:7 

Studio default configuration ...................3:4 

Studio start-up .............................3:4 

Super Mon mode ...........................8:9 

Surface controls. ..........................6:19 

Surround monitoring speaker selection ........20:42 

Surround panel ..........................20:41 

Surround sound joystick module .............20:35 

Surround sound options. ..............20:1 - 20:52 

Surround sound panning ....................20:6 

Swap paths ..............................3:23 

Swap signals on left and right speakers .........8:6 

Swap the left and right legs on a 

stereo digital input ........................10:4 

Switch automation ........................17:40 

Switch event. ............................17:41 

Switch mode of relays ......................4:12 

Switch on the system. .......................2:1 

Sync Replay channel .......................15:6 

Synchroniser Status. .......................15:8 

System configuration ........................3:3 

System partition ............................1:2 

T 

Talkback ...........................14:1 - 14:4 

Talkback Group Levels .....................14:4 

Talkback Setup ...........................14:1 

Talkback switching. ...................14:2 - 14:3 

Tap toggle ...............................6:19 

Tape machine control ................15:1 - 15:28 

Tape machine controls. .....................5:19 

Timecode ...............15:7 - 15:8, 15:10 - 15:14 

Timecode configuration .....................15:7 

Timecode display. ........................15:10 

Timecode display format ....................15:9 

Timecode editing .........................15:11 

Timecode entry ..........................15:11 

Timecode entry formats ....................15:11 

Timecode flywheel .........................15:8 

Timecode offset specification by numeric keys . . 15:12 

Timecode offset specification by trackball ......15:12 

Timecode offset specification in free format ....15:13 

Timecode synthesis options. .................15:8 

Timecode type ............................15:7 

Title to work with ..........................17:4 

Titles ...................................17:3 

To add new processing resources. .............4:6 

To assign a port to a path ....................5:2 

To change the path configuration ..............4:6 

To copy a title. ............................17:6 

To copy data from a removable 

device onto the hard disk. ..................3:13 

To copy data from the hard disk 

to the removable device. ...................3:12 

To copy path configurations. .................4:10 

To delete a client, project or title ..............17:6 

To delete a configuration .....................3:8 


Index 


To delete files from a removable disk ..........3:13 

To make the signal path mono. ...............4:10 

To make the signal path stereo ................4:9 

To recall a configuration. .....................3:5 

To recall the Studio Default Configuration ........3:4 

To remove a processing element 

from the signal path ........................4:6 

To rename a client, project or title .............17:5 

To rename an existing configuration ............3:8 

To select a rack ............................5:4 

To set the DIM level. ........................8:6 

To store a new configuration ..................3:5 

To update an existing configuration. ............3:7 

To update the Studio Default Configuration. ......3:4 

Tone oscillator ............................13:1 

Touch detector re-calibration ..................6:8 

Touch record ............................17:26 

Touch Record ...........................18:14 

Track allocation ...........................5:18 

Track Arming .............................15:4 

Track Contribution .........................10:9 

Track metering. ............................9:5 

Track ready .........................15:4 - 15:6 

Track send de porting .......................5:8 

Track send level control. ...................10:12 

Track Sends. .............................10:9 

Trackball .............................1:25, 2:2 

Trackball and keyboard gearing. ...............6:9 

Trackball buttons ...........................2:2 

Tracks setup .............................10:9 

Tracksend Porting ..........................5:7 

Transport Control. ...................15:1 - 15:28 

Trim. ........................10:5, 17:30 - 17:31 

Trim extents ..............................18:2 

TS/TR stereo matching ....................10:10 

U 

Update an existing configuration ...............3:7 

User Log-On ..............................2:4 

User partition ..............................1:2 

Using channel strip banks ...................10:1 

Using the AFU ............................2:13 

Using the Trackball .........................2:2 

V 

VCA coalesce ...........................12:10 

VCA control. .........................12:7, 12:9 

VCA control groups, forming and editing ........12:7 

VCA group control via the graphics interface. ....12:9 

VCA operation, faders ......................12:8 

VCA slaves .............................12:10 

View the paths on a processing card. ..........22:2 

W 

What to do when you have used 

up all the resources ........................4:7 

Width ..................................20:38 

Wordclock source ..........................6:2 

Wordclock synchronisation screen .............6:2

User Manual - AMS Neve

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?